Home

User Manual PDF

1. Note You can adjust the exterior mirrors electrically The exterior mirror heater only operates when the engine is running Do not touch the surfaces of the exterior mirrors if the exterior mirror heater is switched on You can set the exterior mirrors by hand if the power setting function fails at any time by pressing on the edge of the mirror surface Contact your specialist garage if a fault exists with the power setting of the exterior mirrors W A j Fig 49 Inner part of door Rotary knob Adjust the rear mirror before commencing to drive so that there is a clear view to the rear Dimming the interior mirror Pull the lever on the bottom edge of the mirror toward rear the lever on the interior mirror must point forwards in it home position Heating of the external mirror Turn the rotary knob to position Gl fig 49 Adjusting the left hand exterior mirror Turn the rotary knob to position L The movement of the mirror surface is iden tical to the movement of the rotary knob Adjusting the right hand exterior mirror Turn the rotary knob to position R The movement of the mirror surface is iden tical to the movement of the rotary knob Z WARNING Convex curved outward exterior mirrors increase the field of vision They do however make objects appear smaller in the mirror These mirrors are only of limited use therefore for estimating distances to th
2. DR TAA Fig 92 The air conditioning system Control elements Setting temperature Turn the control dial A gt fig 92 to the right in order to increase the tempera ture Turn the control dial A to the left in order to increase the temperature Controlling blower Turn the blower switch 8 into one of the positions 1 to 4 in order to switch the blower on Turn the blower switch 8 into position O in order to switch the blower off Ifyou wish to shut off the fresh air supply use the button recirculated air mode gt page 83 gt Heating and air conditioning system ao Control for air distribution You can adjust the direction of the inlet air flow using control switching cooling on and off Press the button AC gt page 80 fig 92 The warning light lights up in the button When you again press the switch AC the cooling system is switched off The warning light in the button goes out a Note The whole heat output will be needed to unfrost the windscreen and side windows No warm air will be fed to the footwell This can lead to restriction of the heating comfort The indicator light in the button lights up after switching on the system if some of the conditions were not satisfied for operating the air conditioner It is also used to indicate the system s cooling readiness when all of the conditions have been met gt page 80 Description of th
3. ZN WARNING continued e Do not place any footmats or other additional floor coverings in the area of the pedals in order to ensure that all the pedals can be fully depressed and are able to return unobstructed to their initial position risk of accident There must be no objects on the floor which could roll under the pedals You would then no longer be able to apply the brakes operate the clutch or acceler ator risk of accident m luggage compartment Loading the luggage compartment Please observe the following in the interest of maintaining good handling charac teristics of your vehicle Distribute the items of luggage as evenly as possible Place heavy objects as far forward as possible Attach the items of luggage to the lashing eyes or the fixing net gt page 61 In the event of an accident there is such a high kinetic energy which is produced by small and light objects that they can cause severe injuries The magnitude of the kinetic energy depends on the speed at which the vehicle is travelling and on the weight of the object The speed at which the vehicle is travelling is in this case the more significant factor Example In the event of a frontal collision at a speed of 50 km h an unsecured object with a weight of 4 5 kg produces an energy which corresponds to 20 times its own weight This means that it results in a weight of approx 90 kg You can imagine the injuries that can occur if thi
4. Note It is necessary after each emergency operation using Allen key to move the sliding tilting roof into the basic position Here you have to turn the control dial forward to the switch position a gt page 43 fig 33 and press for about 10 seconds m Lights and Visibility Lights B5J 7007H Fig 35 Dash panel Light switch fuse box Switch for daylight driving lights Switching on side lights Turn the light switch fig 35 left into position 2 Switching on the low beam and main beam Turn the light switch into position 0 Press the main beam lever forward in order to switch on the main beam gt page 49 fig 39 Switching off lights except daylight driving lights Turn the light switch into position O During the engine start the low beam lights are switched off automatically On vehicles fitted with right hand steering the position of the switches differs to some extent from the position shown on fig 35 The symbols which mark the switch positions are identical however Z WARNING Never drive with side lights on risk of accident The side lights are not bright enough to light up the road sufficiently in front of you or to be seen by other Using the system Lights and Visibility as ZN WARNING continued oncoming traffic In this case always switch on the low beam when it is dark or if visibility is poor a Note in vehicles with separate lights
5. Check whether the airbag indicator light in the display PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF 2 in the middle of the dash panel lights up when the ignition is switched on gt fig 122 right EA Airbag system Switching on an airbag Switch off the ignition Turn the slot of the airbag switch using the ignition key in the opposite direction of the arrow to the position ON gt page 123 fig 122 left Check whether the airbag indicator light in the display PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF in the middle of the dash panel does not light up when the ignition is switched on gt page 123 fig 122 right The airbag should only be switched off under exceptional circumstances gt page 123 Indicator light in display PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF airbag switched off The airbag indicator light is located in the middle of the dash panel gt page 123 fig 122 right If the airbag is switched on the airbag indicator light comes on for a few seconds after switching on the ignition In cases where the front passenger airbag is switched off the airbag indicator light comes on for a few seconds after switching on the ignition goes out for about a second and then comes on again There is a system fault present in the airbag switch off A if the indicator light flashes Z WARNING The driver is responsible for whether the airbag is switched on or switched off Only switch off the airbag when the ignition is switched off Other
6. Defect fuses can be detected by their melted metal strips Replace the defect fuse by a new fuse of the same ampere number gt Z WARNING Read and observe the warning notes gt page 158 Working in the engine compartment before working in the engine compartment Caution Never attempt to repair fuses and also do not replace them with a fuse of a higher amperage risk of fire This may also cause damage at another part of the electrical system Have the electrical system checked as quickly as possible by a specialist garage if a newly inserted fuse blows again after a short time i Note We recommend that you have these fuses replaced by a specialist garage E Fuse assignment at the battery manual gearbox automatic gearbox DSG Fig 166 Schematic representation of fuse assignment at battery Certain electrical components are only standard on certain vehicle model versions or only suppliable as optional equipment for certain models No Power consumer 1 Dynamo 2 Not assigned 3 Interior Fuses and light bulbs 89 No Power consumer Electrical auxiliary heating system Interior Glow plugs coolant fan 4 5 6 7 Electrohydraulic power steering 8 ABSor TCS or ESP 9 The radiator fan 10 Not assigned 11 ABS or TCS or ESP 12 Central control unit 13 Automatic gearbox electrical auxiliary heating system Caution Please refer to the following guidelines in R
7. Quick Reference Guide Switching lights on and off Fig 7 Dash panel Light switch 0 Switching off all lights Switching on side lights Switching on the low beam and main beam D Fog lights Q Rear fog light Further information gt page 45 Switching lights on and off m Turn signal and main beam lever O EOL ONO Fig 8 Turn signal and main beam lever Turn signal light right Turn signal light left Switching over between low beam and main beam lights Headlight flasher Further information gt page 49 The turn signal gt and main beam lever 20 m Windscreen wiper lever Fig 9 Windscreen wiper lever Intermittent switch Wipers off Q Intermittent wipe Slow wipe Fast wipe one time wipe Automatic wipe wash Rear window wiper Intermittent wipe every 6 seconds Automatic wipe wash Further information page 52 Windshield wiper m Quick Reference Guide Power windows Hold the fuel tank cap of the fuel filler tube with one hand and unlock it by E turning with the vehicle key to the left Unscrew the fuel filler cap anti clockwise and place the fuel filler cap from above on the fuel filler flap gt fig 11 right Closing fuel filler cap Screw on the cap by turning it to the right until it is heard to lock Hold the fuel filler cap on the fuel filler tube with one hand and lock it
8. sseeeeeeeees v3 Catalytic converter o on 140 First aid box and warning triangle 175 Driving in an economical and environmentally Fire extinguisher sseseeseveeeseeenaees Ua conscious Manner ee ccc cecccccceccecceecees 141 Vehicletoal kit wciccienicnanveariecuua ina iis 175 Environmental compatibility c 144 Spare wheel eceeee esses cece eee ee eens 176 Motoring abr0ad oi ciprecisrsiriagirriivosi sas 145 Changing awheel srrssisicsisesserericercinei 176 Avoiding damage to your vehicle 145 a 180 Driving through bodies of water on roads 145 JUMP StartiNg oiire 182 TOWING a trale wincevenee neces dean tauteaeaaiens 147 EVE E i edie ea icine Towing atrailer erisus aniraa 147 Fuses and light bulbs 000 186 BIECEICHUSES Milan iaws eines tae aoin aiiin 186 BUIDS sec a2tcen eter ie hea nA 191 General Maintenance 149 Taking care of your vehicle and cleaning the Technical data 0 0 0000 197 VENICIE seeaidantvecaPehieddine teceerenraeRedenal 149 AE eiseccc Bechet ete tid deehte ne bideen ent jag Technical Data l 197 Care of the exterior of vehicle 00005 149 General information 6 sees eee eee es 197 Care of the interior of vehicle 00 cee 153 Used abbreviations 1 sce eee ee eee ee ees 197 POrOnmanGes aidan einer encame sername 197 WEIGHT seirirodawdetier tienta mini h niaaa 197 Contents Ea Using the system Driving Tips Ge
9. 1 Consumption 5 3 100k 18 5 C km tnp 12440 1253 2 Fig 102 Selector lever manual shifting large information display Manual shifting of gears The selector lever position you have engaged is indicated in the information display of the instrument cluster together with the engaged gear fig 102 on the right Switching over to manual shifting Push the selector lever to the right out of position D After switching over the current engaged gear is indicated in the display Shifting up gears One touch forward of the selector lever in the Tiptronic position gt page 98 fig 102 Shifting down gears One touch back of the selector lever in the Tiptronic position It is possible to switch over to manual both when the car is stationary and also when driving When you accelerate the gearbox shifts up automatically into the higher gear just before the maximum permissible engine speed is reached If you select a lower gear the automatic gearbox does not shift down until there is no risk of the engine overrewving If you operate the kickdown function the gearbox shifts into a lower gear in line with the vehicle speed and engine speed m Manual shifting on the multifunction steering wheel AA o Fig 103 Multifunction steering wheel Manual shifting of gears Switching over to manual shifting Push the selector lever to the right out of position D After switching over the current engaged
10. Driving time The driving time which has elapsed since the memory was last erased appears in the display page 19 If you wish to calculate the driving time from a particular time of day you must first erase the memory at this moment in time by pressing the button 8 gt page 19 fig 19 The maximum distance indicated in both memories is 19 hours and 59 minutes 99 hours and 59 minutes in vehicles with an information display The indicator is set back to null if this period is exceeded m Current fuel consumption The current fuel consumption level is shown in the display in litres 100 km This information can help you to adapt your style of driving to the fuel consumption you wish to achieve The display appears in litres hour if the vehicle is stationary or driving at a low speed The indicated value will be updated every 0 5 seconds while you are driving E Average fuel consumption The average fuel consumption since the memory was last erased is shown in the display in litres 100 km page 19 This information can help you to adapt your style of driving to the fuel consumption you wish to achieve If you wish to determine the average fuel consumption over a certain period of time you must erase the memory at the start of the new measurement using the button on the windshield wiper lever page 19 fig 19 A zero appears in the display for approx the first 300 m you drive after erasing the memory The indicated value will
11. Switch the engine off Open the bonnet A in Working in the engine compartment on page 158 Wait a few minutes for the engine oil to flow back into the oil sump and remove the dip stick Wipe off the dipstick with a clean cloth and insert it again fully Then withdraw the dipstick again and read off the oil level Oil level within range a You must not top up the oil 160 Inspecting and Replenishing Oil level within range You may top up the oil It is possible that the oil level may then be within range after doing this Oil level within range You must top up the oil page 161 It is sufficient once this is done to keep the oil level is within range It is normal for the engine to consume oil The oil consumption may be as much as 0 5 1 1000 km depending on your style of driving and the conditions under which you operate your vehicle The oil consumption may be slightly higher than this during the first 5 000 kilometres One should therefore check the oil level at regular intervals preferably every time after the fuel tank is filled or after driving for long stretches We recommend maintaining the oil level within the range if the engine has been operating at high loads for example during a lengthy motorway trip during the summer months towing a trailer or negotiating a high mountain pass but not above this The warning light in the instrument cluster will indicate whether th
12. Z WARNING continued Any work on the head airbag system including installing and removing system components because of other repair work e g removing headliner must only be carried out by a specialist garage m Deactivating airbags Deactivating airbags If any airbags have been deactivated switch them on again as soon as possible so that they are able to again provide their proper protection There is the technical means installed within your vehicle to switch off the front side or head airbag take out of commission This is why you should have the deactivation of the airbags carried out by a specialist garage On vehicles equipped with the switch for deactivation of the airbags you can deac tivate the front passenger airbag by means of this switch gt page 123 Deactivation of airbags is envisaged only for particular instances such as if You must in exceptional cases use a child seat on the front passenger seat where the child is seated with its back to the direction of travel in some countries this must be in the direction of travel due to other legal regulations applying gt page 125 Important safety information regarding the use of child safety seats you are not able to maintain the distance of at least 25 cm between middle of steering wheel and chest despite the driver seat being correctly adjusted special attachments are required in the area of the steering wheel because
13. 0c eee eee 84 Recirculated air mode scenes 85 Setting temperature cece eee eee 84 Climatronic automatic air conditioning 83 ClO CK a oad E EEE E EEE 18 Clothes HOOKS oi cicinccienedndernaaeaide race 76 Cockpit General ViOW 0 cect ees 9 COMPSFMENtS ic aaw is deawwta awe bpa 73 COMPUTER errore sede ee se nainn ss Wa nipti odani ae 18 Convenience operation c cece eee ees 42 Converting masking over headlights 145 CODEINE EEEE E E winnie 161 replenishing sercrrcirirreriirierirsssii 163 Warning light sereriteisrreriiveniniiieiis 28 Coolant level Warning light sererrerscisrgioridieinersas 28 Coolant quantity Warning ight sereis rerieriwrcitiire siwi 28 Coolant temperature gauge sssusa 16 Coolant temperature coolant level Warning light 0 cece e eee eee 28 Cornering light cece cece eens 46 Correct seated position 0 cece eee 110 Counter for distance driven 0e eee 16 Cruise control Warning liQht icc cseece ees ina ean acne 31 Cruise control system 1 1 cece eee eee 91 Cup holder TONE tise cincuaehincdediawadtnls EEEE Renan 70 POOR a cones anton aatict genie almantavar datas E PEE 71 D Dash panel insert 0 cece eee teen eee 15 Daylight driving lights 0 ee 45 193 Deactivating an airbag ce eee 123 Defrosting rear WindoW 0e eee ences 51 De icing the Windows cece e renee 151 D
14. Bo 1 TT fA pg j a aam AUTO wax GD 27 Fig 93 Climatronic Control elements aS B5J 6055H gal Heating and air conditioning system Buttons control dial Setting the interior temperature The displays Display of selected inside temperature e g 22 C 72 F Degrees Celsius or Fahrenheit Automatic air conditioning mode De mist or de ice the windscreen Air flow to the windscreen head upper body and feet Recirculated air mode Air conditioning system switched on Set blower speed GGO Buttons control dial Setting the blower speed Interior temperature sensor Automatic mode De mist or de ice the windscreen Air flow to the windows Air flow to head Air flow in the footwell Recirculated air mode Air conditioning system switched on a Note The interior temperature sensor 11 is located in the bottom part of the device Do not glue or cover over the sensor otherwise it could have an unfavourable effect on the Climatronic m Q O QOQOOOO Automatic mode The automatic mode is used in order to maintain a constant temper ature and to demist the windows in the interior of the car Switching automatic mode on Seta temperature between 18 C 64 F and 29 C 86 F Move the air outlet vents 3 and 4 so that the air flow is directed slightly upwards Press the button AUTO AUTO appears in the display The automatic mode is switched off by pressing the button for the a
15. Caution e Your vehicle can only be operated with diesel fuel which complies with the standard EN 590 standard DIN 51628 in Germany standard ONORM C 1590 in Austria GOST R 52368 2005 EN 590 2004 in Russia Filling the tank even only once with diesel fuel which does not comply with the standard can result in damage to the engine parts the lubrication system the fuel and exhaust system e If by mistake you have refuelled with a different fuel other than the diesel fuel which complies to the above mentioned standards e g petrol do not start the engine or switch on the ignition Major engine damage is possible Contact a specialist garage and have the fuel system of the engine cleaned Water which has collected in the fuel filter can result in engine problems Your vehicle is not adapted for use of biofuel RME therefore this fuel must not be refuelled and driven The use of biofuel RME can lead to damage to the engine or the fuel system m Operation in winter Winter grade diesel fuel A different grade of diesel fuel is available at filling stations in winter than during the summer Using summer grade diesel fuel at temperatures below 0 C can result in operational problems because the diesel becomes viscous as a result of paraffin separation For this reason the standard EN 590 also DIN 51628 in Germany NORM C 1590 in Austria GOST R 52368 2005 EN 590 2004 in Russia prescribes the diesel fuel class for each
16. Recirculated air mode c e eee ee 80 Heating the front seats cece e eee es 58 HOIN scidannnd ged nome ndinn nus hada prin eiia 9 l IGNITION aaua ennad a antaa a haa o ai a 86 ignition lok iciieiecicendeaei teens eieaaaers 86 linterior lighting REAM isis pee ceGweoa eee puida ienaa 50 Immobiliser oeit nen aAa aE e ee 34 Information display c eee eee e aes 22 Instrument cluster 6 0 cece eee eee 15 Interior light Luggage compartment ccc eee eee aes 51 Interior lighting VersioM lydreruipioorive agea tiniis Pees 49 VETSINA inuidia ei onago aaa tanned cet 50 mternor MirTOT sairipioiniwisaiiie t uieieiiai 54 Interior MONITOR nines cae eee eon etenei 40 Intermittent WIPING asauran ea ia 52 SOFIX ver tues Maeda nooti te Ene baru EEr 130 ISOFIX SYSTEM irina ei antindetereasinm iek deans 130 JACKING POINTS wwii iace ci craee nanan ee nae oee 179 JUMP Starting os beccen sence as ia dtene cee 182 183 L LASMINGCYOS cerirreriioree iana kiied eea 61 Leather CAP ecri tieri ne iN EERE REE 153 Lights converting masking over iiec 145 Range adjustment ccc eee eee 48 switching on and off 0 eee ee aes 45 Warning lights 0 cece eee eee 25 Lights and Visibility 0 cece eee eae 48 Liquid in reservoir for windscreen washer system Warning light cciecsicci esa veciveceices caus 29 ROSCA tcc seimee sare aaieit a caveat heht doe esdasedide 60 Lock Central
17. Remove foreign bodies from the tyre profile e Tyre damage is often hidden Unusual vibrations or pulling of the vehicle to one side could be a sign of tyre damage Please reduce your speed immediately and stop if you suspect that a wheel is damaged Inspect the tyres for signs of damage bulges splits etc If no visible damage is present please drive at an appropriately slow speed and carefully to the nearest specialist garage in order to have your vehicle inspected e Also protect your tyres from contact with oil grease and fuel Immediately replace any dust caps of the valves which have got lost Mark wheels before removing them so that their previous direction of running can be maintained when mounted them again e Always store wheels or tyres which been removed in a cool dry and where possible dark place Tyres which are not fixed to a wheel trim should be stored upright Unidirectional tyres The direction of rotation of the tyres is marked by arrows on the wall of the tyre This indicates the direction of rotation of the tyre and it is essential that the tyres are fitted on to run in this direction Only then are the tyres able to provide the optimal properties in terms of grip low noise wear and tear and aquaplaning Further information concerning the use of unidirectional tyres gt page 173 Wheels and Tyres 169 Z WARNING New tyres during the first 500 km do not offer optimal grip and should there f
18. Should it be necessary to fit on a spare wheel in exceptional cases with a tyre not dedicated to the running direction or in opposite running direction please adopt a cautious style of driving as the tyre is no longer able to provide optimal grip and handling in such a situation This particularly important on wet roads Please refer to the additional instructions gt page 176 Spare wheel You should have the defective tyre replaced as soon as possible and restore the correct direction of rotation on all tyres m Wheels and Tyres w Snow chains Snow chains must only be mounted on the front wheels When driving on wintry roads snow chains improve not only traction but also the braking performance For technical reasons it is only permissible to fit snow chains with the following wheel tyre combinations Wheel size Depth D Tyre size 5J x14 35 mm 165 70 6 x14 37 mm 185 60 6 x 15 43 mm 185 55 Only fit snow chains with links and locks not larger than 12 mm Remove the full wheel trims before installing the snow chains Observe the different national legal regulations relating to the use of snow chains and the maximum vehicle speed with snow chains Z WARNING Please pay attention to the information in the supplied fitting instructions of the snow chain manufacturer Caution You must take the chains off as soon as you drive on roads which are free of snow They adversely affect the handling of your v
19. T36 Intelligent Technology gt e Changes to vehicle e g on engine on the brakes on chassis or another combi nation of tyres and wheels can influence the function of the ABS gt page 174 Accessories changes and replacement of parts m Brake Assist During a severe brake application e g if a hazard exists the Brake Assist increases the braking force and thus makes it possible to rapidly produce the pressure required in the brake system The majority of drivers do apply the brakes in good time in dangerous situations but do not depress the brake pedal with sufficient pressure Consequently it is not possible for the car to achieve its maximum deceleration and the car covers a greater distance than necessary The Brake Assist is activated by the very quick operation of the brake pedal In such cases a much greater braking pressure exists than during a normal brake applica tion This makes it possible even with a relatively low resistance of the brake pedal to produce an adequate pressure in the brake system in the shortest possible time which is required for maximum deceleration of the car You must apply the brake pedal firmly and hold it in this position in order to achieve the shortest possible braking distance The Brake Assist is able to help you achieve a shorter braking distance in emergency situations by rapidly producing the pressure required in the brake system It fully exploits the attributes of the ABS
20. gt page 86 fig 95 Z WARNING e Never switch off the engine before the vehicle is stationary risk of accident The brake booster only operates when the engine is running Greater phys ical effort for braking is required when engine is switched off Because if you do not stop as normal this can cause an accident and severe injuries Caution you should not switch the engine off right away at the end of your journey after the engine has been operated for a lengthy period at high loads but should be allowed it to run at idling speed for about 2 minutes This prevents any accumulation of heat when the engine is switched off Note e The radiator fan may continue running for a further 10 minutes or so after the engine and the ignition have been switched off The coolant fan may however also switch on again after some time if the coolant temperature rises because of an accumulation of heat in the engine or if the engine is warm and the engine compart ment is additionally heated by strong sunlight e This is why particular care is required when carrying out any work in the engine compartment gt page 158 Working in the engine compartment E Shifting manual gearbox Fig 96 Shift pattern on models fitted with 5 speed manual gearbox Shift into reverse only when the car is stationary Depress the clutch pedal and hold it fully depressed Wait a moment before engaging reverse gear in order to avoid any
21. plant to the customer The use of solvent free adhesives No CFCs used in the production process Without use of mercury Use of water soluble paints Trade in and recycling of old cars Skoda Auto meets the requirements of the brand and its products regarding envi ronment and ressource protection All new Skoda vehicles can be utilized up to 95 and always be returned In a lot of countries sufficient trade in networks have been created where you can trade in your vehicle After you trade in your vehicle you will receive a confirmation stating the recycling in accordance with environ mental regulations Vehicles with special built on types Technical documents regarding changes carried out on the vehicle must be kept by the vehicle user in order to hand over later to the old car user This ensures the recycling in accordance with environmental regulations Subject to fulfilment of the national legal requirements a Note Detailed information about the trade in and recycling of old cars is available from a Skoda Service Partner m Motoring abroad General Other circumstances may exist abroad It is also possible in certain countries that the Skoda Service Partner network is limited or has not been established yet This is the reason why obtaining certain spare parts may be somewhat complicated and specialist garage personnel may only be able to make limited repairs Skoda Auto in the Czech Republic and its fore
22. 206 Technical Data Engine 1 4 1 63 kW EU5 Output kW per rpm Max torque Nm per rpm Number of cylinders Displacement cm 63 5000 132 3800 4 1390 Performances FABIA ESTATE CAR Maximum speed km h 175 176 Acceleration 0 100 km h s 12 2 123 Fuel consumption in Itr 100 km and CO in g km Urban 8 0 Non urban 4 7 Combination 59 CO emission combination 139 Weight in kg Permissible gross weight 1559 1529 1579 1534 Unloaden weight ready for work 1104 1124 1000 500 1000 450 Permissible trailer load trailer braked unbraked 1200 500 1200 450 a a Vehicles of category N1 b Uphills up to 12 Uphills up to 8 Technical Data on Engine 1 6 I 77 kW EU4 EU2 DDK Output kW per rpm Max torque Nm per rpm Number of cylinders Displacement cm 7715600 153 3800 4 1598 Performances FABIA M5 FABIA AQ6 COMBI M5 COMBI AQ6 Maximum speed km h 190 185 192 186 Acceleration 0 100 km h s 10 4 11 5 10 5 11 6 Fuel consumption in Itr 100 km and CO in g km Urban Syl 10 2 9 1 10 2 Non urban 5 6 6 0 5 6 6 0 Combination 6 9 75 6 9 75 CO emission combination 165 180 165 180 Weight in kg Permissible gross weight 1569 1539 1614 1584 1589 1544 1634 15899 Unloaden weight ready for work 1114 1159 1134 1179 1000 500 1000 450 P Permissible trailer load trailer braked unbraked 1200 500 1200 450 m a Vehicles of category N1 b Uphills up to 12 Uphill
23. After you release the brake pedal the function of the Brake Assist is automatically switched off and the brakes operate in the normal way The Brake Assist is part of the ESP system If a fault occurs in the ESP the Brake Assist function is also not available Further information on the ESP page 133 Z WARNING e The Brake Assist is also not able to overcome the physical limits of your car in terms of the braking distance required e Adapt your speed to the conditions of the road surface and to the traffic situ ation The increased safety offered by the Brake Assist must not tempt you to take a greater safety risk than otherwise m Driving Tips Intelligent Technology oe Uphill Start Assist The uphill start assist makes it easier to start off on steep hills The system assists a start off by holding the brake pressure produced by the brake pedal actuation for approx 2 seconds after releasing the brake pedal The driver can therefore move his foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal and start off on the slope without having to actuate the handbrake The brake pressure drops gradually the more you operate the accelerator pedal If the vehicle does not start off within 2 seconds it starts to roll back The uphill start assist is active as of a 3 slope if the driver door is closed It is always active on slopes when in forward or reverse start off When driving downhill it is inactive W Electrohy
24. Oils ciccareiiaadyecuamasnuaasiewnn ames 160 CHANGE 2 ccs wid on eew di da evident ernie 161 CHECK errepidearen ee own dl eaves ASNE 160 replenishing s sesreriscrrrisorritrsrenpari 161 Warning Hont cas xaeaiue lt sen ease denna ease 28 Engine revolutions counter 0e eee 15 EAVIFONMENE sine cre tirsnriro piniienn 141 Environmental compatibility 141 144 ESP sociae auieatiuaami andes aaa 133 Warning light 0 0 ce cece eee eee ees 30 Exhaust gas Warming lights iieardsontvaseandinmecngeds 29 Exhaust gas inspection Warning light 00 0 cece eee eee eee 29 EXPlanatlONSeicciig cite be eienieas cupeheanemer 6 Exterior MINOT cs aiaseaditianee a Ado eiiiai 55 Exterior mirror heater cece eee ees 55 F Fastening elements cece eee 61 FirSt Ald BOX certajo t a aaea 175 FIXING Metrin iisa iiti ia iia 62 2m Index lt S i FOG IaM 2 9 wis adie orn ds ete ee ate ae 47 193 Warning light 0c cece eee 26 27 Fog lights with the function CORNER 47 Foldable luggage compartment cover 64 Force limiter of the power windows 42 Front AIDA tiene is etenned chantaaatenkes evan 118 Rront anme St sosai niaka eR Meee nak wes 75 Front headlight scrire ni aa a 192 RUC EAEE EL EEEE E OET E 155 Diesel fuel serrerredrreirenreand tratiri 155 FUCI GAUGE fic iseukcutiad intra Gaede oF eam 16 PERO es ose derin peta ti ak ptasniiiene out
25. Please ensure that the heating elements of the rear window heater and the fold able luggage compartment cover are not damaged as a result of objects transported in this area m Seats and Stowage Press both check points on each carrier rail up to the stop Z WARNING Check the attachment of the carrier rails by pulling it Pay attention when installing that the carrier rails and the variable loading floor are correctly fixed otherwise the occupants are at risk Z WARNING a Note Pay attention when installing that the carrier rails and the variable loading floor are correctly fixed otherwise the occupants are at risk m If the variable loading floor is installed in the luggage compartment no flexible storage compartment or fixing net can be installed page 62 m a f Divide the luggage compartment with variable loading floor Remove carrier rails 5 Fig 65 Dividing the luggage compart ment B5J 5009H The mpartment can ivi with the variable loading floor Fig 64 Luggage compartment Slacken check points remove carrier rails e luggage compartment can be divided with the variable loading floo Lift up the part with the holder and secure it by sliding it into the grooves Remove carrier rails gt fig 65 m Slacken the check points 8 on the carrier rails using the vehicle key or a flat screwdriver fig 64 Grasp the carrier rail at the position Q fig 64 and
26. Release the fixtures B at the ends of the cross member by fully loosening and slightly pulling up the securing screws The fixtures open when they are not already opened Position the cross member with the fixed not pulled out part onto the right in direction of travel lashing eye and then the pull out part A onto the left lashing eye Press the fixtures 8 on both sides of the cross member until they lock in place and tighten the securing screws Check the attachment of the cross member by pulling it Z WARNING When transporting bicycles in the luggage compartment ensure the safety of Passengers E 6a Seats and Stowage Install bicycle carrier Slacken the quick tension jack on the fixing axle of the bicycle carrier and adjust nn SS according to the width of the bicycle fork Fit the bicycle fork onto the fixing axle and tighten with the quick tension jack fig 71 left Position the left pedal of the bicycle forward in order to attach the front wheel aie more easily Slacken the screw a gt fig 70 and push the bicycle holder together with the 7 attached bicycle to the left in the direction of the arrow so that no collision r between the steering arm and the side window of the luggage compartment z can occur Carefully guide the boot lid to the bottom without letting it go and at the same time check if there is adequate room between the steering arm of the bic
27. Using the system Instruments and warning lights Single trip memory memory 1 The single trip memory collates the driving information from the moment the igni tion is switched on until it is switched off New data will also flow into the calcula tion of the current driving information if the trip is continued within 2 hours after switching off the ignition If the trip is interrupted for more than 2 hours the memory is automatically erased Total trip memory memory 2 The total distance driven memory gathers data from any number of individual jour neys up to a total of 19 hours and 59 minutes driving or 1999 kilometres driven 99 hours and 59 minutes driving time or 9 999 km distance driven in vehicles with an information display The memory is deleted when either of these limits is reached and the calculation starts from anew The total trip memory will not contrary to the single trip memory be deleted after a period of interruption of driving of 2 hours Note All information in the memory 1 and 2 is erased if the battery of the vehicle is disconnected m Using the system t Fig 19 Multi functional indicator Jess so1sH Control elements The rocker switch and the button 8 are located on the windshield wiper lever gt fig 19 Selecting the memory Short term pressing of the button 8 on the windshield wiper lever allows to select the desired memory 20 Instruments and warning lights Selecting
28. extended through an installed detachable towing device In some radio navigation systems and car radios the distance to the obstacle can be shown graphically in the display On vehicles with a factory fitted towing device the rear sensors are deactivated when towing a trailer The driver is informed about this by a graphic display vehicle towing a trailer in the radio or the navigation radio system display In some factory fitted radios or radio navigation systems you can configure the system to reduce the playback volume when the parking aid is active see the owner s manual for the radio or radio navigation system This makes it easier to hear the parking aid Activating The parking aid is activated automatically when reverse gear is engaged and the ignition is turned on This is confirmed by a brief acoustic signal Deactivating The parking aid is deactivated by disengaging the reverse gear or by switching the ignition off Z WARNING e The parking aid is not a substitute for the driver paying proper attention and it is always the driver s responsibility to take care when parking the vehicle or carrying out similar manoeuvres e You should therefore satisfy yourself before reversing that there is no small obstacle such as a rock thin post trailer drawbar etc behind your vehicle Such an obstacle might not be within the range detected by the sensors Under certain circumstances surfaces of certain object
29. ments of the vehicle swimming on a wet road surface m Changing wheels around If significantly greater wear is present on the front tyres we recommend changing the front wheels around with the rear wheels You will then obtain approximately the same life for all the tyres It may be advantageous to swap the tyres over crosswise when uneven types of wear characteristic arise on the running surfaces of the tyres but not in the case of unidirectional tyres We recommend you get in touch with an authorised Skoda service partner They have extensive knowledge about the combinations available We recommend that you change the wheels around every 10 000 km in order to achieve even wear on all wheels and to obtain optimal tyre life m New tyres and wheels Tyres and wheel rims are important design elements One should therefore use the tyres and wheel rims which have been released for use by Skoda Auto They are exactly matched to the vehicle type and therefore contribute significantly to good road holding and safe driving characteristics gt AN Only fit radial tyres of the same type on all 4 wheels size rolling circumference and if possible the same tread pattern on one axle The authorised Skoda Service Partners have access to the most current information about which tyres we have released for use on your vehicle We recommend that you have any work relating to tyres or wheels carried out by an authorised Skoda
30. take the cross rod out of the mount fig 66 Hold the cross rod in such a way that the luggage net partition can roll up slowly and without damage into the housing 8 If you wish to use the entire luggage compartment you can remove the foldable luggage compartment cover page 64 Seats and Stowage Z WARNING Ensure that the seat backrest on the rear seats is securely interlocked in position when the vehicle is fitted with three point safety belts for the middle rear seat It is only then that the three point seat belt can reliably fulfil its func tion e First check for yourself that the cross road is inserted into the mounts in the front position e Ifthe rear bulkhead is located behind the rear seats then always make sure that the rear seat backrest is correctly interlocked m Use the luggage net partition behind the front seats B5J 5011H Fig 67 Pull out the rear bulkhead roll up Pulling out Open the right rear door Fold the surfaces of the seats and seat backrests of the rear seats forward Pull the luggage net partition at the bracket a out of the housing 6 gt fig 67 First of all insert the cross rod into the mount on one side Insert into the mount on the other side the second end of the cross rod Press both ends of the cross rod forward into the function position Folding Pull the cross rod back slightly first on the one side then on the other side an
31. the indicator light in the switch comes on or goes out The rear window heater only operates when the engine is running The rear window heater switches off automatically after 7 minutes If the on board voltage drops the rear window heater is switched off automatically the warning light flashes in the button Using the system Windshield wiper and wash system Windshield wiper You can operate the windscreen wipers and automatic wipe wash using the windscreen wiper lever Fig 45 Windscreen wiper lever The windscreen wiper lever gt fig 45 has the following positions Finger operated wiping Ifyou wish to wipe the windscreen only briefly push the lever into the sprung position 4 Intermittent wiping Position the lever up into position Q Set with the switch a the desired break between the individual wiper strokes Slow wipe Position the lever up into position 2 Fast wipe Position the lever up into position 3 Automatic wipe wash for windscreen Pull the lever towards the steering wheel into the spring tensioned position E the wash system and the windscreen wipers will operate Lights and Visibility Release the lever The windscreen wash system stops and the wiper continues for another 1 3 wiper strokes depending on the period of spraying of the wind screen Wiping the rear window pane Push the lever away from the steering wheel into position fig 45 the w
32. total weight of the vehicle should not be exceeded You cannot make full use of the permissible roof load if you use a roof luggage rack system with a lower load carrying capacity The load transported on the roof luggage rack system must not exceed the weight limit which is stated in the fitting instructions Z WARNING e The items which you transport on the roof bar system must be reliably attached risk of accident e You must on no account exceed the permissible roof load the permissible axle loads and the permissible gross weight of your vehicle risk of accident e Please note that the handling properties of your vehicle change when you transport heavy or bulky items on the roof bar system as a result of the displace ment of the centre of gravity and the increased wind attack area risk of acci dent You must absolutely adapt your style of driving and the speed of the vehicle to the specific circumstances E 70 Seats and Stowage Front cup holder B5J 6042H You can place two cups or beverage cans into the recesses fig 74 Fig 74 Front centre console Cup holder Z WARNING Do not place any hot beverages into the cup holder If the vehicle moves they may spill risk of scalding Do not use any cups or beakers which are made of brittle material e g glass porcelain You might be injured by them in the event of an accident Caution Do not open the beverages in the cup holder
33. unavoidable despite dividing the contents into sections that mention maybemade For the sake of the environment of equipment which is not fitted to your vehicle An Environmental note draws your attention to environmental protection aspects oo This is where you will for example find tips aimed at reducing your fuel consump Brief information and instructions tion Each section has a Heading This is followed by Brief information in large italic lettering which tells you the Note subject which is dealt with in this section A normal Note draws your attention in a general way to important information m Most of the illustrations are accompanied by an Instruction in relatively large letters which explains to you in a straightforward way the action you have to take Work steps which have to be carried out are illustrated with a hyphen Direction indications All direction indications such as left right front rear relate to the direction of travel of the vehicle Explanation of symbols H End of a section gt The section is continued on the next page Notes All four kinds of notes which are used in the text are always stated at the end of the respective section o Using the system Using the system Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical data Cockpit General view Light switch and headlamp beam adjustment 04 45 48 So ec gece es
34. where one will be glad to assist you in such matters One should note that the details given in the vehicle s technical docu mentation always take precedence over those in the Owner s Manual Owner s Manual This Owner s manual describes all the possible equipment versions without identifying it a special equipment model variant or market dependent equipment Consequently this vehicle does not need to contain all of the equipment components described in this Owner s manual You can find the scope of equipment for your vehicle from the sales docu mentation you were given when purchasing the car More information is available from your Skoda dealer The illustrations can differ in minor details from your vehicle they are only intended for general information In addition to information regarding all the controls and equipment the Owner s Manual also contains important information regarding care and operation for your safety and also to retain the value of your vehicle To provide you with valuable tips and aids You will learn how you can operate your vehicle safely economically and in an environmentally conscious way For safety reasons please also pay attention to the information on accessories modifications and replacement of parts page 174 The other chapters of the Owner s Manual are also important however for proper treatment of your car in addition to regular care and mainte nance helps to retain its value an
35. 190 Fuse assignment at the battery automatic gearbox If the warning light does not go out although the coolant is at the correct level and also the fuse of the fan is in proper order do not continue driving Contact a specialist garage to obtain assistance Please refer to the following guidelines gt page 161 Cooling system The following text will be displayed in the information display Check coolant Owner s manual Z WARNING If you must stop for technical reasons then park the vehicle at a safe distance from the traffic and switch off the engine and switch on the hazard warning light system gt page 48 Switch for hazard warning lights A m Fuel reserve M The warning light H comes on if the fuel level is less than 7 litres An audible signal sounds as an additional warning signal 3 Not valid for vehicles with information display 28 Instruments and warning lights The following text will be displayed in the information display Please refuel Range km m Engine oil Bt The warning light 7 lights up red low oil pressure The warning light comes on for a few seconds when the ignition is switched on Stop the vehicle and switch the engine off if the warning light does not go off after the engine has started or flashes while driving Check the oil level and top up with oil as necessary page 160 3 peeps sound as an additional warning signal Do not continue your
36. 6 Itr 66 kW TDI CR DPF EUS VW 507 00 43 1 6 Itr 77 kW TDI CR DPF EU5 VW 507 00 4 3 If the oils specified above are not available oils according to ACEA B3 or ACEA B4 can be used once for refilling Caution Only the above mentioned oils may be used on vehicles with flexible service inter vals QG1 We recommend always refilling with oil of the same specification since this will maintain the properties of the oil In exceptional cases you must top up only once engine oil complying with Specification VW 502 00 only for petrol engines or Specification VW 505 01 only for diesel engines to maximum 0 5 litres You must not use other engine oils risk of engine damage Technical Data 201 Note Before a long drive we recommend that you purchase and carry with you engine oil which complies with the specification for your vehicle Consequently you will always have the correct engine oil for refilling e Werecommend using a preservative from the Skoda original accessories offered by your Skoda dealer For further information see Service shedule m Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical data 202 Technical Data Engine 1 2 1 44 kW EU5 Output kW per rpm Max torque Nm per rpm Number of cylinders Displacement cm 44 5200 108 3000 3 1198 Performances FABIA ESTATE CAR Maximum speed km h 155 156 Acceleration 0 100 km h s 16 5 16 7 Fuel consumption i
37. Fig 79 Luggage compartment Power socket Open the cover of the power socket fig 79 Connect the plug of the electrical appliance to the socket You can only use the power socket for the connection of approved electrical acces sories with a power uptake up to 120 watts The vehicle battery will be discharged in the process if the engine is stationary The same remarks apply here as for gt page 72 Cigarette lighter gt Seats and Stowage a Further information gt page 174 Accessories changes and replacement of Storage compartments on the front passenger side parts E Storage compartments Overview You will find the following storage facilities in your vehicle Storage compartments on the front passenger side page 73 Fig 80 Dash panel Storage compart ments on the front passenger side Storage compartment on the driver s side gt page 74 Stowage compartment for spectacles gt page 74 On some vehicles the storage compartments are not equipped with lids Stowage compartment in centre console page 74 A A Opening and closing the storage compartments on the front passenger Storage compartment in the front seat gt page 75 side Front seat armrest with stowage compartment gt page 75 Pull the handle of the lid in direction of arrow fig 80 and fold it open Storage compartment in the front doors page 75 Swivel the flap until it is heard to lock Storage compartments in the luggage c
38. Interior lighting front rear Ciow Reading lights W5W Luggage compartment light W5W Lighting in storage compartment W5W Z WARNING Read and observe the warning notes gt page 158 Working in the engine ent before working in the engine compartment Bulbs H7 LL and H4 LL are pressurised and may burst when changing the bulb risk of injury Breakdown assistance Fuses and light bulbs ZN WARNING continued tis recommended to wear gloves and safety glasses when changing a bulb Note This Owner s Manual only describes the replacement of bulbs where it is assumed that no major complications will arise Other light bulbs should be changed by your specialist garage m Front headlight Fig 169 Fitting position of the bulbs Halogen headlights halogen projector headlights Positions of the bulbs in the halogen headlamp low beam main beam and side lights front turn signal light Positions of the bulbs in the halogen projector headlight low beam low and main beam Parking light parking and main beam lights G front turn signal light Z WARNING Read and observe the warning notes gt page 158 Working in the engine compartment before working in the engine compartment m Low beam and main beam halogen headlights Fig 170 Removing the light bulb for the low beam and main beam light Remove the protective cap a gt fig 169 Pull
39. RS 4029 1642 1886 1492 129 2464 1423 1415 ESTATE CAR 4247 1642 1886 1498 1513 1484P 135 149 119 2465 1433 1426 COMBI GreenLine 4247 1642 1886 1484 119 2465 1417 1410 COMBI SCOUT 4275 1658 1886 1498 1513 1484P 135 2465 1433 1426 COMBI RS 4276 1642 1886 1494 129 2464 1423 1415 Technical data 200 Technical Data Engine oil specifications The grade of engine oil should be selected in accordance with precise specifications The engine of your vehicle has been factory filled with a high grade oil which you can use throughout the year except in extreme climatic regions You can mix various oils together with each other when refilling with oil This does not however apply for models with flexible service intervals QG1 Engine oils are of course undergoing continuous further development Thus the information stated in this Owner s Manual is only correct at the time of publication Specialist garages are informed by Skoda Auto about current changes We recom mend having this oil change undertaken by a specialist garage The specifications VW standards stated in the following must be indicated sepa rately or together with other specifications on the bottle Engine oil specifications for models with flexible service intervals QG1 Petrol engines Specification Content 1 2 Itr 44 kW EUS VW 503 00 VW 504 00 2 8 1 2 1 51 kW EU5 EU2
40. Service Partner The authorised Skoda Service Partners have all of the necessary special tools and replacement parts available plus the required specialist knowledge and are also in a position to properly dispose of the old tyres A large number of authorised Skoda Service Partners also have an attractive range of tyres and wheels available The tyre wheel combinations which are approved for your vehicle are indicated in your vehicle documents Approval and licensing may differ according to the legisla tion prevailing in individual countries Wheels and Tyres no Proper knowledge of the tyre data makes it easier for you to select the correct type of tyre Tyres do for example have the following inscription on their walls 185 65 R 14 86 T What this means is 185 Tyre width in mm 65 Height width ratio in R Code letter for the type of tyre Radial 14 Diameter of wheel in inches 86 Load index Ji Speed symbol The following speed restrictions apply to tyres Speed symbol Permissible maximum speed 160 km h 170 km h 180 km h 190 km h 200 km h 210 km h 240 km h 270 km h a lt fe C e o Ba The date of manufacture is also stated on the tyre wall possibly only on the inside of wheel DOT 20 11 means for example that the tyre was manufactured in the 20th week of the year 20011 Any spare wheel which differs from the tyres fitted to the vehicle e g winter tyres or low profile tyres should only be used only fo
41. Uphills up to 12 e Uphills up to 8 Technical data 210 Technical Data Engine 1 6 1 55 kW TDI CR EU5 Output kW per rpm Max torque Nm per rpm Number of cylinders Displacement cm 55 4000 195 1500 2000 4 1598 Performances FABIA ESTATE CAR Maximum speed km h 166 167 Acceleration 0 100 km h s 14 1 14 2 Fuel consumption in Itr 100 km and CO in g km Urban 5 1 Non urban 3 6 Combination 4 2 CO gt emission combination 109 Weight in kg Permissible gross weight 1659 1629 1679 1634 Unloaden weight ready for work 1204 1224 1000 500 1000 450 Permissible trailer load trailer braked unbraked 1200 500 1200 450 a Vehicles of category N1 b Uphills up to 12 Uphills up to 8 Technical Data lan Engine 1 6 1 66 kW TDI CR EU5 Output kW per rpm Max torque Nm per rpm Number of cylinders Displacement cm 66 4200 230 1500 2500 4 1598 Performances FABIA ESTATE CAR Maximum speed km h 176 177 Acceleration 0 100 km h s 12 6 12 7 Fuel consumption in Itr 100 km and CO in g km Urban 5 1 Non urban 3 6 Combination 4 2 CO emission combination 109 Weight in kg Permissible gross weight 1659 1629 1679 16342 Unloaden weight ready for work 1204 1224 Permissible trailer load trailer braked unbraked 1200 500 1200 450 m a Vehicles of category N1 Technical data one Technical Data Engine 1 6 I 77 kW TDI CR EU5 Output kW per rpm Max torque Nm
42. a high quality hard wax polish at the latest when no more drops form on the clean paintwork A new layer of a high quality hard wax polish can be applied to the clean bodywork after it has dried thoroughly Even if you use a wax preserver regularly we still recommend that you treat the paintwork of the vehicle at least twice a year with hard wax Caution Never apply wax to the windows m Polishing Polishing is only necessary if the paintwork of your vehicle has become unattractive and if it is no longer possible to achieve a gloss with wax preservers You must treat the paintwork with a wax preserver if the polish you use does not contain any preserving elements gt page 150 Wax treatment Caution e You must not treat mat painted parts or plastic with polishing products or hard wax e Donot polish the paintwork of the vehicle in a dusty environment otherwise the paintwork can be scratched m Chrome parts First clean the chrome parts with a damp clotch and then polish them with a soft dry cloth If the chrome parts cannot be cleaned spotlessly using this method use specific chrome care products Caution Do not polish the chrome parts in a dusty environment otherwise they can be scratched m Paint damage Slight damage to paintwork such as scratches scuffs or traces of chip damage must be touched up immediately with paint Skoda painting pen before any corrosion can result You can of course have
43. achieve the minimum impact on the environment and how to save money at the same time Look up Environment in the Index to find out more Please also refer to all the texts identified with a in this Owner s Manual Make your contribution for the sake of the environment www skoda auto com Navod k obsluze Fabia anglicky 05 11 5555810020 5j 012 003 HS
44. ae eS Release lever engine compartment lid cece eee e eee 158 This overview will help you to quickly familiarise yourself with the Lever for adjusting the steering wheel 0c0cscecee ees 86 displays and the control elements ey lgnitigr lock acc ackaceanuaaipeenesushiuadsneeudaeaceaatace muds 86 Q Power windows oo cc ccccsec cee s eee eeeeeees 4 PAIA Rg a i Electric exterior mirror adjustment icco 55 7 dare G Al Mule vents nicer ccvasidacoksmerausesansisagileatanganiiss 78 nadie E iam i Rocker switch for the heating on the driver s seat 58 Lever for the multi functional switch c l locki itch 36 Turn signal light headlight and parking light headlight flasher 49 oa Oe s A nce mlo ae Depending on equipment fitted 7 Speed Pati SYSTEM eieen ated thea ciate daerak nia 91 Gearshift lever manual gearbox 1 0 cece eee e ees 89 BA nal Selector lever automatic gearbox 0 1 ccecce cecce 96 ee ee ig pase ee for the pede the driver s seat 04 58 with controls for radio radio navigation system and phone 101 ay ean ee ae EEE OS 7 Instrument cluster Instruments and indicator lights 15 Storage compartment 74 Lever for the multi functional switch a 108 Multi functional indicator 6 0 0 cece eee eee e cece eee ees i EAs Ba 0 IA ee ey ate arpa oy Wt ee Windshield wiper and wash system 0 cece eee eee 52 Switch fo
45. all light bulbs of the licence plate lighting or the parking light in one rear light unit are defective Check regularly the function of the light bulbs m Alternator E The warning light FI comes on after the ignition has been switched on It should go out after the engine has started If the warning light does not go out after the engine has started or comes on when driving drive to the nearest specialist garage The vehicle battery will be discharged in this case so switch off all non essential electrical components Caution If the warning light 1 comes on when driving and in addition the warning light cooling system fault also comes on in display you must then stop the car immedi ately and switch the engine off risk of engine damage m Fog lights The warning light 0 comes on when the fog lights are operating gt page 47 m Electrohydraulic power steering The warning light comes on for a few seconds when the ignition is switched on If the warning light after switching on the ignition or when driving lights up contin uously a fault exists in the electrohydraulic power steering The power steering operates with reduced steering assist or is completely without function Further information page 137 Using the system Instruments and warning lights Ea Z WARNING Contact your specialist garage if the power steering is defective a Note e Ifthe yellow warning light goes ou
46. and adapter Press simultaneously the side locks of the mount and remove the mobile phone and adapter fig 106 Caution Taking the mobile phone out of the adapter during the call can lead to interruption of the connection When taking out the mobile phone the connection to the factory fitted antenna is interrupted this reduces the quality of the transmitting and receiving signal The charging of the mobile phone battery is also interrupted m Operating telephone calls with the aid of the adapter B5J 7013H Fig 107 Illustration image Single button adapter two button adapter Function overview of the button 4 PTT push to talk on the adapter fig 107 e Activating deactivating voice operation e Taking ending a call Aside from the button 4 the following button can be found on certain adapters gt fig 107 right After pressing the button for 2 seconds the number 112 Emergency call is dialed Note The adapters illustrated are only prime examples m Communication 05 Operation of the telephone on the multifunction steering wheel The driver can set the basic functions of the telephone by simply operating the buttons located on the steering wheel so that he can concentrate on the traffic situation without being distracted as little as possible by operating the telephone gt fig 108 This applies only if your vehicle has been equipped with the telephone preinstalla tion at the factory I
47. and or rear window can occur a Note If the front wheel is equipped with disc brake attach the wheel in such a way that the brake disc is opposite the frame m B5J 5012H Fig 71 Put in the bicycle fastening the front wheel Remove the front wheel before putting the bicycle into the vehicle Seats and Stowage ha Secure the stability of the bicycles with a strap Roof rack General information Caution Only use roof racks approved by Skoda Auto e fyou use other roof rack systems or if the roof bars are not properly fitted then any damage which may result to your car is not covered by the warranty agree ments It is therefore essential to pay attention to the fitting instructions supplied with the roof luggage rack system e On models fitted with a power sliding tilting roof ensure that the opened Fig 72 Securing the bicycles with clamps securing the bicycles with a strap sliding tilting roof does not strike any items of luggage transported on the roof Ensure that the opened boot lid does not collide with the roof load To slacken the rubber part of the clamp push both parts against each other and open the clamp amp i j Position the clamp with the rubber part to the front in direction of travel as far For the sake of the environment as possible below the saddle support and close the clamp fig 72 The increased aerodynamic drag results in a higher fuel consumption When transp
48. and the buttons and page 80 fig 92 e Air outlet vents 4 gt page 78 fig 90 We recommend that you leave the air outlet vents 3 gt page 78 fig 90 in the opened position m Recirculated air mode In recirculated air mode air is sucked out of the interior of the vehicle and then fed back into the interior Recirculated air mode prevents polluted air outside the vehicle from getting into the vehicle for example when driving through a tunnel or when standing in a traffic jam Switching recirculated air mode on Press the button gt page 80 fig 92 the warning light lights up in the button Switching recirculated air mode off Press again the button the warning light in the button goes out The recirculated air mode is switched off automatically if the air distribution control is in position W gt page 80 fig 92 You can also switch recirculated air mode on again from this setting by repeatedly pressing pushbutton Z WARNING You should not leave recirculated air mode on over a longer period of time as stale air may result in fatigue in the driver and occupants divert your attention and also cause the windows to mist up The risk of having an accident increases Switch recirculated air mode off as soon as the windows begin misting up E Climatronic automatic air conditioning Description The Climatronic system is a combination of an automatic heating fresh
49. away from the marking of the vehicle Press into place the headlight onto the side facing the marking First of all put the grille with the latch in place on the side opposite the marking Press into place the protective grille onto the side facing the marking Breakdown assistance Fuses and light bulbs Cover of fog lights Fabia Scout Fabia RS B5J 5028F Fig 174 Front bumper Fabia Scout Fabia RS Removing the cover Fabia Scout Switch the ignition and all lights off Guide the wire clamp from the vehicle tool kit into the opening above the fog light gt fig 174 left and remove the cover Removing the cover Fabia RS Switch the ignition and all lights off Guide one finger into the opening next to the fog light fig 174 right and remove the cover In order to reinstall the cover first of all insert one part of the cover starting on the side opposite the marking Then press the cover closed on the side facing the marking m Fog lights Fabia Scout Fabia RS Fig 175 Front bumper Fog lights changing the bulb Removing the fog light Screw out the screws gt fig 175 left with the aid of the screwdriver which is part of the vehicle tool kit 7 Take out the fog light Changing the bulb and installing the fog light Press the locking button Q gt fig 175 of the plug A and remove the plug from the socket 8 Turn the socket B with the bulb to the left up to
50. be reached from the engine compartment We therefore recommend that you have any bulbs changed by a specialist garage or in exceptional cases by calling on other professional assistance Please note that the engine compartment is a hazardous area page 158 Working in the engine compartment We recommend that you always have a small box of replacement bulbs in your vehicle You can obtain replacement bulbs from Skoda original accessories or from a specialist garage A stowage place for spare bulbs is located in the box in the spare wheel Vehicles with LED separate daytime running lights In vehicles with LED separate daytime running lights the bulbs are replaced by a specialist garage Bulb Overview Front headlight Halogen headlight Halogen projector head lights Low beam H4 LL H7 LL Main beam H4 LL H7 LL Parking lights WS5W LL LED W5W BL LL Fuses and light bulbs hor Front headlight Halogen headlight Halogen projector head lights Turn signals PY21W Fog lights H8 HB4 gt Daylight driving lights P21W LED a Valid for RS vehicles with separate lights for daylight driving lights b Valid for vehicles Scout Valid for Scout vehicles with separate lights for daylight driving lights Rear light unit Bulb Reversing light P21W Turn signals PY21W Brake lights P21W Rear fog light P21W Parking lights 2x WOW Others Bulb Side turn signal lights WY5W Licence plate light C5W T4W 5W 3 Brake light LED
51. belt Overview of the engine compartment alternator radiator fan and from the high voltage ignition system Please Q Coolant expansion bottle jgrsiscesinitanseaeruiewe sidan aunts 162 observe in addition the following Windshield washer fluid reservoir iiieoo cc 168 Never touch the electrical cables of the ignition system Engine oil filler opening cc cece e cece e eee een ees 161 Absolutely avoid any jewellery loose items of clothing or long hair from Ermine dipstick nen cnarneuageatereilorrann sileasceaunananaing 160 getting into the rotating parts of the engine Hazard Therefore remove any Brake fluid reservoir tite acceca 164 jewellery beforehand tie up your hair and wear tight fitting clothing Battery below a COVE oc ceccecceceeeeeeeeceeeeeueeeenees 164 gt Please also comply with the warning instructions stated below when carrying out any essential work on the fuel system or on the electrical system Always separate the car battery from the electrical system General Maintenance a Note The location of the inspection points in the engine compartment of petrol and diesel engines is practically identical m Engine oil Check engine oil level The dipstick indicates the level of oil in the engine Fig 142 Dipstick Checking the oil level Ensure that the vehicle is positioned on a level surface and the engine has reached its operating temperature gt
52. can lead to an undesirable reduction in the engine output e Changes to vehicle e g on engine on the brakes on chassis or another combi nation of tyres and wheels can influence the function of the TCS gt page 174 Accessories changes and replacement of parts E Brakes What has a negative effect on braking efficiency Wear and tear Wear and tear to the brake pads is greatly dependent on the operating conditions of the vehicle and your style of driving Particularly if you drive a great deal in towns and over short distances or if you adopt a sporty style of driving it may be necessary to have the thickness of the brake pads inspected at a specialist garage between the service inspections Wet roads or road salt There may be a certain delay before the brakes take full effect under certain condi tions such as when driving through water during heavy rain showers or after the vehicle has been washed in an automatic vehicle wash since the brake discs and brake pads may be moist or even have a coating of ice on them in winter You should Driving Tips Intelligent Technology a35 dry the brakes as soon as possible by applying and releasing the brakes several times There also may be a certain delay before the full braking efficiency is available when driving on roads which have been treated with road salt if you have not used the brakes for some considerable time beforehand The layer of salt on the brake discs and brake
53. child safety seat on the front passenger seat where the child is seated with its back facing in direction of travel in some countries also when the child is facing the direction of travel If this is not done there is a risk of the child suffering severe or even fatal injuries if the front passenger airbag is deployed When transporting a child on the front passenger seat please comply with the appropriate national regulations regarding the use of child safety seats Transporting children safely P Z WARNING continued When transporting a child on the front passenger seat please comply with the appropriate national regulations regarding the use of child safety seats e Children must never be seated with their head in the deployment area of the side airbag risk of injury Donot place any objects within the deployment area of the side airbag risk of injury m Child seat Classification of child seats into groups Only child safety seats which have an official approval and are suit able for the child may be used ECE R 44 standard applies to child safety seats ECE R means Economic Commis sion for Europe Regulation Child safety seats which have been tested for conformity to ECE R 44 standard have a non detachable test seal a large E within a circle and below this the test number attached to the seat Child safety seats are classified in 5 groups Group Weight 0 0 10kg gt page 128 O up to 1
54. clip in the car tool kit sufficiently far onto the cap until the inner catches of the clip are positioned at the collar of the cap Pull the cap off with the plastic clip fig 154 Installing Insert the caps onto the bolts m Slackening and tightening wheel bolts Slacken the wheel bolts before jacking up the vehicle Fig 155 Changing a wheel Slackening wheel bolts Slackening wheel bolts Insert the wheel wrench fully onto the wheel bolt 12 Grasp the end of the wrench and turn the bolt about one turn to the left fig 155 Tightening wheel bolts Insert the wheel wrench fully onto the wheel bolt 12 Grasp the end of the wrench and turn the bolt to the right until it is tight Z WARNING Slacken the wheel bolts only a little about one turn as long as the vehicle has not yet been jacked up risk of an accident 12 Use the appropriate adapter for slackening and tightening the safety wheel bolts gt page 179 a Note e Apply pressure carefully with your foot to the end of the wrench if it proves diffi cult to slacken the bolts Hold tight on the vehicle when doing this and ensure that you have a steady position m Raise vehicle You have to raise the vehicle with a lifting jack in order to be able to take off the wheel Fig 156 Changing a wheel Jacking points for positioning lifting jack Position the lifting jack by selecting the jacking point engraving in the lower s
55. data e the prescribed type of fuel tyre size Tyre pressure E Fuel consumption according to the ECE standards and EU guidelines Depending on the range of the special equipment style of driving traffic situation weather influences and vehicle condition the consumption values which in practice result when using the vehicle can deviate from the indicated values Urban traffic The consumption measurement in urban traffic begins with starting of the cold engine Afterwards the normal urban traffic is simulated Non urban traffic For the consumption measurement in non urban traffic the vehicle as in daily motoring is accelerated and braked several times in all gears The vehicle speed changes within the range from 0 to 120 km h Combined traffic The consumption value in the combined traffic consists of 37 from the value for the urban traffic and of 63 from the value for the non urban traffic m Technical Data 99 Dimensions Dimensions mm Length Width Width including exterior mirror Height Clearance Wheel base Track gauge front rear FABIA 4000 1642 1886 1498 1513 1484P 134 1499 119P 2465 1433 1426 FABIA GreenLine 4000 1642 1886 1484 119 2465 1417 1410 a The value corresponds to the status with rough road package b The value corresponds to the status with sport chassis FABIA SCOUT 4032 1658 1886 1498 1513 1484P 134 2465 1433 1426 FABIA
56. established for these Skoda original parts With other products and despite out ceaseless analysis of the market we are not able to assess nor guarantee their suitability for your vehicle even Breakdown assistance Breakdown assistance First aid box and warning triangle Fig 150 Placing of the warning triangle The first aid box must be stored in such a way that it is immediately ready to hand A warning triangle with the maximum dimensions 39 x 68 x 450 mm can be attached to the trim panel of the rear wall with rubber straps fig 150 If you wish to equip your vehicle additionally with a warning triangle please contact a specialist garage Z WARNING The first aid box must be stored in such a way that the occupants do no suffer any injuries in the event of an emergency braking or a collision of the vehicle a Note Pay attention to the use by date of the contents of the first aid box m Fire extinguisher The fire extinguisher is attached with straps under the driver seat Please read carefully the instructions which are attached to the fire extinguisher Breakdown assistance vs The fire extinguisher must be checked by an authorised person or company annu ally please observe the various differing national legal requirements Z WARNING If the fire extinguisher is not correctly attached in case of sudden manoeuvres or an accident it can be thrown through the interior com
57. exe 47 Warning light ee cadescu tnd new ake te cena 26 Rear MIMOP cc cteie decieeeeteewaagawansaananaa 55 REF Seats ie eia eiigat aisianeen seniii ienen aeaa 59 Rear window heater 0 0c cece eee eee 5 Rear view mirror Interior MINOT ces ve kav aered ee edn dd oa newness 54 Recharge battery cece cece eee eee ees 166 Refueling seciairersesrsnrie adune miini 156 Remote control si ssrecisrerceiroisiriiisevesi 38 Synchronisation process sssi 39 Removing seat squabs 0c cc 60 Replacement of parts c cece eee eee 174 Replacing bulbs cece eee eee ee 191 Replacing fuses assinet uesite denona n eee 186 Replacing the wiper blades iiiu 53 ROOF aerial ssecrsrrsiriniiniirceteitisnioinia 149 Roof luggage rack system oaa 69 Running in the vehicle aiic 140 S Safe SOCUNING oree i Ei 35 SE EE EEE 109 Safety information Engine compartment 0 cece eee eee 158 Saving electrical energy cee e eee ees 141 Seat belt height adjuster 000 115 Seat belt warning light e cea eee 115 Seat belts scivinsainioeencins ceaseandaaands 113 Cleaning srscire otr err rp Ees 154 fAStENNG cs oasiva cad acienasiedata roai 115 Height adjustment s rrisrersiriiersiiniss 115 Safety information c cece eee 114 taking Off woccedsiiagiwsedt daceetoee vgs 116 Warping Hont oskesimsesocsrsrnniin iair 32 Seats eeoa n Ekai 56 Heating sien estan dest cred nie 58 SElECtOMIEVER
58. expansion volume is filled up a Note The fuel tank has a capacity of about 45 litres containing a reserve of 7 litres m General Maintenance EA Inspecting and Replenishing Inspecting and Replenishing Engine compartment Bonnet remote release ment lid Bonnet remote release Pull the unlocking lever below the dash panel on the left hand side fig 139 The bonnet jumps out of its lock as a result of the spring force m Opening and closing the bonnet Fig 140 Radiator grille Locking lever securing the bonnet with the bonnet support Opening the bonnet Unlock the bonnet fig 139 Fig 139 Release lever engine compart Ensure that the arms of the windscreen wipers are correctly in place against the windscreen before opening the bonnet otherwise damage could occur to the paintwork Pull on the locking lever fig 140 left the bonnet is then unlocked Grip the bonnet and lift it up Take the bonnet support out of its holder and set it in the opening designed for it gt fig 140 right Closing the bonnet Lift the bonnet slightly and unhook the bonnet support Press the bonnet support into the holder designed to hold it Allow the bonnet to drop from a height of about 20 cm into the lock bonnet do not press down on it Z WARNING Never open the bonnet if you see that steam or coolant is flowing out of the engine compartment risk of scalding Wait long enoug
59. far to the rear otherwise the seatbelts can lose their effectiveness The three point seat belt for the rear seats can only fulfil its function reliably when the backrests are correctly locked into position page 59 e The belt webbing must always be kept clean Soiled belt webbing may impair proper operation of the inertia reel gt page 154 Seat belts The slot of the belt tongue must not be blocked by paper or similar objects otherwise the belt tongue will not lock in place properly Inspect the seat belts regularly to ensure they are in good condition If you find seat belts which have damage to the seat belt seat belt connections to the inertia reels or to the lock the relevant seat belt must be replaced by a specialist garage The seat belts must not be removed or changed in any way Do not make an attempt to repair the seat belts yourself Damaged seat belts which have been subjected to stress in an accident and were therefore stretched must be replaced this is best done by a specialist garage The anchorage points of the belts must also be inspected The anchorage points for the seat belts should also be checked Incertain countries it is possible to use seat belts which differ in terms of their operation from the seat belts which are described on the pages which follow Note The vehicles of the category N1 are not equipped with the middle seat belt on the rear seats The vehicle is only approv
60. for daylight driving lights in the bumper below the main headlights these lights also serve as side lights An audible warning will sound if you withdraw the ignition key and open the driver s door when the vehicle lights are still on e The acoustic warning signal is switched off over the door contact when the driver s door is closed ignition off The vehicle can be parked with the side lights on e ifthe car is parked for a lengthy period we recommend switching off all lights or leaving only the parking lights switched on The switching on of the described lights should only be undertaken in accord ance with the legal requirements Inthe event of cool or humid weather conditions the headlights can be misted up from inside The temperature difference between interior and external area of the head light lenses is decisive When the driving lights are switched on the light outlet surfaces are free from mist after a short period The headlight lenses can possibly mist up at the border areas It also concerns reverse light and turn signal lights This mist has no influence on the life of the lighting system m DAY LIGHT In some countries the national legal provisions require that the vehicles are equipped with the function daylight driving lights Activating daylight driving lights Remove the cover of the fuse box on the left side of the dash panel page 186 Turn the light switch into po
61. from the direct rays of the sun by covering it over Sharp edged objects on items of clothing such as zip fasteners rivets sharp edged belts may leave permanent scratches or signs of rubbing on the surface a Note e Use a care cream with light blocker and impregnation effect regularly and each time after cleaning the leather The cream nourishes the leather allows it to General Maintenance Taking care of your vehicle and cleaning the vehicle a53 gt EA Taking care of your vehicle and cleaning the vehicle breathe and keeps it supple and also provides moisture It also creates surface protection e Clean the leather every 2 to 3 months remove fresh soiling each time this occurs Remove fresh stains such as those from ball point pens ink lipstick shoe cream etc as quickly as possible e Care also for the leather dye Refreshen areas which have lost their colour with a special coloured leather cream as required e The leather is a natural material with specific properties During the use of the vehicle minor optical changes can occur on the leather parts of the covers e g wrinkles or creases as a result of the stress of the covers m Seat belts Keep the seat belts clean Wash seat belts which have become soiled using a mild soapy solution Inspect the seat belts regularly to ensure they are in good condition Belt webbing which has become severely soiled may prevent the inertia reel from reeling up
62. front passenger side amp Foo yh acskanrihecauionment When opening the flap of the storage box on the front passenger side the As soon as the window is de iced or free from mist the heating should be switched lighting in the storage box comes on off The reduced current consumption will have a favourable effect on fuel economy f a gt page 144 Saving electricity m The light switches on automatically when the parking light is switched on and goes out when the flap is closed m Sun visors Luggage compartment light The lighting comes on automatically when the boot lid is opened If the lid remains open for more than about 10 minutes the luggage compartment lighting switches off automatically m Visibility Rear window heater Fig 44 Sun visor swivelling out You can pull the sun visor for the driver or front passenger out of the fixture and swivel it toward the door in the direction of the arrow Q fig 44 The vanity mirrors in the sun visors are provided with covers Push the cover in direction of arrow 2 Z WARNING The sun visors must not be swivelled to the side windows into the deployment area of the head airbags if any objects such as ball point pens etc are attached to them This might result in injuries to the occupants if the head airbag is deployed m Fig 43 Switch for rear window heater You can switch the rear window heater on or off by pressing the switch gt fig 43
63. gear is indicated in the display Shifting up gears Press the right rocker switch gt fig 103 for the multifunction steering wheel Using the system Automatic gearbox Shifting down gears Press the left rocker switch gt fig 103 for the multifunction steering wheel Temporarily switching over to manual shifting Ifthe selector lever is in position D or S press the left rocker switch or the right rocker switch for the multifunction steering wheel Ifthe rocker switches or are not pressed for some time manual shifting switches off You can also disable the temporary switch over to manual shifting by pressing the right rocker switch for more than 1 second m Emergency programme An emergency programme exists in the event of a fault in the system The gearbox operates in a corresponding emergency programme if there are func tional faults in the gearbox electronics This is indicated by all of the segments in the display lighting up or going out A functional fault can have the following effect e The gearbox only shifts into certain gears The reverse gear R cannot be used The manual shift programme Tiptronic is switched off in the emergency mode If the gearbox has switched over to emergency mode drive to the nearest specialist garage in order to have the fault rectified m Selector lever emergency unlocking Fig 104 Selector lever emergency unlocking gt 1
64. gearbox before reaching the red zone of the rev counter scale Avoid high engine speeds during the driving time and before the engine has been D Valid for countries where the values are indicated in British measuring units warmed up to operating temperature page 140 Using the system A Instruments and warning lights g For the sake of the environment Shifting to a higher gear in good time helps to reduce the fuel consumption mini mises operating noise levels protects the environment and contributes to a longer life and reliability of the engine m Speedometer Warning against excessive speeds An acoustic warning signal will sound when the vehicle speed exceeds 120 kilome tres per hour The acoustic warning signal will switch off again when the vehicle speed goes below this speed limit m Coolant temperature gauge The coolant temperature gauge 4 gt page 15 fig 15 operates only when the igni tion is switched on In order to avoid any damage to the engine please follow the following notes regarding the temperature ranges Cold range If the pointer is in the left hand area of the scale it means that the engine has not yet reached its operating temperature Avoid running at high engine speeds at full throttle and at severe engine loads The operating range The engine has reached its operating temperature as soon as the pointer moves into the mid range of the scale The pointer may also move further to the right
65. hot e Allow for the fact that new brake pads do not achieve their full braking effi ciency until approximately 200 kilometres New brake pads must be first run in before they develop their optimal friction force You can however compensate for this slightly reduced braking force by increasing the pressure on the brake pedal This guideline also applies to any new brake pads installed at a future date Caution e Never allow the brakes to rub by applying slight pressure if you do not wish to brake the vehicle This causes the brakes to overheat and can also result in a longer braking distance and excessive wear Before negotiating a steep downhill section please reduce your speed shift down into the next lower gear manual gearbox or select a lower driving stage automatic gearbox This enables you to make full use of the braking power of the vehicle and reduces the strain on the brakes Any additional braking should be done intermittently not continuously Note The brake light flashes automatically in case of an emergency braking at speeds greater than 60 km h or with the intervention of the ABS which lasts longer than 1 5 seconds After the speed was reduced below 10 km h or the vehicle was stopped the brake light stops flashing and the hazard warning light system switches on The hazard warning light system is switched off automatically after accelerating or driving off again m Brake booster The brake bo
66. in which the child faces in the direction of travel is used on the front passenger seat the front passenger seat must be moved back and to the top fully Move the seat backrest into the vertical position e You should have the front passenger airbag or airbags reactivated just as soon as you no longer use a child safety seat on the front passenger seat m Fig 123 Sticker on the centre column of Child safety and side airbag Children must never be seated in the deployment area of the side airbags and head airbags Fig 124 Unprotected child Child properly protected by safety seat In the event of a side collision the side airbags offer the vehicle occupants enhanced protection The side airbags are inflated in fractions of a second in order to be able to provide this protection page 120 Function of the side airbags The airbag develops such force that passengers could be injured if they do are not sitting up straight or if there are objects in the region where the airbag inflates This applies particularly to children if they are not transported in accordance with legal requirements The child is protected when seated in a child safety seat matching its age Adequate room is available between the child and the deployment area of the side airbag and head airbag The airbag offers optimal protection Z WARNING Itis essential to always switch off gt page 123 the front passenger airbag when attaching a
67. in your car You should not drive at unnecessarily high engine revolutions even after the running in period is complete The maximum permissible engine speed is marked by the beginning of the red zone on the scale of the revolutions counter Shift up into the next higher gear on a vehicle fitted with manual gearbox before the red zone is reached During acceleration depressing the accelerator exceptionally high engine speeds are automatically reduced yet the engine is not protected against too high engine speeds which are caused by incorrectly shifting down the gears resulting in a sudden increase of the engine speeds above the permitted maximum revolutions which can lead to engine damage For a vehicle fitted with a manual gearbox the converse situation also applies Do not drive at engine revolutions which are too low Shift down as soon as the engine is no longer running smoothly Caution All the speed and engine revolution figures apply only when the engine is at its normal operating temperature Never rev up an engine which is cold neither when the vehicle is stationary nor when driving in individual gears amp For the sake of the environment Not driving at unnecessarily high engine revolutions and shifting to a higher gear as early as possible are ways to minimise fuel consumption and operating noise levels and protects the environment m New tyres New tyres have to be run in since they do not offer optimal grip at fir
68. journey if for some reason it is not possible under the condi tions prevailing to top up with oil Keep the engine switched off and obtain profes sional assistance from a specialist garage otherwise it could lead to severe engine damage Do not drive any further if the warning light flashes even if the oil is at the correct level Do not run the engine not at idling speed either Contact the nearest specialist garage to obtain professional assistance The following text will be displayed in the information display Oil Pressure Engine off Owner s manual The warning light 7 lights up yellow oil quantity too low If the warning light lights up yellow the quantity of oil in the engine is probably too low Check as soon as possible the oil level or top up page 160 with engine oil A peep sounds as an additional warning signal The following text will be displayed in the information display Check oil level The warning light will go out if the bonnet is left open for more than 30 seconds If no engine oil has been replenished the warning light will come on again after driving about 100 km The warning light flashes yellow engine oil level sensor faulty A fault on the engine oil level sensor is indicated additionally by an audible signal and the warning light coming on several times after the ignition has been switched on 4 The warning light s on vehicles fitted with information display does not come on after swit
69. la The power windows operate only when ignition is switched on Opening a window Awindow is opened by pressing lightly on the respective button in the door The process stops when one releases the button Additionally you can open the window automatically fully opened by pressing the button up to the stop Renewed pressing of the button causes the window to stop immediately Closing a window A window is closed through pulling lightly on the respective button in the door The closing process stops when one releases the button Additionally you can close the window automatically fully closed by pulling the button up to the stop Renewed pulling of the button causes the window to stop immediately The buttons for the individual windows are located in the operating part of the armrest of the driver s door fig 32 front passenger door and on the rear doors Buttons for the power windows in the armrest for the driver Button for the power window in the driver s door Button for the power window in the front passenger s door Button for the power window at the rear right door Button for the power window at the rear left door Safety switch Safety pushbutton You can deactivate the buttons for power windows at rear doors by pressing the safety pushbutton S fig 32 The buttons for power windows at rear doors are activated again by pressing the safety pushbutton S again If the buttons for the rear do
70. light items of clothing on the clothes hooks to the vehicle Never leave any heavy or sharp edged objects in the pockets of the items of clothing In addition it is not permitted to use clothes hangers for hanging up items of clothing The airbag control unit operates together with the sensors which are attached in the front doors For this reason no adjustments must be carried out at the doors as well as at the door panels for example additional installation of loudspeakers Resulting damages can have a negative affect on the operation of the airbag system All work on the front doors and their panels must only be carried out by a specialist garage There must not be any other persons e g children or animals between the car occupant and the deployment area of the head airbag In addition none of the occupants should lean their head out of the window when driving or extend their arms and hands out of the window The sun visors must not be swivelled to the side windows into the deploy Fig 121 Inflated head airbag In the case of a side collision the head airbag is deployed together with the relevant side airbag fig 121 and the belt tensioner on the side of the car on which the acci dent occurs If the system is deployed the airbag is filled with propellant gas and covers the entire area of the side window including the door pillars gt fig 121 The protection offered by the head airbags is thus available simultane
71. locking system cee e eee 36 LOCKING cittersctatadtenidseradiads oiee 34 35 Remote control cc cece eee eee ee 39 Locking and unlocking from inside 36 Locking of the door IN AN MEPGENCY vo eee eee eee eee ees 37 LOW DESM ihain pretioasa 45 192 Warning light errs iariersenp tresier 26 Luggage compartment cece eee eee 60 Folding HOOKS ssis acordi vi sonaetbe leds eka 62 Lashing CYS 6 cece eect t eee 61 Luggage compartment variable loading floor 64 Luggage compartment cover 4 62 63 Luggage compartment door c e cease 37 Luggage net partition aicc 66 M Main beam cece ccc 45 49 192 Warning light ccicisaaciesnteceeswdees vous 26 Manial Gearbox ies nici cms in tenements 89 Manual shifting of gears 0c cece eee aes 89 MDI cadre See aie iadewwnnns vied dauae eneea 108 Memory for the on board computer 19 Mobile phone 0 cece cece eee eee 102 Connection with the hands free system 103 Motoring abroad cc cece eee eee 145 HOGI GMS wrt wawe nadine vedas eee deme 145 Multifunction steering wheel 4 101 Multi functional indicator cease 18 N NOW TYPOS ainena ga ie nnd 140 O Oil gasint ieii y hake ta ba 160 CHANGE aches ch gue E Melk pit a TETE 161 Warning light 1 s226s netwiuadedean enete 28 aiene ae E gence adnan E 161 OildIPS ICK asi case anrea Tan iN en iaei 160 Onboard computer 6 cec
72. m Luggage compartment cover You can use the luggage compartment cover behind the head restraints for storing light and soft items B5J 5020H Fig 60 Remove install the luggage compartment cover The luggage compartment cover can be removed if you want to transport bulky goods Unhook the support straps 4 gt page 62 fig 60 Remove the luggage compartment cover from the holders 2 by knocking lightly on the bottom side of the cover in the area between the holders To re install place the cover on the contact surfaces of the side trim panel and position the mounts on the cover 3 above the holders 2 at the side trim panel Interlock the cover by lightly knocking on the top side of the cover in the area between the holders Attach the support straps on the boot lid Z WARNING No objects should be placed on the luggage compartment cover the vehicle occupants could be endangered if there is sudden braking or the vehicle collides with something Caution When closing the boot lid jamming and damage to the luggage compartment cover or the side trim panel can occur if handled in an unprofessional way Therefore check the following before closing The mounts of the cover 3 must be interlocked on the holders of the side trim panel 2 The items which are transported must not exceed the level of the luggage compartment cover The cover must not be jammed in the seal of th
73. m Cigarette lighters and power sockets Cigarette lighter You can also use the socket on the cigarette lighter for other elec trical appliances T m L 1850 60444 Fig 78 Centre console Cigarette lighter Using the cigarette lighter Press in the button of the cigarette lighter fig 78 Wait until the button jumps forward Remove the cigarette lighter immediately and use it Insert the cigarette lighter again into the socket Using the socket Remove the cigarette lighter or the cover of the power socket Connect the plug of the electrical appliance to the socket The 12 volt power socket can also be used to supply power to additional electrical accessories with a power uptake up to 120 watts e Take care when using the cigarette lighter Not paying proper attention or incorrect use the cigarette lighter in an uncontrolled manner may result in burns The cigarette lighter and the power socket also operates when the ignition is switched off or the ignition key withdrawn This is why you should never leave children unattended in the vehicle Caution Always use matching plugs to avoid damaging the power socket a Note e Connecting electrical components when the engine is not running will drain the battery of the vehicle risk of battery draining Further information page 174 Accessories changes and replacement of parts E Power socket in the luggage compartment
74. much easier and sometimes at all possible to start off accelerate and climb slopes when the conditions of the road surface are unfavourable Operating principle The EDL is activated automatically that is without any action on the part of the driver It monitors the speeds of the driven wheels with the aid of the ABS sensors Should only one drive wheel begin spinning on a slippery surface there will be an appreciable difference in the speed of the driven wheels The EDL function brakes the slipping wheel and the differential transmits a greater driving force to the other driven wheel This control process is also accompanied by noises Overheating of the brakes The EDL switches off automatically if unusually severe stresses exist in order to avoid excessive heat generation in the disc brake on the wheel which is being braked The vehicle can continue to be driven and has the same characteristics as a vehicle not fitted with EDL The EDL switches on again automatically as soon as the brake has cooled down XDL function Fabia RS and Fabia Combi RS only The XDL function is an extension to the electronic differential lock The XDL func tion does not respond to traction but to the relief of the inner front wheel during fast cornering An active brake intervention on the brake of the inner wheel prevents it from spinning Thus the traction is improved and the vehicle continues to follow the desired track Z WARNING e Carefully
75. nag teana 30 Anti theft alarm system 0ee eee ee 40 ASN AY co edeiaedadeuiaaviede deudeadeauds ana 71 Assistance systems Stat Stipe eisene oana E oE a iA 92 Auto Check Control 0 cece eee eee 23 Auto COMPUTED osc cacy cgecwe eas cweseneoanss 18 Automatic gearbox 1 0 0 eee eects 95 Emergency programme es seas 99 KICKDOWI arianen e aaraa EREA ve 98 Selector lever emergency unlocking 99 TIDONG airy eiia 98 Automatic vehicle wash systems 149 Automatic wiper washer system 52 BUXEING what dee akaied ash th rn edene TSE 108 Avoiding damage to your vehicle 145 BATTET aaa taraia aiia ea an 27 164 CHANGE sorirdssmotiti eri taaket imide neie 167 GRAPE sorgerierii wee wna td am agennte nce wedded 166 Operation in winter cece eee eee 166 Before setting Off 0 cece eects 109 Belt TENSIONER ssi siiodenntd wad dndiniidedaree uted aren 116 Belt tensioners iiceoe ccce 116 Belsina ennari e E eda ine aa 113 Bicycle holder said bidt a canid eulowleetea ea eae ae 67 BONNET rors ime non a a E DEE i A nA 13 158 Boot lid LIQHUING catcacay cy towwy Speak as dy nee wala 51 Warning light 0 cece eee eee 29 Brake Handbrake ieiiccciiene satiate aden dena ane 89 Brake ASSIST aii ick given pegaddn eed dan aya yas 137 Brake booster cc cece e eee eee eens 136 Brake fluid sscsssiiste yiaieices ddund dudaaoae dhe saad a 164 Brake syst
76. not light up A WARNING after pressing a button on the remote control key fig 22 We recommend that you have the batteries of the key replaced by an authorised Skoda Service Partner You should however proceed as follows if you wish to replace the discharged battery yourself e Always withdraw the key whenever you leave the vehicle even if it is only for a short time This is particularly important if children are left in the vehicle The children might otherwise start the engine or operate electrical equipment e g power windows risk of injury Fold open the key Do not withdraw the ignition key from the ignition lock until the vehicle has Press off the battery cover with your thumb or using a flat screwdriver at the come to a stop The steering lock might otherwise engage unintentionally risk points of the arrows Q of accident Remove the discharged battery from the key by pressing the battery down O wards at the point of the arrow 2 gt fig 23 Caution Insert the new battery Ensure that the symbol on the battery is facing e Each key contains electronic components therefore protect them against mois upwards The correct polarity is shown on the battery cover ture ana sever shocks MEP Position the battery cover on the key and press on it until it is heard to lock in Keep the groove of the keys absolutely clean as impurities textile fibres dust place etc have a negative effect on the prope
77. of fuel can lead to irregular engine running Unburnt fuel may get into the exhaust system and damage the catalytic converter W Counter for distance driven The counter for the distance driven is located in the bottom area of the display The distance which you have driven with your vehicle is shown in kilometres km In some countries the measuring unit mile is used Reset button If you hold the reset button 6 page 15 fig 15 pressed for about 1 second the trip counter is set back to zero Trip counter for distance driven The trip counter indicates the distance which you have driven since this counter was last reset in steps of 100 metres or 1 10 of a mile Counter for distance driven The counter for distance driven indicates the total distance in kilometers or miles which the vehicle has been driven Fault display If there is a fault in the instrument cluster Error will appear as a permanent text in the display Have the fault rectified as soon as possible by a specialist workshop Z WARNING Never seek to adjust the trip counter for distance driven while driving for safety reasons a Note If vehicles which are fitted with the information display the display of the second speed is activated in mph or km h this driving speed is indicated instead of the counter for the total distance driven m Service Reminder pe B5J 6104H Fig 16 Service Interval Display Note Depending on
78. of the initial power output at low temperatures that it has at normal temperatures A discharged battery may already freeze at temperatures just below 0 C We therefore recommend that you have the battery checked by a specialist garage before the start of the winter and recharged if necessary Z WARNING Never charge a frozen or thawed battery risk of explosion and caustic burns Replace a frozen battery m Charging the battery A properly charged battery is essential for reliably starting the engine Read the warning notes gt in General information on page 164 and gt A gt Switch the ignition and all electrical components off Only for quick charging Disconnect both battery cables first of all negative then positive Carefully attach the terminal clamps of the charger to the battery terminals red positive black negative You can now plug the mains cable of the charger into the power socket and switch on the charger When charging is completed switch the charger off and unplug the mains cable from the power socket Only then should you disconnect the terminal clamps of the charger Reconnect the cables to the battery first of all positive then negative It is not normally necessary to disconnect the cables of the battery if you recharge the battery using low amperages as for example from a mini charger Please also refer to the instr
79. off right after starting the engine Do avoid high engine revolutions at this time however E Regular servicing A poorly tuned engine consumes an unnecessarily high amount of fuel Having your vehicle serviced regularly at a specialist garge enables you to satisfy one of the requirements for economical motoring even before you set off on your journey Keeping your vehicle properly serviced not only has a positive effect on the safety of your vehicle and maintaining its value but also saves on fuel A poorly tuned engine can result in a fuel consumption which is 10 higher than normal The foreseen maintenance work should be undertaken exactly according to the Service schedule by a specialist garage Also check the oil level after refueling Oil consumption is dependent to a consider able extent on the load and speed of the engine Oil consumption could be as high as 0 5 litres 1 000 km depending on your style of driving It is quite normal that a new engine has a higher oil consumption at first and reaches its lowest level only after a certain running in time It is therefore not possible to correctly assess the oil consumption of a new vehicle until after you have driven about 5 000 km Se For the sake of the environment e You can achieve additional improvements in your fuel economy by using high lubricity oils Check the ground below your car at regular intervals to detect any leakages in good time Please have your veh
80. off the connector from the lamp release the sprung wire clamp and pull out the lamp towards the rear fig 170 Replace the lamp H4 LL insert into the opening in the reflector with the fixing lugs in the recesses secure with the sprung wire clamp mount the connector and position the protective cap Werecommend that you have the headlight setting checked by a Skoda Service Partner after replacing the light bulb m Low beam and main beam low beam halogen projector headlights Fig 171 Removing the light bulb for the low beam and main beam light low beam light Remove the protective cap gt fig 169 Turn the connector with the light bulb up to the stop towards the left gt fig 171 and remove Replace the halogen lamp H7 LL insert the connector with the new halogen lamp and turn to the right up to the stop Insert the protective cap We recommend that you have the headlight setting checked by a Skoda Service Partner after replacing the light bulb m Main beam halogen projector headlights main beam light Remove the protective cap gt page 192 fig 169 Turn the connector with the light bulb up to the stop towards the left fig 172 and remove Replace the halogen lamp H7 LL insert the connector with the new halogen lamp and turn to the right up to the stop Insert the protective cap We recommend that you have the headlight setting checked by a Skoda Service
81. only possible to reset the Service Interval Display if a service message or at least a pre warning is shown on the display of the instrument cluster We recommend having this resetting performed by a specialist garage The specialist garage resets the memory of the display after the appropriate inspection e makes an entry in the Service Schedule e affix the sticker with the entry of the following service interval to the side of the dash panel on the driver s side Reset the service interval displays by using the reset button gt page 15 on the trip counter In vehicles with an information display call this display in the Settings page 24 menu A Instruments and warning lights Caution We recommend that you do not reset the Service Interval Display yourself other wise this can result in the service interval display being incorrectly set which may also result in problems with operation of your vehicle Note Never reset the display between service intervals otherwise this may result in incorrect readouts information is retained in the Service Interval Display also after the battery of the vehicle is disconnected e ifthe instrument cluster is exchanged after a repair the correct values must be entered in the counter for the Service Interval Display This work is carried out by a specialist garage e After resetting the display with flexible service intervals QG1 the data displayed are the same as f
82. pads must first be rubbed off when you apply the brakes Corrosion Corrosion on the brake discs and dirt on the bake pads occur if the vehicle has been parked for a long period and if you do not make much use of the braking system We recommend cleaning the brake discs by firmly applying the brakes at a fairly high speed if you do not make much use of the braking system or if surface corrosion is present gt A Faults in the brake surface If you notice that the braking distance has suddenly become longer and that the brake pedal can be depressed further it is possible that a brake circuit of the dual circuit brake system has failed Drive in such cases to the nearest specialist garage without delay in order to have the problem rectified Drive at a reduced speed while on your way to the dealer and adapt your style of driving to the higher brake pedal pressure required Low brake fluid level An insufficient level of brake fluid may result in problems in the brake system The level of the brake fluid is monitored electronically gt page 30 Brake system Z WARNING e Only apply the brakes for the purpose of drying and cleaning the brake discs if the traffic conditions permit this Do not place any other road users in jeop ardy When retrospectively mounting a front spoiler solid wheel hubs etc one must ensure that the air supply to the front wheel brakes is not reduced other wise the braking system could run too
83. per rpm Number of cylinders Displacement cm 7714400 250 1500 2500 4 1598 Performances FABIA ESTATE CAR Maximum speed km h 188 190 Acceleration 0 100 km h s 10 9 11 0 Fuel consumption in Itr 100 km and CO in g km Urban 5 1 Non urban 3 6 Combination 4 2 CO emission combination 109 Weight in kg Permissible gross weight 1674 1644 1694 1649 Unloaden weight ready for work 1219 1239 Permissible trailer load trailer braked unbraked 1200 500 1200 450 E a Vehicles of category N1 Index A ABOA ercriiner tiere notated sted kt ateei 145 ABS E EE E E E 136 Warning light cece eee eee eee 30 Accessories fa ceer ia cian ae piaren cd emnew es 174 Adjusting seats cece eee eee ees 56 110 Adjusting the steering wheel 86 Air conditioning system cece eee eee eee 80 Recirculated air mode e cee eee 83 AUIDAG E E E E puhdr el ee awed 117 DeployMeNt ecr oeririesreipniieredei aces 117 Front dirbaGessserisis ireira eniarririani 118 Head airbag eccsrerscrrrsrdeniseritnitrnti 121 Sideairbag wiceveniastewetaco nd wionuteda 120 Warming light wisisiiecces dean esabetaa nian 31 Airbag SYSTEM wc ct omannevanedd dremianermd eni 117 Warming ght sercssirsreiicidirieridiiniti 31 AII rrinin EUR REREKAI edaate as 40 Alternator Warning light siossiiireesteritritedsiesi 27 Antilock brake system cece eee ee 136 Antilock brake system ABS Warning light svi iccsctungewgeate
84. sai ct chasse danaddeaawe desk ews 96 Selector lever lock indicator LIGNE siecreioieeiriireritiiteeiis 29 Selector lever positions aac 96 Selector lever emergency unlocking 99 Service Reminder 0c cece eee eee eee 17 Setting temperature Air conditioning system iiac 80 Heating coitus i eeeen eon donee nities aeons 78 Setting thescloGk srririsrrsriir sssini 18 SAIRING perier trene snaar a e o aa 89 Sidearbag csesrrirecsirnerterieiiiei tokai 120 Side lights creresrrrisenrerrsreenornirt inin mii 45 Snow CHAINS eerisrerereeneeirusiet etetni 173 Spare wheel 0 0 c norice 176 Speedometer ieee cece eee ee eee eee 16 Stability systeM oc 0 cece ees 133 Start STOP aee na bay pau E diene gaueau ce 92 Starting the engine cece eee eee 87 Diesel engines 6 cece cece eee 88 Petrol Engines cece cece eee es 88 Steering force assistance cece cece ees 137 Storage box LIGHTING ctnihedacineatie teatedatewe nian Gate 51 Storage compartments eee e eee eee 73 Storage facilities 0 cece eee 73 SUMVISORS nia neitin ee a aaine a a 51 Switch off Anti spin regulation ASR Warning light 0 cece eee eee 29 Switching off the engine eens aes 88 216 Index Systems Start STOD sicaiscewn cp iceanens cocnean canes 92 T Taking care of your vehicle 005 149 TCS cessacainatenis Menten PUNEET tanta Bens 134 Warning light cece cece
85. season in the year which may be sold during the corresponding season Winter grade diesel fuel will still operate properly even at a temperature of 20 C It is often the case in countries with different climatic conditions that diesel fuels available have a different temperature characteristic The authorised Skoda Service Partners and filling stations in the country concerned will be able to provide you with information regarding the diesel fuels available Prewarming fuel The vehicle is fitted with a fuel filter prewarming system This secures operation of a vehicle using diesel fuel down to an environmental temperature of 25 C Caution It is not permitted to add the various fuel additives on the market including petrol to diesel fuel in order to improve its flow properties m Refuelling Fig 138 Right rear side of the vehicle Fuel filler flap fuel filler flap with cap unscrewed Opening the fuel filler cap Open the fuel filler flap with the hand fig 138 left Hold the fuel tank cap of the fuel filler tube with one hand and unlock it by turning with the vehicle key to the left Unscrew the fuel filler cap anti clockwise and place the fuel filler cap from above on the fuel filler flap gt fig 138 right Closing fuel filler cap Screw on the cap by turning it to the right until it is heard to lock Hold the fuel filler cap on the fuel filler tube with one hand and lock it by turning
86. selector lever into the position P If the selector lever position N is selected by accident while driving it is first neces sary to release pressure on the accelerator pedal and wait for idling speed of the engine to be reached before engaging a drive position in the selector lever Z WARNING Do not depress the accelerator when changing the position of the selector lever if the car is stationary and the engine is running risk of accident Never move the selector lever into position R or P when driving risk of an accident When the engine is running and the vehicle is stationary it is necessary to hold the car with the brake pedal in all the positions of the selector lever except P and N since the power transmission is never completely interrupted also not when the engine is idling the vehicle creeps m Information for driving with the automatic gearbox DSG The abbreviation DSG means Direct shift gearbox Direct shift gearbox Two independent clutches are needed for the power transmission between the engine and the gearbox These replace the torque converter of the conventional automatic gearbox Their shifting is matched in such a way that there are no jerks when shifting the gear and the power transmission of the engine to the front wheels is not interrupted Shifting up and down through the gears is performed automatically You can also however switch the gearbox over into the Tiptronic mode This mode mak
87. set the time the time format 12 or 24 hour indicator and the time change summer winter time Winter tyres Here you can set at which speed a warning signal should sound This function is used for e g winter tyres with the permissible maximum speed less than the maximum speed of the vehicle When exceeding the speed the following is displayed on the information display Snow tyres max speed km h Measures Here you can set the units for temperature consumption and distance driven Second speed Here you can switch on the display of the second speed in mph or in km h2 Service Here you can have the kilometers still to be driven and the days until the following service interval shown and the Service Interval Display reset Factory Setting After selecting the menu Factory setting the factory setting of the information display is restored m 2 Valid for countries where the values are indicated in British measuring units Instruments and warning lights e Warning lights Overview The warning lights indicate certain functions or faults 40 PsA ee Vr s man x 100 7 85J 6130F Fig 21 Instrument cluster with warning lights a Turn signal lights to the left gt page 26 Fog lights page 27 D gt Turn signal lights to the right gt page 26 Electrohydraulic power steering page 27 Main beam page 26 EPC EPC fault light petrol engine page 27 ZD Low beam page 26 O Glow plug
88. severely soiled areas with a cloth dipped in a mild soapy solution 2 spoon fuls of natural soap to 1 litre of water Ensure that the leather is not soaked through at any point and that no water gets into the stitching of the seams Dry off the leather with a soft dry cloth Removing stains Remove fresh stains which are water based e g coffee tea juices blood etc with an absorbent cloth or household paper or use the cleaner from the care set for a stain which has already dried in Remove fresh stains ona fat base e g butter mayonnaise chocolate etc with an absorbent cloth or household cleaning paper or with the cleaner from the care set if the stain has not yet penetrated into the surface Use a grease dissolver for grease stains which have dried in Eliminate special stains e g ball point pens felt pen nail varnish dispersion paint shoe cream etc with a special stain remover suitable for leather Leather care Treat the leather every six months with a special leather care product Apply only a small amount of the care product Dry the leather off with a soft cloth Caution e You must on no account treat the leather with solvents e g gasoline turpen tine floor wax shoe cream or such like e Avoid leaving your vehicle for lengthy periods in bright sunlight in order to avoid bleaching the leather If you leave your vehicle parked in the open for lengthy periods protect the leather
89. shift noises The reversing light will come on once reverse gear is engaged provided the ignition is on Z WARNING Never engage the reverse gear when driving risk of accident a Note One should not lay the hand on the shift lever while driving the vehicle The pressure of the hand will be transferred to the gearshift forks in the gearbox This can over a period of time lead to early wear of the gearshift forks Depress the clutch pedal fully when changing gears in order to avoid unneces sary wear and damage E Using the system Starting off and Driving fgg Handbrake B5u 6058H Fig 97 Centre console Handbrake Applying the handbrake Pull the handbrake lever up fully Releasing the handbrake Pull the handbrake lever up slightly and at the same time press in the locking button fig 97 Hold the button pressed and push the handbrake lever down fully gt A The handbrake warning light lights up when the handbrake is applied provided the ignition is on A warning signal sounds and the following text appears in the display if you have inadvertently driven off with the handbrake applied Release parking brake The handbrake warning is activated if you drive at a speed of more than 6 km h for more than 3 seconds Z WARNING e Please note that the handbrake must be fully released A handbrake which is only partially released can result in the rear brakes overheating which
90. short time because the coolant temperature of the engine is too hot gt page 16 If you are not able to rectify the operational problem yourself or if the cooling capacity decreases switch the cooling system off Contact a specialist garage m 78 Heating and air conditioning system Air outlet vents The information provided is valid for all vehicles B5J 6052H Fig 90 Air outlet vents Open the air outlet vents 3 and 4 Turn the vertical thumbwheel air outlet vents 3 or the horizontal wheel air outlet vents 4 to the position 22 Close air outlet vents 3 and 4 Turn the vertical thumbwheel air outlet vents 3 or the horizontal wheel air outlet vents 4 to the position 0 Change air flow of air outlet vents 3 and 4 In order to change the strength of the air flow swivel the horizontal lamellas with the aid of the moveable adjuster In order to change the lateral direction of the air flow turn the vertical lamellas with the aid of the moveable adjuster You can set the air supply to the individual vents with the air distribution control fig 91 Air outlet vents 3 and 4 can also be opened or closed individually Warmed unwarmed or cooled air will flow out of the air outlet vents according to the setting of the regulator of the heating or the air conditioning system and the atmospheric conditions m Heating Using the system The heating system delivers air into the interior of the vehicle
91. so as to enable the head airbags to offer the maximum protection The airbag modules in the front seats must not display any damage cracks or deep scratches It is not permissible to use force in order to open the modules Together with other elements such as cross bars in the doors stable vehicle struc ture the head airbags are the consequent further development of occupant protec tion in the case of side collisions m 2 Airbag system Function of the head airbags Important safety information on the head airbag Correct use of the airbag system considerably reduces the risk of injury The risk of injury to the head and neck area is reduced in the event of a side collision by fully inflated head airbags Z WARNING Itis essential to always switch off gt page 123 the front passenger airbag when attaching a child safety seat on the front passenger seat where the child is seated with its back facing in direction of travel in some countries also when the child is facing the direction of travel If this is not done there is a risk of the child suffering severe or even fatal injuries if the front passenger airbag is deployed When transporting a child on the front passenger seat please comply with the appropriate national regulations regarding the use of child safety seats There must not be any objects in the deployment area of the head airbags which might prevent the airbags from inflating properly e Only hang
92. speed and weight increase the greater the amount of energy which has to be absorbed in the event of an accident The speed of the vehicle is nevertheless the most important factor Doubling the speed of the vehicle from 25 km h up to 50 km hour increases the kinetic energy four times The common opinion that it is possible to support your body in a minor accident with your hands is incorrect Even in a collision at only a low speed the forces acting on the body are such that it is no longer possible to support your body Even if you only drive at a speed within the range from 30 km hour to 50 km hour the forces which are produced on your body in the event of an accident can easily exceed 10 000 N Newton This equals a weight of one tonne 1 000 kg In the event of a frontal collision occupants of the vehicle not wearing a seat belt are thrown forward and strike in an uncontrolled way parts of the interior of the vehicle such as steering wheel dash panel windscreen gt page 113 fig 111 left The occupants of a vehicle who have not fastened their seat belts may even be thrown out of the vehicle This can result in fatal injuries It is also important that rear seat occupants fasten their seat belts as they will otherwise be thrown through the vehicle in an uncontrolled manner in the event of an accident A rear seat passenger who has not fastened the seat belt is a danger not only to himself but also for those seated at the fron
93. stages manually to suit your particular needs Heating and air conditioning system fas Turn the control dial o gt page 83 fig 93 to the left reduce blower speed or right increase blower speed If you switch off the blower the Climatronic is switched off Z WARNING e Stale air may result in fatigue in the driver and occupants reduce attention levels and also cause the windows to mist up The risk of having an accident increases Do not switch the Climatronic system off for longer than necessary e Switch the Climatronic system on as soon as the windows mist up m Recirculated air mode In recirculated air mode air is sucked out of the interior of the vehicle and then fed back into the interior Recirculated air mode prevents polluted air outside the vehicle from getting into the vehicle for example when driving through a tunnel or when standing in a traffic jam Switching recirculated air mode on Press the button page 83 fig 93 gt appears in the display Switching recirculated air mode off Press button again the symbol lt in the display goes out Z WARNING You should not leave recirculated air mode on over a longer period of time as stale air may result in fatigue in the driver and occupants divert your attention and also cause the windows to mist up The risk of having an accident increases Switch recirculated air mode off as soon as the windows begin m
94. the ignition is switched off An acoustic warning signal will sound when the driver s door is opened if the lever is not in the middle position after removing the ignition key from the ignition lock The acoustic warning signal will stop just as soon as the driver s door is closed Caution Use main beam or the headlight flasher only if this does not risk dazzling other road users a Note e f you have switched on the right or left turn signal light and you switch off the ignition the parking light is not automatically switched on Use only in accordance with the legal requirements the described lighting and signal systems W Interior lighting interior vehicle lighting version 1 Fig 40 Interior lighting version 1 B5J 6029H Lights and Visibility ag gt Lights and Visibility Door contact switching mechanism front and rear doors Press the switch in the direction of the centre of the light the symbol gt page 49 fig 40 appears Switching the interior light on Press the switch in the direction of the edge of the light the symbol 7 appears Switching the interior light off Press the switch into the middle position O Reading lights Press on one of the switches 8 gt page 49 fig 40 in order to switch the right or left reading light on or off On vehicles with central locking the interior light is switched on for about 30 seconds when the vehicle is unlocked
95. the belt properly Z WARNING e The seat belts must not be removed for cleaning Never clean the seat belts chemically as dry cleaning may destroy the fabric The seat belts must also not be allowed to come into contact with corrosive liquids such as acids etc Seat belts which have damage to the webbing the connections the inertia reel or the lock should be replaced by a specialist garage Inertia reel belts must be completely dried before being reeled up m Fuel Petrol Unleaded petrol Your vehicle can only be operated with unleaded petrol which complies with the standard EN 228 in Gemany also DIN 51626 1 or E10 for unleaded petrol with the octane rating 95 RON and 91 RON or DIN 51626 2 or E5 for unleaded petrol with the octane rating 98 On the inside of the fuel filler flap you will find the informa tion regarding the RON required by your engine gt page 156 fig 138 right Prescribed fuel unleaded petrol 95 91 RON Use unleaded petrol with the octane rating 95 RON You can also use unleaded petrol 91 RON but this leads to a slight loss in performance If in case of necessity the vehicle must be refuelled with petrol of a lower octane number than the one prescribed you must continue driving at medium engine speeds and low engine load High engine revs or a greater engine load can cause major damage to the engine Refuel as soon as possible with petrol of the prescribed octane number
96. the foot brake The engine can however be allowed just to idle Parking Depress the brake pedal and hold it depressed Apply the handbrake firmly Press and Shiftlock button in the selector lever move the selector lever to P and then release the Shiftlock button The engine can only be started when the selector lever is in position P or N The following message is shown in the information display if the selector lever is not in the position P or N when locking the steering switching the ignition on off or when starting the engine Move selector lever to position P N or in the instrument cluster display gt P N Using the system Automatic gearbox fos It is sufficient to engage selector lever position P when parking on a flat surface When parking on a slope you should first apply the handbrake firmly and then move the selector lever into position P This is to ensure that there is no excessive pres sure acting on the lock mechanism and that it is easier to subsequently move the selector lever out of position P If the selector lever is not in position P when opening the driver s door and when the ignition is switched off or when it is not in position P when switching off the ignition when the door is open the following message appears in the information display Move selector lever to position P or in the instrument cluster display gt P The message disappears after a few seconds by switching on the ignition or by moving the
97. the function daylight driving lights neither front nor rear If the vehicle is not equipped with separate lights for daylight driving lights the combination of the low beam the parking lights front and rear including the licence plate light is used as daylight driving lights In some countries the national legal provisions require that the rear parking lights also come on together with the separate lights for daylight driving lights when acti vating the function daylight driving lights m Halogen projector headlights with cornering light function For a better cornering illumination the halogen projector headlights with cornering light function are set in the optimal position in line with the vehicle speed and the steering angle If the warning light comes on while driving or after the ignition is switched on a fault is confirmed Z WARNING If there is a fault in the halogen projector headlights with cornering light func tion the warning light lights up in the instrument cluster The halogen projector headlights with cornering light function are automatically lowered to the emergency position which prevents a possible dazzling of oncoming traffic Thus the illuminated length of the road is shortened Drive carefully and have the car inspected immediately by a specialist garage m Tourist light Halogen projector headlights with cornering light function This mode makes it possible to drive in countri
98. the functions Press the top or bottom rocker switch a for longer than 0 5 seconds In this way Call up in sequence the individual functions of the multi functional indi cator Setting function to zero Select the memory you want Press button 8 for more than 1 second The following readouts of the selected memory will be set to zero by button 8 e average fuel consumption distance driven average speed Driving time You can only operate the multi functional indicator when the ignition is switched on After the ignition is switched on the function displayed is the one which you last selected before switching off the ignition m Outside temperature The outside temperature appears in the display when the ignition is switched on If the outside temperature drops below 4 C a snow flake symbol warning signal for ice on the road appears in front of the temperature indicator and flashes for 10 seconds then remains displayed together with the outside temperature At the same time an audible signal sounds After pressing the rocker switch A on the windshield wiper lever gt page 19 fig 19 the function which was shown last is indi cated Z WARNING Do not only rely upon the information given on the outside temperature display that there is no ice on the road Please note that black ice may also be present on the road surface even at temperatures around 4 C warning drive with care m
99. the other hand and tighten it gt fig 177 Caution When removing and installing the rear light unit make sure not to damage the paint work of the vehicle and the rear light unit a Note For slackening and tightening the plastic nut use a coin m Changing light bulbs in the rear light unit Fig 178 Rear light unit Fitting position of the bulbs Toreplace alight bulb turn the bulb connector of the light bulb to the left in the direction of the arrows on the housing and take it out of the housing fig 178 right Replace the light bulb put the bulb connector back into the housing and turn it to the right up to the stop in the opposite direction of the arrows on the housing Fitting position of the light bulbs in the rear light unit gt fig 178 C Rear fog light Reversing light Breakdown assistance Technical date 196 Fuses and light bulbs Turn signal lights Brake lights parking lights m Technical data Technical Data General information The details given in the official vehicle registration documents always take prece dence over the details in the Owner s Manual Please refer to the official vehicle registration documents or consult a specialist garage concerning the engine with which your vehicle is equipped m Used abbreviations Abbreviation kW rpm Nm g km TSI TDI CR M5 AQ6 DQ7 N1 DPF Importance Kilowatt measuring unit for the engine output En
100. the stop and take it out Change the bulb insert again the socket with the new bulb and turn it to the right up to the stop Connect the plug to the socket Screw in the screws again and insert the cover The cover must engage firmly 13 Valid for Fabia Scout and Fabia RS Licence plate light Fig 176 Remove the licence plate light Open the boot lid and unscrew the light glass fig 176 Take the defective bulb out of the holder and insert a new one Insert the glass cover of the light again and press it down to the stop ensure that the sealing rubber is correctly seated Screw on the light glass slightly m Rear light unit B5J 5017H Fig 177 Remove the rear light unit install the rear light unit Open the boot lid luggage compartment door Hold tight the rear light unit with one hand and unscrew the plastic nut with the other hand fig 177 left Grip the rear light unit and remove it carefully with loosening movements at an angle to the rear Do not pull the grommet with the cables out of the body Fuses and light bulbs 05 Replace the defective light bulb page 195 When re installing first insert the rear light unit with the screw A into the opening of the body fig 177 Carefully press the rear light unit into the body in such a way that the pins engage into the supports of the body Hold the rear light unit tight with one hand screw on the nut with
101. the telephone system only to such an extent so that you are in full control of your vehicle at any time a Note Please refer to the following guidelines page 102 Mobile phones and two way radio systems Should you have any questions please contact an authorised Skoda Service Partner m Phone Phonebook A phone phonebook is part of the mobile phone preinstallation with voice control In the phone phonebook there are 2 500 free memory locations available Each contact can contain up to 4 numbers This phone phonebook can be used in line with the mobile telephone After the first connection of the telephone the system begins to load the phone book from the phone and the SIM card into the memory of the control unit Each time the telephone has established a new connection with the hands free system an update of the relevant phone book is performed The updating can take a few minutes During this time the phone book which was stored after the last update was completed is available Newly stored telephone numbers are only shown after the updating has ended If the number of contacts loaded exceeds 2 500 the phone book is not complete If a telephone event e g incoming or outgoing call dialogue of the voice control occurs during the updating procedure the updating is interrupted After the tele phone event has ended the updating starts anew E Connection of the mobile phone with the hands free system In
102. the vehicle is moving With switch choose the menu point Warning against excessive speeds You can drive at the desired speed e g 50 km h Press button B to accept the current speed as the speed limit the value flashes If you wish to change the speed limit that was set it is changed in 5 km h intervals e g the accepted speed of 47 km h increases to 50 km h or decreases to 45 km h Confirm the speed limit that was set by pressing button 8 again or wait approx 5 seconds until the setting is saved automatically the value stops flashing Changing or removing the speed limit With switch a choose the menu point Warning against excessive speeds Remove the speed limit with button 8 Pressing the button 8 again activates the change mode for the speed limit If you go faster than the speed limit that was set you will be notified with an acoustic warning A Warning against excessive speeds appears together with the set limit on the display The set speed limit remains stored even after switching off the ignition 22 Instruments and warning lights Z WARNING Pay attention primarily to the traffic situation As the driver you are fully respon sible for road safety m MAXI DOT display information display Introduction The information display provides you with information in a convenient way concerning the current operating state of your vehicle The information system also provi
103. via Bluetooth You can ask at an authorised Skoda Service Partner if your telephone is compatible with the universal telephone preinstallation GSM II e Ifa suitable adapter is available for your mobile phone use your mobile phone exclusively in the adapter so that the radiation in the vehicle drops to a minimum Inserting the mobile phone into the adapter ensures an optimal sending and receiving power and offers at the same time the advantage of the battery charging e The range of the Bluetooth connection to the hands free system is restricted to the vehicle interior The range is dependent on local factors e g obstacles between the devices and mutual interferences with other devices If your mobile phone is e g in a jacket pocket this can lead to difficulties when establishing the Bluetooth connection with the hands free system or the data transfer m Inserting the mobile phone and adapter Fig 106 Universal preparation for the mobile phone Only one telephone mount is factory fitted An adapter for the telephone can be purchased from the range of the Skoda original accessories Inserting the mobile phone and adapter First ofall push the adapter a in the direction of arrow fig 106 up to the stop into the mount Press the adapter slightly downwards until it locks securely into position Insert the mobile phone into the adapter as specified in manufacturer s instructions Removing the mobile phone
104. warning light 00 does not come on or lights up continuously contact a specialist garage as soon as possible to obtain assistance If the warning light 0 begins to flash while driving a fault exists in the engine control The engine management system selects an emergency programme which enables you to drive to the nearest specialist garage by adopting a gentle style of driving E Coolant temperature coolant quantity The warning light lights up until the engine reaches operating temperature Avoid running at high engine speeds at full throttle and at severe engine loads The warning light comes on for a few seconds when the ignition is switched on The coolant temperature is too high or the coolant level too low if the warning light lights up or flashes while driving An audible signal sounds as a warning signal In this case stop and switch the engine off and check the coolant level top up the coolant as necessary gt page 163 Replenishing the coolant Do not continue your journey if for some reason it is not possible under the condi tions prevailing to top up with coolant Keep the engine switched off and obtain professional assistance from a specialist garage otherwise it could lead to severe engine damage If the coolant is within the specified range the increased temperature may be caused by an operating problem at the coolant fan Check the fuse for the coolant fan replace it if necessary page
105. while driving There is a risk of spilling e g when braking and therefore the electrical components or the seat upholstery can be damaged m Seats and Stowage a Rear cup holder h wf Fig 75 Centre console Cup holder You can place one cup or beverage can into the recess fig 75 Z WARNING Do not place any hot beverages into the cup holder If the vehicle moves they may spill risk of scalding Do not use any cups or beakers which are made of brittle material e g glass porcelain You might be injured by them in the event of an accident Caution Do not open the beverages in the cup holder while driving There is a risk of spilling e g when braking and therefore the electrical components or the seat upholstery can be damaged m Using the system Parking ticket holder Fig 76 Windscreen Parking ticket holder The parking ticket holder is designed e g for attaching car park tickets in car parks The parking ticket must be removed before starting off in order not to restrict the driver s vision m Ashtray Fig 77 Centre console Ashtray at the front rear Removing ashtray Remove the ashtray gt fig 77 upwards When removing do not hold the ashtray at the cover risk of breakage Replacing ashtray Insert the ashtray vertically Seats and Stowage Z WARNING Z WARNING Never lay flammable objects in the ashtray basin risk of fire
106. will have a negative effect on the operation of the brake system risk of accident In addition this can result in premature wear of the rear brake pads Never leave children unattended in the vehicle The children might for example release the handbrake or take the vehicle out of gear The vehicle might then move off risk of accident Starting off and Driving Caution After the car has come to a stop always first of all apply the handbrake firmly before then additionally engaging a gear manual gearbox or moving the selector lever into position P automatic gearbox m Parking aid The parking aid provides a warning of obstacles behind the vehicle gt Fig 98 Parking aid Range of sensors The audible parking aid determines the distance between the rear bumper and an obstacle located behind the vehicle with the aid of ultrasound sensors The sensors are integrated in the rear bumper Range of sensors The clearance warning begins at a distance of about 160 cm from the obstacle area a fig 98 The interval between the warning signals becomes shorter as the clearance is reduced A continuous tone sounds from a distance of approx 30 cm area B danger area You should not reverse any further after this signal sounds If the vehicle is equipped with a factory fitted towing device the indication threshold of the danger area Starts continuous tone 5 cm further behind the vehicle The vehicle can be
107. with unleaded premium grade petrol of a different brand or at a different filling station m Driving Tips Driving and the Environment lat Driving in an economical and environmentally conscious manner General Your personal style of driving is a major factor Your fuel consumption any pollution of the environmental and the wear and tear to the engine brakes and tyres depend essentially on three factors e your personal style of driving the conditions under which your vehicle is operated technical aspects You can easily improve your fuel economy by 10 15 percent by driving in an econom ical way with foresight This section is intended to provide you with a number of tips on how to protect the environment and at the same time save money The fuel consumption can naturally also be influenced by factors which are beyond the driver s control It is for example normal for the fuel consumption to increase in winter and under worsened conditions such as poor road conditions towing a trailer etc The technical requirements for low fuel usage and economic efficiency of the vehicle have already been built into the vehicle at the works Special attention has been given to minimising negative effects on the environment It is necessary to take note of the guidelines given in this chapter in order to make best use of these characteristics and to maintain their effectiveness The optimal engine speed should be obtained when accel
108. 00 Automatic gearbox In case of interruption of the power supply e g flat vehicle battery defective fuse or defect of the selector lever lock the selector lever can no longer be shifted from the position P in the normal way and the vehicle can no longer be moved The selector lever must be unlocked in case of emergency Apply the handbrake firmly Carefully pull up the front left and right cover Pull up rear cover Use the finger to press the yellow plastic part downwards page 99 fig 104 Simultaneously press the shiftlock button in the handle of the selector lever and shift the lever into the position N if the selector lever is shifted again into the position P it is once again blocked m Communication or Communication Multifunction steering wheel Operate radio und radio navigation system on the multifunction steering wheel The buttons for setting the basic functions of the factory fitted radio and naviga tion system are located on the multifunction steering wheel fig 105 You can of course continue to operate the radio and radio navigation from the unit You will find a description in the relevant Owner s manual If the side lights are switched on the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel are also illuminated except the symbols and By pressing or turning the buttons you can carry out the following functions Fig 105 Multifunction steering wheel control buttons Button Action Rad
109. 13 It is important that you pay attention to safety measures particularly when trans porting children in the vehicle page 125 Transporting children safely Z WARNING e Fasten your seat belt each time before setting off also when driving in town This also applies to the people seated at the rear risk of injury Expectant women must also always wear a Seat belt This is the only way of ensuring optimal protection for the unborn child page 115 Fastening three point seat belts Seat belts ia ZN WARNING continued tis important for the belt webbing to be properly routed if the seat belts are to offer the maximum protection You can see a description of how safety belts should be fitted properly on the next pages a Note Please comply with any differing legal requirements when using the seat belts m The physical principle of a frontal collision af rf R os wil ve Fig 111 The driver is catapulted forward if not wearing a belt The rear seat occupant is cata pulted forward if not wearing a belt The physical principle of a frontal accident can be explained quite simply Motion energy so called kinetic energy is produced as soon as the vehicle is moving both for the vehicle and its occupants The magnitude of this kinetic energy depends essentially on the speed at which the vehicle is travelling and on the weight of the vehicle and the occupants The greater the
110. 155 Warning light 0 cece cece eee 28 Fuel consumption 0 0 cece eens 20 141 Saving CNElGY wsevivecs aecserae cree y 141 FUCLQQUGE iwc iettianian dea geusdsanhesdevenia 16 Fuel reserve Warning light c cece eee eee 28 FUILWHECITIM crccectcia gains os cavadanen vans 177 Fuse ASSIGNMENT Scare coe ane Vena a a wa 187 FUSES is mite onain eaa aE A aE ol EE elias 186 G Gearbox MECHANICAL ssersrererreorirarrisi ea aes d 89 Gearshift indicator for changing gears 18 General view COCKPIT i cache oredul bok itp EE E ea wes deine as 9 Glass TOOT ornare eE E OER 43 Glow plug SySteM 1 0 cece cece eens 88 Warning ight iiciccccecis caeaee seer conden 27 GSM iiiaae iia EO AE E 102 H Halogen projector headlights with cornering light FUNGON erei a E T AEA 46 Hand brakes ii vincac et nisoe euroa orea 89 Warning light cece eee eee 31 Hazard warning light system 05 48 Warning light wicca iyadcisiseucesdacuaaaes 26 Head dirtbag proes rarkia ower radars antes 121 Head FeStraint 2 isu cereeweanegureseg enter 57 Headlight cleaning system eee eee 53 Headlight flasher c cece eee eee eee 49 Headlights FOG NIGMS si sccictctict smatietnttsandive aad bebe ded 47 Headlight cleaning system 004 53 Heated windscreen washer nozzles 52 HOSTING ce edkcann dees oie Sake aE eika giaa 78 Defrosting windows 0seee ee eaes 79
111. 195 55 R15 as to tyres of the tyre size 185 55 R15 which are intended to be used with snow chains see the inside of the fuel filler flap The tyres of the tyre size 185 55 R15 which are intended to be used with snow chains and are fitted on models Fabia Combi Scout have the following inflation pressure values in kPa Engine Partial load Full load 1 2 63 kW TSI 220 230 1 4 63 kw 220 290 1 2 77 kW TSI 230 300 1 6 77 kW 220 230 230 300 1 2 55 kW TDI CR 230 300 1 6 66 kW TDI CR 220 290 1 6 77 kW TDI CR 220 290 Driving style Fast cornering sharp acceleration and braking squealing tyres increase wear and tear on your tyres Balancing wheels The wheels of a new vehicle are balanced There are a wide range of influences when driving which may result in an imbalance and which makes themselves felt through vibration in the steering You should have the wheels rebalanced since any imbalance increases wear and tear on the steering the suspension and tyres A wheel must also be rebalanced when a new tyre is fitted and each time a tyre is repaired Wheel alignment errors Incorrect wheel alignment at the front and rear will not only increase wear and tear on the tyres but will also has an adverse effect on vehicle safety Contact your specialist garage if you notice any unusual tyre wear 70 Wheels and Tyres Z WARNING e Ifthe inflation pressure is too low the tyre must perform a higher rolling resistance At higher sp
112. 3 kg gt page 128 1 9 18kg gt page 128 2 15 25 kg gt page 129 3 22 36kg gt page 129 Children who are more than 1 50 m tall or who weigh more than 36 kg can use normal seat belts without a seat bolster m Use of child seats An overview of the usefulness of child seats on each of the seats according to the ECE R 44 standard Rear seat Rear seat outside middle OOO 0 OOO 1 OOO 2and3 Child seat Front passenger of the group seat S Universal category seat is suitable for all approved types of child safety seats The seat can be fitted with fixing eyes for the ISOFIX system The seat is equipped as standard with the fixing system Top Tether m Child seats of group 0 0 Fig 125 Child seats of group 0 0 The optimal solution for babies of up to about 9 months old weighing up to 10 kg or children up to about 18 months old weighing up to 13 kg is a child safety seat which is fastened in the opposite direction of travel fig 125 Child seats in which the child is facing with its back towards the direction of travel should not be used on the front passenger seat when the vehicle is fitted with a front passenger airbag gt page 126 Use of child safety seats on the front passenger seat EA Transporting children safely Z WARNING Itis essential to always switch off the front passenger airbag at a specialist garage or with the switch for fro
113. 51 Underbody protection seeeeeeeees 152 Windscreen washer nozzles 6s0s000 52 Unidirectional tyres ccce 173 Windscreen Wiper and Washer System anldck Warning light cece eee eee 29 Central locking system cc eceev eee 36 Windshield washer fluid reservoir 168 URIOEKING avincccamancud an vaeundas die badd 34 35 Warning light eererrererrererrerren 23 Remote control eo 39 Windshield washer system ia 168 Uphill Start ASS St ccc ccc cceccceeeeuunnnnns 137 Windshield wiper Seen eet 52 WINTER TYPOS g norii Ore urarii galerie nents 172 V Wiper blades Replacing the wiper blades 53 Vanity MION acd ctieeeewexmden ges mae da eaten an 51 Vehicle interior lighting X VersiON T wise teas a bane dew eda i naai ces 49 Version 2 oauan anana aaa aaa 50 ADE mesie o a iee tance a EE Ea A 133 Vehicle Keys wiaciciiaiende amar aawdian aver antag 33 Vehicle tool kit ic Pisin ten araeolonwatved ad ont 175 VISOL Sinipi ena i crate aii a DE a aaa i 51 W Warning lights iauntsaisedsas thetdedekme eas ae 25 Warning symbols 0 0 cece eee eee ees 25 Warning triangle cece cece eee 175 WASHING ses icd cas ticudenes gunkeomn dene iniii 149 with a high pressure cleaner 150 Washing the vehicle sceee eee ee 149 Washing vehicle by hand 0 005 150 Wax TreatMent siciesccavias cance s chao tans 150 WOIGKT erii sesrrei seerti eate ana NREN 197 Wheel
114. 9 If you wish to determine the average speed over a certain period of time you must erase the memory at the start of the new measurement by pressing the button 8 on the windshield wiper lever gt page 19 fig 19 A zero appears in the display for the first 100 m you drive after erasing the memory The indicated value will be updated every 5 seconds while you are driving m Current speed The current speed which is identical to the display of the speedometer is indicated on the display 3 gt page 15 fig 15 m oil temperature If the oil temperature is lower than 50 C or if a fault in the system for checking the oil temperature is present three lines are displayed instead of the oil temperature Wi Using the system Instruments and warning lights a Warning against excessive speeds This function enables you to set a speed limit and will notify you when this speed limit is exceeded Set the speed limit when the vehicle is stationary With switch gt page 19 fig 19 choose the menu point Warning against excessive speeds Press the button 8 to active the ability to set the speed limit value flashes Use the button to adjust the required speed limit e g to 50 km h Confirm the speed limit that was set with button or wait approx 5 seconds until the setting is saved automatically the value stops flashing This is how you can set the speed limit in 5 km h intervals Set the speed limit when
115. Adjust the mirror the front seat and the head restraint to match your body size mo Passive Safety Point out to your occupants that the head restraints must be adjusted to match their body size Protect the children in suitable child seats with correctly fastened seat belts page 125 Transporting children safely e Adopt the correct seated position gt page 110 Also inform your occupants to adopt the correct seated position Fasten the seat belt correctly Also inform your occupants to properly fasten the seat belts gt page 115 How are seat belts correctly fastened m What influences the driving safety The driving safety is primarily determined by the style of driving and the personal behaviour of all the occupants The driver is fully responsible for himself and his occupants If your driving safety is effected you place yourself and the oncoming traffic at risk Please refer to the following guidelines e Do not get distracted from concentrating on the traffic situation e g by your occupants or mobile phone calls Never drive when your driving ability is impaired e g through medication alcohol drugs Keep to the traffic regulations and the permissible speed limit e Adjust the driving speed at all times to the road condition as well as to the traffic and weather conditions Take regular breaks on long journeys at the latest every two hours E Correct seated position Corr
116. CHANGING ssiisiseeiirsinritsiiseiiieites 176 Spare wheel ooeec 176 Wheel bolls occirrercrreririgriireicenereaies 172 Solely ouune ee aena AeA 179 slackening and tightening 178 Wheel bolts lock sssi uiiu sainia sudaa daa 179 Wheel trim oo ccc cece eee eens 169 177 WheelSitcioudcurtvunt reader dmntgugia ek sand 169 Using the system Driving Tips General Maintenance Technical data Skoda Auto pursues a policy of constant product and model development We trust that you will understand that changes to models in terms of shape equipment and engineering may be introduced at any time The information about scope of delivery appearance performances dimensions weight fuel consumption stand ards and functions of the vehicle is only correct at the time of publication Certain items of equipment might only be installed later on information given by the local Skoda Service Partner or only envisaged for particular markets It is therefore not possible for legal claims to be made based on the data illustrations and descriptions contained in this Owner s Manual Reprinting reproduction or translation either in whole or in part is not permitted without the written consent of Skoda Auto Skoda Auto expressly reserves all rights relating to copyright laws We reserve the right to make changes to this document Issued by KODA AUTO a s KODA AUTO a s 2071 Minimisation of fuel consumption and CO emissions Recycla
117. DDK VW 503 00 VW 504 00 28 1 4 ltr 63 kW EU5 VW 503 00 VW 504 00 3 2 1 4 Itr 132 kW TSI EUS VW 504 00 3 6 1 2 Itr 63 kW TSI EU5 VW 504 00 3 6 1 2 ltr 77 kW TSI EU5 VW 504 00 3 6 a Oil capacity with oil filter change Inspect oil level when filling do not fill up too much The oil level must be between the markings page 160 Check engine oil level Diesel engines Specification Content 1 2 Itr 55 kW TDI CR DPF EU5 VW 507 00 4 3 1 6 Itr 55 kW TDI CR DPF EU5 VW 507 00 4 3 1 6 Itr 66 kW TDI CR DPF EUS VW 507 00 4 3 1 6 Itr 77 kW TDI CR DPF EU5 VW 507 00 4 3 Engine oil specifications for vehicles with fixed service intervals QG2 Petrol engines Specification Content 1 2 Itr 44 kW EU5 VW 501 01 VW 502 00 2 8 1 2 1 51 kW EU5 EU2 DDK VW 501 01 VW 502 00 2 8 1 4 Itr 63 kW EU5 VW 501 01 VW 502 00 32 1 6 Itr 77 kW EU4 EU2 DDK VW 501 01 VW 502 00 36 1 4 Itr 132 kW TSI EU5 VW 502 00 3 6 1 2 Itr 63 kW TSI EU5 VW 502 00 3 6 1 2 ltr 77 kW TSI EU5 VW 502 00 3 6 a il capacity with oil filter change Inspect oil level when filling do not fill up too much The oil level must be between the markings gt page 160 Check engine oil level If the oils specified above are not available oils according to ACEA A2 or ACEA A3 can be used once for refilling Diesel engines Specification Content 1 2 Itr 55 kW TDI CR DPF EU5 VW 507 00 43 1 6 Itr 55 kW TDI CR DPF EU5 VW 507 00 43 1
118. ES Z WARNING First ensure that it is not too high for the traffic conditions which exist at that moment before resuming the stored speed m Switching off the cruise control system completely Press the switch A gt page 91 fig 99 to the right into position OFF m START STOP er pe S Fig 100 Centre console Button for the N START STOP system The START STOP system helps you to save fuel while at the same time reducing exhaust pollutants and CO emissions The system is automatically activated each time the ignition is switched on The system switches the engine off automatically when the vehicle comes to a standstill such as while waiting at a traffic light Information regarding the current state of the START STOP system is indicated in the display of the instrument cluster Automatic engine shut down stop phase Bring the vehicle to a stop apply the handbrake if necessary Take the vehicle out of gear Release the clutch pedal Automatic engine start start phase Depress the clutch pedal gt Activating and deactivating the START STOP system You can deactivate and reactivate the START STOP system by pressing the button page 92 fig 100 If the system is deactivated the warning light lights up in the button If the vehicle is in the stop phase when pressing the button the engine starts immediately The START STOP system involves complica
119. Ea e ae a Engine 1 2 1 51 kW EU5 EU2 DDK 203 Driving Tips IEEE CE AEE TTE 133 Engine Oll erereerreeernnere eneee 160 Engine 1 2 1 63 kW TSI EU5 oousi 204 COOLING SYSTE siipra niea 161 i gt Engine 1 2 I 77 kW TSI EU5 oisin 205 Intelligent Technology ce eee eens 133 Brake fluidi cistern rrieercuaaye ve ooopinnatels 164 Engine 14 63 KW EUS ioiii 206 Electronic stability programme ESP 133 Battery eee 164 Engine 1 6 I 77 kW EU4 EU2 DDK 2 2 66 207 Brak GS rers aa a a runneth 135 Windshield washer system eeeeeeeees 168 Engine 14 132 KW TSI EUS ioiii 208 Brake booster ssseerreereenrerrrene 136 Wheels and Tyres 0 ccs ece eee eee 169 Engine 1 2 1 55 kW TDI CR DPF EU5 209 Antilock Drage system ABS ieren 136 Wheels j a5ctiderunaadebepebnsananedd eaten 169 Engine 1 6 55 kW TDI CR EU5 o 210 al an ane oe ee Accessories changes and replacement of parts 174 Eig nee 1 66 kW TDI CR EU5 sees 211 e e ia General cccccccccccucecceccccevueenennvecs 174 Engine 1 6 77 kW TDI CR EU5 04 212 Electrohydraulic power steering 405 137 Tyre pressure monitoring system 005 138 Diesel particle filter diesel engine 139 Breakdown assistance 175 Index niori ai 213 Driving and the Environment 140 The first 1500 kilometres and then afterwards 140 Breakdown assistance
120. G Itis essential to always switch off the front passenger airbag at a specialist garage or with the switch for front passenger airbag when attaching in excep tional circumstances a child safety seat on the front passenger seat where the child is seated with its back facing in direction of travel gt page 123 e Please comply with any differing national legal regulations regarding the use of child safety seats e If this is not done a child seated on the front passenger seat may suffer severe or even fatal injuries if the front passenger airbag or airbags are deployed You should have the front passenger airbag or airbags reactivated just as soon as you no longer use a child safety seat on the front passenger seat E Child safety seats in Group 2 Fig 127 Child seat in Group 2 installed on the rear seat facing the direction of travel B5J 4027H For children up to about 7 years of age weighing between 15 and 25 kg the optimal solution is a child safety seat in combination with the three point seat belt fig 127 Z WARNING When transporting a child on the front passenger seat please comply with the appropriate national regulations regarding the use of child safety seats Switch off the front passenger airbag if necessary at a specialist garage or switch it off with the switch for front passenger airbag gt page 123 The shoulder part of the seat belt must run approximately across the middle of the shoulder
121. IESE ssivmieitatieeeanoadendaaien seen 155 Diesel engines Starting the engine c eee eee eee 88 Diesel particle filter 0 cece eee eee 139 Diesel particlulate filter Worning light eercreisecinenieriiarieiiiess 31 Digital ClOCK 2 ius cdicmnned ex wdaddawinnd on caus 18 Direction indicators cece eects 49 Warning IQHt eecrreiseiiies teirrirerisras 26 Display vitae cotebbiasihatiae EREE ES 22 DISplayS masiero rerien ds oo ae eiS 15 Door Child safety lock 0c cece eects 34 Warning light sisitiinaianidnenkihina utes 29 Driving economically cece eee eee 141 DIVING TIM Eien ate aaeain d anaa iaia 20 E EDL gininisprii rori aoea E R 133 Electric power operated window Operational faults aa 43 Electric sliding tilting roof eee eee 43 Electrical power windows 0 esse eee 41 Electrically adjustable rear mirror 55 Electronic Differential Lock 0 005 133 Warming lIQht sci cecctileaaieieneaetejeaien 30 Electronic immobiliser 0 cece eee eee 34 Electronic stability programme 133 Electronic stability programme ESP Warning light 0 0 cece cece eee 30 Emergency locking of the door 4 37 Engine StD airiran oan eee eee aaia 87 switching Off 1 0 0 0 cece e eee eee 88 Engine compartment Safety information cece eee 158 Engine electronics Warning light 0 cece eee eee 27 ENGine
122. Partner after replacing the light bulb m Turn signal light at the front Turn the socket 6 gt page 192 fig 169 or the socket 3 to the left and take it out together with the light bulb for the turn signal light Replace the defective light bulb Insert the lamp holder with light bulb into the headlight Secure the lamp holder by turning it to the right until it locks in place m Fig 172 Removing the light bulb for the Fuses and light bulbs Parking light at the front Remove the protective cap or 2 gt page 192 fig 169 Grasp the light bulb holder and pull it out of the headlight Replace the light bulb in the light bulb holder and re insert into the headlight m Daylight driving lights and fog lights B5J 7028H Fig 173 Front bumper Protective grille removing the fog light Switch the ignition and all lights off Grasp the grille at the points marked with the arrows fig 173 left and take it out Guide your hand into the opening in which the grille was located and press the spring bolt fig 173 right Take out the fog light Turn the socket A with the bulb for daylight driving light or the socket 8 with the bulb of the fog light to the left up to stop and take it out Replace the lamp insert the connector with the new lamp and turn to the right up to the stop For the installation first of all insert the fog light with the interlock to the side far
123. Prescribed fuel unleaded petrol min 95 RON Use unleaded petrol with the octane rating 95 RON If unleaded petrol with the octane rating 95 RON is not available you can use petrol with the octane rating 91 RON in an emergency You must continue driving at medium engine speeds and minimum engine load High engine revs or a greater engine load can cause major damage to the engine Refuel as soon as possible with petrol of the prescribed octane number Even in case of necessity you must not use petrol of a lower octane rating than 91 RON otherwise the engine can be severely damaged You can find further information on refuelling gt page 156 Refuelling Unleaded petrol with higher octane number You can make unlimited use of unleaded petrol which has a higher octane number than the one prescribed In vehicles with prescribed unleaded petrol 95 91 RON the use of petrol with a higher octane number than 95 RON does not result in a noticeable power increase or a lower fuel consumption On vehicles with prescribed unleaded petrol min 95 RON the use of petrol with a higher octane number than 95 RON does not result in a power increase or a lower fuel consumption Prescribed fuel unleaded petrol 98 95 RON Use unleaded petrol with the octane rating 98 RON You can also use unleaded petrol 95 RON but this leads to a slight loss in performance If unleaded petrol with the octane rating 98 RON or 95 RON is not available you can
124. R automatic gearbox Turn the control dial for headlamp beam adjustment from the position 3 to the position gt page 48 The adaptation of the halogen projector headlights must be performed as follows gt page 145 m Fog lights 0 9 G Lo Switching on fog lights Fig 36 Dash panel Light switch First of all turn the light switch into position 20 or Z0 fig 36 Pull the light switch out to the first detent Q The warning light 0 lights up in the instrument cluster when the fog lights are switched on gt page 25 E Using the system Lights and Visibility az Fog lights with the function CORNER The fog lights with the function CORNER are designed for a better illumination of the surrounding area near the vehicle when corning parking etc The fog lights with the function CORNER are adjusted according to the steering angle or after switching on the turn signal light gt in the following circumstances the vehicle is stationary and the engine is running or it moves with a speed of maximum 40 km h the daylight driving lights are not switched on e Low beam switched on A fault in the system of the fog lights with the function CORNER is confirmed by the warning light lighting up a Note If the fog lights are switched on the function CORNER is not active m Rear fog light Switching on the rear fog light First of all turn the light switch into positio
125. SIMPLY CLEVER SKODA SKODA Fabia OWNER S MANUAL Introduction You have opted for a Skoda our sincere thanks for your confidence in us Your new Skoda offers you a vehicle featuring the most modern engineering and a wide range of equipment which you will undoubtedly wish to use to the full during your daily motoring That is why we recommend that you read this Owner s Manual attentively to enable you to become familiar with your car and all that it offers as quickly as possible Please do not hesitate to contact your specialist garage or importer should you have any further questions or any problems regarding your vehicle which may arise He will be ready at any time to receive your questions suggestions and criticisms National legal provisions which deviate from the information contained in these operating instructions take precedence over the information contained in the operating instructions We wish you much pleasure with your Skoda and pleasant motoring at all times Your Skoda Auto Introduction On board literature The on board literature for your vehicle consists of this Owner s Manual as well as a Service schedule and a Help on the road There can also be other additional operating manuals and instructions on board e g an operating manual for the radio depending on the vehicle model and equipment If one of the publications listed above is missing please contact a specialist garage immediately
126. Tether system only to the points provided for this purpose fig 130 Onno account should you equip your vehicle e g mount screws or other anchorage points Transporting children safely ia Z WARNING continued e Pay attention to the important safety information regarding the use of child seats gt page 125 a Note Store the remaining part of the belt for the Top Tether system in a textile pocket which is located at the child seat m Using the system Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical data FA Transporting children safely Driving Tips Intelligent Technology Electronic stability programme ESP General General The ESP aids you in maintaining control of your vehicle in situations in which the vehicle is driving at its dynamic limits such as entering a curve fast The risk of skid ding is reduced and your car thus offers greater driving stability depending on the conditions of the road surface The system operates at all speeds The following systems are integrated into the electronic stability programme e Electronic Differential Lock EDL Traction control system TCS Antilock brake system ABS Brake Assist Uphill Start Assist Operating principle The ESP switches on automatically when the engine is started and then conducts a self test The ESP control unit processes data from the individual systems It also processes additional measurement
127. The following security areas of the locked vehicle are monitored Bonnet Boot lid Doors Ignition lock Vehicle inclination gt page 40 Vehicle interior page 40 A drop in voltage of the on board power supply Socket of the factory fitted towing device An alarm is immediately triggered if either of the two battery terminals is discon nected while the anti theft alarm system is activated How is the alarm switched off You switch the alarm off if you unlock the vehicle with the radio remote control or if you switch the ignition on Note The working life of the alarm siren is 5 years More detailed information is avail able by a specialist garage Before leaving the car check that all the doors windows and the electric sliding tilting roof are properly closed in order to ensure that the anti theft alarm system is fully operational e Coding of the radio remote control and the receiver unit precludes the use of the radio remote control from other vehicles m Interior monitor and towing protection monitoring The interior monitor and the towing protection monitoring detect movements inside the vehicle interior and then trigger the alarm Fig 31 Button for interior monitor and towing protection monitoring The interior monitor and the towing protection monitoring are operated with the button lt You can switch the interior monitor and the towing protection moni toring off if there is a possibility th
128. air and cooling system which provides optimal comfort for the occupants of the car The Climatronic maintains a constant temperature fully automatically once it has been set This is achieved by automatically varying the temperature of the outflowing air the blower stages and the air distribution The system also takes into account sunlight which eliminates the need to alter the settings manually The automatic mode page 84 ensures maximum wellbeing of the occupants at all times of the year Using the system Heating and air conditioning system fas Description of Climatronic system The cooling operates only if the following conditions are met engine running e outside temperature above approx 2 C switched on The AC compressor is switched off at a high coolant temperature in order to provide cooling at a high load of the engine Recommended setting for all periods of the year Set the desired temperature we recommend 22 C 72 F Press the button gt fig 93 e Move the air outlet vents 3 and 4 so that the air flow is directed slightly upwards Switching over between degrees Celsius and degrees Fahrenheit Press and hold the buttons and AC gt fig 93 at the same time The informa tion in the desired temperature measuring unit appears in the display a Note We recommend you have a specialist garage clean the Climatronic once every year m Overview of the control elements CLIMATRONIC
129. airbag in the event of an accident Check that the steering wheel is aligned to the chest 86 Starting off and Driving Z WARNING continued When driving hold the steering wheel with both hands firmly on the outer edge in the 9 o clock and 3 o clock position Never hold the steering wheel firmly in the 12 o clock position or in another way e g in the middle of the steering wheel or at the inner steering wheel edge In such cases injuries to the arms the hands and the head can occur when the driver airbag is deployed m Ignition lock Fig 95 Ignition lock positions Petrol engines Q ignition switched off engine off the steering can be locked ignition switched on start engine Diesel engines Q interruption of fuel supply ignition switched off engine off the steering can be locked heating glow plugs on ignition switched on e You should not switch on any major electrical components during the heating period otherwise the vehicle battery will be drained unnecessarily start engine Applies to all models Position Q To lock the steering with the ignition key withdrawn turn the steering wheel until the steering locking pin is heard to engage You should always lock the steering as a general rule if you leave your vehicle This acts as a deterrent against possible theft of your vehicle gt A Position 2 Move the steering wheel back and forward a little if the ign
130. al and a maximum transmission power of up to 10 watts It is essential that you inform a specialist garage about the possibilites to assemble and operate mobile phones and two way radio sets which have a power output of more than 10 W They will inform you which technical possibilities exist for retrofit ting mobile phones When using a mobile phone inside the vehicle which is not inserted into the phone adapter and thus has no connection to the external aerial the electromagnetic radiation can exceed the current limit value If a suitable adapter is available for your mobile phone use your mobile phone exclusively in the adapter so that the radia tion in the vehicle drops to a minimum This also improves the quality of the connec tion Operation of mobile phones or two way radio systems may interfere with func tioning of the electronic systems of your vehicle The reasons for this may be no external aerial external aerial incorrectly installed transmission power greater than 10 watts Z WARNING Ifa mobile phone or a two way radio system is operated in the vehicle without using a external aerial or an external aerial which has been incorrectly installed this can increase the strength of the electromagnetic field in the inte rior of the vehicle Z N WARNING continued Please concentrate fully at all times on your driving e You must not install two way radio systems mobile phones or mounts
131. al ignition key e Place the gearshift lever into neutral or place the selector lever to the position P or N in the case of an automatic gearbox and put on the handbrake firmly before starting the engine The clutch pedal should be fully depressed when starting the engine which means that the starter only has to crank the engine e Let go of the key as soon as the engine starts otherwise there may be damage to the starter The engine running noises may louder at first be louder for a short time after starting the cold engine until oil pressure can be built up in the hydraulic valve clear ance compensation This is quite normal and is not an operating problem If the engine does not start You can use the battery of another vehicle as a jump start aid page 182 Z WARNING Never run the engine in non ventilated or enclosed areas The exhaust gases of the engine contain besides the odorless and colourless carbon monoxide a poisonous gas hazard Carbon monoxide can cause unconsciousness and death Never leave your vehicle unattended with the engine running Caution e The starter may only be operated ignition key position G if the engine is not running If the starter is immediately operated after switching off the engine the starter or the engine can be damaged e Avoid high engine revolutions full throttle and high engine loads as long as the engine has not yet reached its normal operating temperature r
132. alled numbers a Received calls Voice mailbox In the menu Voice mailbox it is possible to set the number of the voice mailbox and then dial the number Bluetooth In the menu Bluetooth you can select the following menu points a User the overview of the stored users a New user Search for new telephones which are in the reception range 9 In vehicles equipped with the Amundsen radio navigation system this function can be reached via the menu on the radio navigation system see the Amundsen Owner s manual 10 This function is not available in vehicles equipped with the Amundsen radio navigation sys tem a Visibility Switching on the visibility of the telephone unit for other devices Media player a Active device a Paired devices a Search a Phone name the possibility to change the name of the telephone unit pre set SKODA_BT Settings In the menu Settings you can select the following menu points Phone book Update a List a Surname a First name a Ringtone Back Return in the basic menu of the telephone m Voice control Dialogue The period in which the telephone system is ready to receive voice commands and carry out the voice commands is called DIALOGUE The system gives audible feed back and guides you if necessary through the relevant functions Optimum understanding of the voice commands depends on the following factors Speak with a normal tone of voice without intonation or
133. an only withdraw the ignition key after switching off the ignition if the selector lever is in position P If the ignition key is withdrawn the selector lever is blocked in position P m Kickdown function The kickdown function provides you with maximum acceleration power Fully depressing the accelerator pedal allows the kickdown function to be activated in the desired driving program This function has precedence over the driving programme and serves for maximum acceleration of the vehicle when exploiting the maximum power potential of the engine without taking into account the current selector lever position D S or Tiptronic The gearbox shifts down to one or several gears in line with the driving state and the vehicle accelerates The gearbox does not shift up into the highest gear until the engine has reached its maximum revolutions for this gear range Z WARNING Please note that using the kickdown function can result in the driven wheels spinning on a smooth or slippery road surface risk of skidding m Dynamic shift programme The automatic gearbox of your vehicle is controlled electronically Shifting up and down through the gears is performed automatically on the basis of pre defined driving programmes Adopting a moderate style of driving will cause the gearbox to select the most economical driving programme Shifting up into a higher gear as soon as possible and shifting down as late as possible will have a fav
134. and warms it as required Fig 91 Heating Control elements Setting temperature Turn the control dial A gt fig 91 to the right in order to increase the tempera ture Turn the control dial A to the left in order to increase the temperature Controlling blower Turn the blower switch 8 into one of the positions 1 to 4 in order to switch the blower on Turn the blower switch B into position O in order to switch the blower off Ifyou wish to shut off the fresh air supply use the button Q recirculated air mode gt page 80 Control for air distribution You can adjust the direction of the air flow using the air distribution control gt page 78 Rear window heater Press button 2 Further information gt page 51 Rear window heater gt Heating and air conditioning system 79 All controls apart from the control dial B can be set to any desired intermediate a position Note The blower should aways be on to prevent the windows from misting up If the air distribution is positioned towards the windows the total amount of air is used to defrost the windows and thus no air will be fed to the footwell This can lead to restriction of the heating comfort m Set heating Recommended basic settings of heating controls for Setting of the control dial Set up Button Air outlet vents 4 Defrosting the windscreen and side To the right up to the Open and align with the side
135. and fit snugly against the chest It must on no account run across the neck The lap part of the seat belt must run across the pelvis and fits snugly Transporting children safely 29 ZN WARNING continued it must not run over the belly Tighten the belt webbing over your hip if neces sary Please comply with any differing national legal regulations regarding the use of child safety seats m Child safety seats in Group 3 Fig 128 Child seat in Group 3 installed on the rear seat facing the direction of travel For children of about 7 years of age weighing between 22 and 36 kg and of a height of less than 150 cm the optimal solution is a child safety seat seat bolster in combination with the three point seat belt gt fig 128 Children who are more than 1 50 m tall or who weigh more than 36 kg can use normal seat belts without a seat bolster Z WARNING When transporting a child on the front passenger seat please comply with the appropriate national regulations regarding the use of child safety seats Switch off the front passenger airbag if necessary at a specialist garage or switch it off with the switch for front passenger airbag gt page 123 The shoulder part of the seat belt must run approximately across the middle of the shoulder and fit snugly against the chest It must on no account run across the neck The lap part of the seat belt must run across the pelvis and fits snugly it must
136. are equipped with a glow plug system the preglow period being controlled automatically in line with the coolant temperature and outside tempera ture The preglow indicator light V0 comes on after the ignition has been switched on You should not switch on any major electrical components during the heating period otherwise the vehicle battery will be drained unnecessarily e You should start the engine immediately after the glow plug warning light 00 has gone out e The glow plug warning light will come on for about one second if the engine is at anormal operating temperature or if the outside temperature is above 5 C This means that you can start the engine right away Interrupt the attempt at starting after 10 seconds if the engine does not start right awayand wait for about 30 seconds before repeating the attempt Itis possible that the fuse on the diesel preglow system is defect if the engine still does not start Check the fuse and replace it if necessary gt page 186 Contact the nearest specialist garage to obtain professional assistance Starting the engine after fuel tank has run dry It may take longer than normal to start the engine after refuelling if the fuel tank has run completely dry up to one minute This is because the fuel system must first of all be filled while the attempting to start the engine m Switching off the engine The engine can be switched off by turning the ignition key into position
137. articular attention to the information provided by the manu facturer of the child safety seat regarding correct routing of the belt Seat belts which are not correctly adjusted can themselves cause injuries even in minor accidents Safety belts must be checked to ensure that they are running properly One should also ensure that the belt is not damaged by sharp edged fittings It is essential to always switch off the front passenger airbag when attaching a child safety seat to the front passenger seat where the child is seated with its back facing in direction of travel page 123 If this is not done there is a risk of the child suffering severe or even fatal injuries if the front passenger airbag is deployed When transporting a child on the front passenger seat please comply with the appropriate national regulations regarding the use of child safety seats m Use of child safety seats on the front passenger seat Child safety seats should always be attached to the rear seats Ay aT y the body on the front passenger side We recommend for safety reasons that you always mount a child restraint systems on the rear seats whenever possible If you still decide however to use a child safety seat on the front passenger seat then you must pay attention to the following warnings in connection with the use of the airbag system on the front passenger seat 126 Transporting children safely Z WARNING Warnin
138. as been switched on or when starting the engine The warning light goes out after an automatic check sequence has been completed A fault in the ABS The system is not functioning properly if the ABS warning light does not go out within a few seconds after switching on the ignition does not light up at all or lights up while driving The vehicle will only be braked by the normal brake system Visit a specialist garage immediately and adjust your style of driving appropriately as you will not know how great the damage is Further information about ABS page 136 Antilock brake system ABS A fault in the entire brake system If the ABS warning light comes on together with the brake system warning light there is a fault not only in the ABS but also in another part of the brake system gt Z WARNING e Ifthe brake system warning light comes on together with the ABS warning light stop the vehicle immediately and check the brake fluid level in the reservoir gt page 164 Brake fluid If the fluid level has dropped below the MIN marking do not drive any further risk of accident Contact a Skoda dealer to obtain professional assistance Pay attention to the following instructions gt page 158 Working in the engine compartment before checking the brake fluid level and opening the bonnet e ifthe brake fluid is at the correct level the ABS control function has failed The rear wheels may then block
139. assive Safety Basic information Correct seated positi Seat belts Why seat belts DY leak tsfeasannliSiaen pain Sangeet ON rarer ern a The physical principle of a frontal collision Important safety information regarding the use of seat belts scicacwniaden How are seat belts correctly fastened Belt tensioner Airbag system Description of the airbag system Front airbags Side airbags Head airbags Deactivating airbags Contents poe 89 89 90 91 92 95 95 101 101 102 106 108 108 109 109 109 T10 113 113 113 114 115 TI6 117 117 118 120 121 123 al Contents Transporting children safely 0 5 125 FUCL ie cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenees 155 Identification details cceeeeeeeee ee ees 198 What you should know about transporting children 125 PETOl scisiicacaniaxiisonddecasaapudiaiend amends 155 Fuel consumption according to the ECE standards and Child S660 ciccusshcseeskceenisevne i a 127 Diesel acivetenccieuins acer omenGe ENE i 155 EU guidelines o 198 Attaching a child seat using the ISOFIX system 130 Refuelling ccccccceeeee cesses eerren 156 DIMENSIONS 1 ieee eee 199 Attaching child seat using the Top Tether system 130 Inspecting and Replenishing 6 158 Engine oil specifications eee 200 Engine compartment o s cece eens 158 Engine VEAS
140. at high engine loads and high outside temperatures This is not critical provided the warning symbol in the instrument cluster does not flash If the symbol in the instrument cluster flashes it means that either the coolant temperature is too high or the coolant level is too low Please refer to the following guidelines page 28 Coolant temperature coolant quantity Z WARNING Pay attention to the warning notes gt page 158 Working in the engine compartment before opening the bonnet and inspecting the coolant level Caution Additional headlights and other attached components in front of the fresh air inlet impair the cooling efficiency of the coolant There is then a risk of the engine over heating at high outside temperatures and high engine loads m Fuel gauge The fuel gauge page 15 fig 15 only operates when the ignition is switched on The fuel tank has a capacity of about 45 litres The warning symbol Fh in the instru ment cluster lights up when the pointer reaches the reserve marking There are now about 7 litres of fuel remaining in the tank This symbol is a reminder for you that you must refuel The following is displayed in the information display Please refuel An audible signal sounds as an additional warning signal On some vehicles the fuel gauge is shown in the display of the instrument cluster Caution Never run the fuel tank completely empty An irregular supply
141. at movements from e g children or animals inside the vehicle interior or if the vehicle must be transported e g by train or ship or towed might trigger the alarm Switch off the interior monitor and towing protection monitoring Switch off the ignition Open the driver door Press the button lt gt on the driver door gt page 40 fig 31 Lock the vehicle within 30 seconds The interior monitor and the towing protec tion monitoring are switched off The interior monitor and the towing protection monitoring are switched on again automatically the next time the car is locked a Note e You can switch the interior monitor and the towing protection monitoring off if there is a possibility that movements from e g children or animals inside the vehicle interior or if the vehicle must be transported e g by train or ship or towed might trigger the alarm e You can also switch off the interior monitor and the towing protection moni toring by deactivating the safe securing system gt page 35 When the ignition key is removed or a door is opened the symbol in the button lights up red e Lighting up of the symbol in the button does not confirm that the interior monitor and the towing protection monitoring are switched on m Electrical power windows Buttons for electrical power windows B5J 7006H Fig 32 Buttons on the driver s door Buttons on the rear doors Using the system Unlocking and locking
142. ated position he is exposed to life threatening injuries in case he is hit by a deployed airbag Before setting off please adopt the correct seated position and do not change this seated position while the car is moving Also advise your occupants to adopt the correct seated position and not to change this seated position while the car is moving m Seat belts Why seat belts Fig 110 Driver wearing seat belt It is a proven fact that seat belts offer good protection in accidents fig 110 Thus wearing a seat belt is a legal requirement in most countries Seat belts which have been correctly fastened and adjusted hold the occupants of the car in the correct seated position fig 110 The seat belts reduce the kinetic energy to a considerable extent They also prevent uncontrolled movements which in turn may well result in severe injuries The occupants of a vehicle who have fastened and correctly adjusted their seat belt profit to a major extent from the fact that the kinetic energy is optimally absorbed by the seat belts The structure of the front end of the vehicle and other passive safety measures such as the airbag system also contribute to reducing the kinetic energy The energy produced is thus absorbed and there is less risk of injury Accident statistics prove that seat belts which are fastened and properly adjusted reduce the risk of an injury and enhance the chance of survival in a major accident gt page 1
143. be updated every 5 seconds while you are driving a Note The amount of fuel consumed will not be indicated m Range The estimated range in kilometres is shown on the display It indicates the distance you can still drive with your vehicle based on the present level of fuel in the tank for the same style of driving The readout is shown in steps of 10 km After lighting up of the indicator light for the fuel reserve the display is shown in steps of 5 km The fuel consumption for the last 50 km is taken as a basis for calculating the range If you drive in a more economical manner from this moment on the range will be increased accordingly If the memory is set to zero after disconnecting the battery the fuel consumption of 10 Itr 100 km is calculated for the range afterwards the value is adapted accord ingly to the style of driving m Distance driven The distance driven since the memory was last erased appears in the display gt page 19 If you wish to calculate the distance driven as of a particular time you must erase the memory at this moment in time by pressing the button B on the windshield wiper lever page 19 fig 19 The maximum distance indicated in both memories is 1999 km or in vehicles with information display it is 9 999 km The indicator is set back to null if this period is exceeded E Average speed The average speed since the memory was last erased is shown in the display in km hour gt page 1
144. between service intervals if you tow a trailer frequently The handbrake on the towing vehicle must be put on when coupling and decou pling the trailer m 148 Towing a trailer Driving Tips The coolant temperature can be reduced by switching on the heating Any increase in the cooling effect of the coolant fan through shifting down a gear Do not as far as possible drive with your vehicle unladen and the trailer laden and increasing the engine speed is not possible since the fan speed is independent Do not make full use of the legal maximum speeds This applies in particular to of the engine speed One should also not drop a gear for this reason when towing a downhill sections trailer as long as the engine can manage the slope without any drop in speed m Apply the brakes in good time Keep a check on the coolant temperature gauge if the outside temperature is high Distribution of weight The distribution of the weight is very poor if your vehicle is unladen and the trailer is laden Maintain a particularly low speed if you cannot avoid driving with this combination Driving speed Do not drive faster than 80 km h for safety reasons This also applies for countries in which higher speeds are allowed The fact that the driving stability of the vehicle trailer combination reduces with increasing speed means that the legally allowed speed should not be used when there are unfavourable road weather or wind conditions par
145. bility Start stop system All models currently in production homologized Recovery in comformity with the requirements for recyclability Indication of recommended gear EU Directive 2005 64 EC Use of recyclable environmentally friendly materials Weight reduction Use of recycled materials with the parameters of the Optimisation of high strength panels reduction DEN material preferred of thickness in panels and other materials Labelling of materials for the purpose of making sorting Replacement of spare wheel with tyre repair kit E Use of energy saving electromechanical steering instead of hydraulic type Optimisation of efficiency of generators Optimisation of operating consumption and electrical current consumption Reduction of energy consumption Optimisation of aerodynamic and rolling resistance Additional aerodynamic spoilers Additional covers at rack CD covers Optimised cooling input grid additional seal Reduction by 15 mm with frame Ro Wi tyres wheels with low rolling resistance A Sp realised in the Greenline 2 series How you can contribute to a cleaner environment The fuel consumption of your Skoda and thus the level of pollutants contained in the exhaust is also determined by how you drive The noise level and wear and tear are also influenced by how you personally handle your vehicle This Owner s Manual tells you how to drive your Skoda to
146. ble under certain special accident situations that the front as well as the side airbags and head airbags are deployed simultaneously ne Airbag system The airbags are not deployed in the case of minor frontal and side collisions rear end collisions tilting of the vehicle and vehicle rollover Deployment factors It is not possible to state globally which deployment conditions apply to the airbag system in every situation as the circumstances which exist in the case of accidents vary greatly An important role in this case for example is played by factors such as the type of object against which the vehicle impacts hard soft the angle of impact the vehicle speed etc A decisive factor for the deployment of the airbags is the deceleration which occurs during a collision The control unit analyses the nature of the collision and activates the relevant restraint system If the vehicle deceleration which occurs and is meas ured during the collision remains below the prescribed reference values specified in the control unit the airbags are not deployed although the vehicle may well suffer severe damage to the bodywork as a consequence of the accident The airbags are not deployed if ignition is switched off a minor frontal collision a minor side collision a rear end collision Rollover of the vehicle Note A grey white or red non harmful gas is released when airbag is inflated This is perfectly normal and is
147. bserve the warning notes gt page 158 Working in the engine compartment before working in the engine compartment Caution Onno account should you add radiator antifreeze or other additives to the wind screen washer fluid e ifthe vehicle is fitted with a headlight cleaning system you should only add cleaning products which do not attack the polycarbonate coating of the headlights to the windscreen washer fluid Please contact an authorised Skoda service partner who will help you choose a suitable cleaning agent a Note Do not take the filter out of the windscreen wash container when filling it up again with liquid otherwise dirt can get into the liquid transportation system and can lead to faults in operation of the windscreen wash system m Wheels and Tyres Wheels General information e New tyres do not have optimal adhesion immediately from first use It is neces sary to drive the initial 500 km at moderate speed with a cautious driving style You will also profit from longer tyre life e The tread depth of new tyres may differ because of design features and the configuration of the tread depending on the type of tyre and the manufacturer Drive over curbs on the side of the road and other such obstacles slowly and where possible at a right angle in order to avoid damage to tyres and wheel trims Werecommend you regularly check tyres and rims for damage punctures cracks buckling deformations etc
148. by turning the vehicle key to the right and withdraw the key Press the fuel tank flap closed Fig 10 Buttons on the driver s door Further information page 156 Refuelling m Button for the power window in the driver s door Bonnet remote release Button for the power window in the front passenger s door Button for the power window at the rear right door Button for the power window at the rear left door Safety switch Further information page 41 Buttons for electrical power windows m Refuelling Fig 12 Release lever engine compart ment lid Pull the unlocking lever below the dash panel on the left hand side fig 12 y Further information gt page 158 Bonnet remote release m Ay N DN s a N B5J 5001H Fig 11 Right rear side of the vehicle Fuel filler flap fuel filler flap with cap unscrewed Opening the fuel filler cap Open the fuel filler flap with the hand fig 11 left Using the system Quick Reference Guide Opening the bonnet Fig 13 Radiator grille Locking lever securing the bonnet with the bonnet support Pull on the locking lever fig 13 left the bonnet is then unlocked Take the bonnet support out of its holder and set it in the opening designed for it gt fig 13 right Further information page 158 Opening and closing the bonnet m Inspecting the engine oil level Fig 14 Dipstick Eng
149. c converter is mandatory Z WARNING In view of the high temperatures which may be produced in the catalytic converter one should always park a vehicle in such a way that the catalytic converter cannot come into contact with easily flammable materials below the vehicle a risk of fire Never use additional underbody protection or corrosion protection agents for the exhaust pipes catalytic converters or heat shields Such substances might ignite when driving risk of fire Caution On vehicles fitted with a catalytic converter never let the fuel tank run completely empty An irregular fuel supply can result in poor ignition or misfiring Unburnt fuel may get into the exhaust system and damage the catalytic converter e Filling the tank even only once with leaded petrol will result in the catalytic converter being destroyed e Ifyou detect misfiring a drop in performance or irregular engine running when driving reduce your speed immediately and have the vehicle inspected by the nearest specialist garage The symptoms described may be caused by a fault in the ignition system Unburnt fuel may get into the exhaust system and damage the catalytic converter Se For the sake of the environment Even if the exhaust system is operating properly a sulphur like exhaust odour may be produced under certain operating conditions of the engine This depends on the sulphur content of the fuel It is often sufficient to refuel
150. ch is not standing on a paved road Attach the tow rope or the tow bar only to the towing eyes provided for this purpose gt page 185 Front towing eye and gt page 185 Rear towing eye a Note Towing another vehicle requires a certain amount of practice Both drivers should be familiar with the particular points about towing a vehicle Unskilled drivers should not attempt to tow in another vehicle or to be towed in When towing pay attention the national legal regulations especially with respect to drawing attention to the towing vehicle and the vehicle being towed gt Breakdown assistance 85 Thetow rope must not be twisted as it may in certain circumstances result in the Rear towing eye front towing eye being unscrewed out of your vehicle m Front towing eye The towing eye is stored in the box for the vehicle tool kit Fig 162 Rear towing eye The rear towing eye is located below the rear bumper on the right fig 162 m BB 85J 7022H Fig 161 Front bumper Cover installing the towing eye Press on the left half of the cover at the point of the arrow fig 161 left Pull the cover out of the front bumper Screw in the towing eye by hand to the left up to the stop fig 161 right For tightening we recommend that you use for example the wheel wrench the lashing eye of another vehicle or a similar object which you can push through the eye In order to reinstall the cover af
151. ching the ignition on but only if a fault exists or the engine oil level is too low In this case have the engine inspected without delay by a specialist garage The following text will be displayed in the information display Oil sensor workshop Z WARNING e If you must stop for technical reasons then park the vehicle at a safe distance from the traffic and switch off the engine and switch on the hazard warning light system gt page 48 The red oil pressure light 7 is not an oil level indicator One should there fore check the oil level at regular intervals preferably after every refueling stop e Pay attention to the following instructions gt page 158 Working in the engine compartment before checking the coolant fluid level and opening the bonnet m Open door amp The warning light comes on if one or several doors are opened or if the boot lid is opened If one of the doors opens while driving the warning light lights amp up and an audible signal sounds The warning light comes on even when the ignition is switched off The warning light lights up for a maximum of 5 minutes In vehicles with an information display this warning light is replaced by a vehicle symbol page 23 m Windshield washer fluid level lt gt The warning light lt gt comes on when the ignition is switched on if there is insuffi cient fluid in the windshield washer system Top up with liquid page 168 The following t
152. ck the doors individually from the inside and open them by pulling the door opening lever e As long as one door is opened the vehicle cannot be locked in order to avoid inadvertently locking the key in the vehicle Inthe event of an accident in which the airbags are deployed the locked doors are automatically unlocked from the inside in order to enable rescuers to gain access to the vehicle Z WARNING The central locking system also operates if the ignition is switched off All the doors and the boot lid are locked Children should never be left unattended in the vehicle since it is difficult to provide assistance from the outside when the doors are locked Locked doors make it difficult for rescuers to get into the vehicle in an emergency hazard a Note The door opening lever and the buttons for the central locking system do not operate if the safe securing system is activated page 35 E Using the system Unlocking and locking a Emergency locking of the doors Fig 27 Emergency locking of the door B5J 4049F An emergency locking mechanism is located on the rear side of the doors which have no locking cylinder it is only visible after opening the door Locking Remove the panel a fig 27 Insert the key into the slot B and turn it into the horizontal position in the direction of the arrow mirror inverted on the right doors Re insert the panel After closing the door you can no lon
153. cles with divided rear seats Folding seats forwards Before folding the rear seats forwards you must adapt the position of the front seats in such a way that they are not damaged when the rear seats are folded forwards Pull up the seat cushion in direction of arrow a gt fig 54 and fold forwards in direction of arrow Unlock the seat backrest by pressing the securing knob and fold it forwards gt fig 54 on the right Pull the head restraint out of the seat backrest Thehead restraints can be inserted into the relevant holes of the folded forward seat cushions fig 55 Fold the seat backrests fully fowards Using the system Seats and Stowage so Move seats into the initial position Install the head restraint in the slightly lifted seat backrest Then push the seat backrest back into the upright position until the securing knob clicks into place check by pulling on the seat backrest Make sure that the red pin 8 is covered fig 54 on the right Move the seat cushion into its original position Z WARNING Ensure that the seat belts are not damaged when operating the seat back rests Under no circumstances must the rear seat belts be jammed by the folded back seat backrests e The belts and the belt locks must be in their original position after folding back the seat cushions and the seat backrests they must be ready to use e Pay attention that the seat backrest is co
154. compartment is foreseen for storing small objects of up to 8 kg in weight a Note If the variable loading floor is installed in the luggage compartment gt page 64 no flexible storage box can be installed m Clothes hooks The clothes hooks are located on the handle of the headliner above each of the rear doors Z WARNING e Ensure that any clothes hanging from the hooks do not impair your vision to the rear Use the hooks for hanging only light items of clothing and ensure that there are no heavy or sharp edged objects in the pockets e The maximum permissible load of the hooks is 2 kg e Do not use clothes hangers for hanging up items of clothing otherwise this will interfere with the protection offered by the head airbag m Heating and air conditioning system Introduction Description and information The heating effect is dependent upon the coolant temperature thus full heat output only occurs when the engine has reached its operating temperature If the cooling system is switched on the temperature and air humidity drops in the vehicle The wellbeing of the occupants of the car is enhanced as a result of this particularly at high outside temperatures and a high air humidity The system prevents the windows misting up during the cold season of the year It is possible to briefly activate recirculated air mode in order to enhance the cooling effect Air conditioning system gt page 83 Climatro
155. conditioning system o which can only be eliminated through considerable effort and expense replace ment of compressor Please refer to the information regarding the recirculated air mode for heating page 80 and or for air conditioning system page 83 or Climatronic gt page 85 e To ensure that the heating and air conditioning systems work properly do not block up the air outlet vents with any objects m Using the air conditioning system economically The compressor on the air conditioning system uses power from the engine when in cooling mode which will effect the fuel consumption It recommended to open the windows or the doors of a vehicle for which the interior has been strongly heated through the effect of direct sunlight in order to allow the heated air to escape The cooling system should not be switched on while travelling when the window is open The desired interior temperature can also be achieved without switching in the cooling system just by switching to fresh air mode D i gt For the sake of the environment When you economize on fuel you also reduce pollutant emissions m Operational problems If the cooling system does not operate at outside temperatures higher than 5 C there is a problem in the system The reasons for this may be e The fuse on the air conditioning system has blown Check the fuse replace it if necessary gt page 186 The cooling system has switched off automatically for a
156. consumption in Itr 100 km and CO in g km Urban 6 6 6 3 Non urban 4 4 4 3 Combination 5 2 5 1 8 5 CO emission combination 121 17 119 gt Weight in kg Permissible gross weight 1571 15419 1591 1546 Unloaden weight ready for work 1116 1136 1100 500 1100 450 Permissible trailer load trailer braked unbraked 1200 500 1200 450 a a The value corresponds to the status with Greentec package b The value corresponds to the version with tires featuring optimized rolling resistance Vehicles of category N1 d Uphills up to 12 e Uphills up to 8 Technical Data 205 Engine 1 2 77 kW TSI EU5 Output kW per rpm Max torque Nm per rpm Number of cylinders Displacement cm 7715000 175 1500 4100 4 1197 Performances FABIA M5 FABIA DQ7 COMBI M5 COMBI DQ7 Maximum speed km h 191 189 193 190 Acceleration 0 100 km h s 10 1 10 2 10 2 10 3 Fuel consumption in Itr 100 km and CO in g km Urban 6 8 6 3 7 0 6 8 6 3 7 0 Non urban 4 5 4 4 4 4 4 5 4 4 4 4 Combination 5 3 5 1 58 5 3 5 53 COz emission combination 124 117 124 124 117 124 Weight in kg Permissible gross weight 1585 15550 1619 1589 1605 1560 1639 1594 Unloaden weight ready for work 1130 1164 1150 1184 Permissible trailer load trailer braked unbraked 1200 500 1200 450 E a The value corresponds to the status with Greentec package b Vehicles of category N1 Technical data
157. continued e Please pay attention to the warning instructions relating to working in the engine compartment page 158 a Note There must not be any contact between the two vehicles otherwise current may flow as soon as the negative terminals are connected The discharged battery must be properly connected to the system of the vehicle e Switch off the car phone Heed the advice concerning the use of mobile phones in such a situation We recommend you buy jump start cables from a car battery specialist m Start engine Fig 159 Jump starting using the battery from another vehicle A flat vehicle battery B battery providing current B5J 6091H It is important to connect the jump start cables in the correct order Connecting positive terminals Attach one end 4 to the positive terminal gt fig 159 of the discharged battery Attach the other end 2 to the positive terminal of the battery supplying the power 8 Connecting negative terminal and engine block Attach one end G to the negative terminal of the battery supplying the power Breakdown assistance a83 Attach the other end to a solid metal part which is connected firmly to the engine block or to the engine block itself gt AN Starting engine Start the engine of the vehicle providing current and run the engine at idling speed Now start the engine of the vehicle with the discharged battery Interrupt the a
158. d take the cross rod out of the mount fig 67 Hold the cross rod in such a way that the luggage net partition can roll up slowly and without damage into the housing 8 Fold the rear seats back into its original position Z WARNING First check for yourself that the cross road is inserted into the mounts in the front position m Removing and installing the luggage net partition housing Fig 68 Rear seats Luggage net parti tion housing Removing Open the right rear door Fold the surfaces of the seats and seat backrests of the rear seats forward First the right then the left backrest Push the rear bulkhead a fig 68 in the direction of arrow Q and take it out of the mounts of the rear seat backrests on the right in the direction of arrow Installing Position the luggage net partition housing into the mounts in the rear seat backrests Push the luggage net partition housing in the opposite direction of arrow Q as far as the stop Fold the rear seats back into its original position m Using the system Seats and Stowage Bicycle holder in the luggage compartment Install cross member Fig 69 Install cross member Remove the luggage compartment cover gt page 64 if necessary we recom mend you remove the rear bulkhead gt page 67 Take the head restraints out of the rear seat backrests and fold the rear seats in order to extend the luggage compartment as desired
159. d in many cases is also one of the conditions for possible warranty claims The Service schedule contains Vehicle data Service intervals Overview of the service work Service proof Confirmation of mobility warranty only valid in certain countries important information on the warranty The confirmations of the carried out service work are one of the condi tions for possible warranty claims Please always present the Service schedule when you take your car to a specialist garage If the Service schedule is missing or worn please contact the specialist garage where your car is serviced regularly You will receive a duplicate in which the previously carried out service work are confirmed Help on the road Contains the most important telephone numbers in individual countries as well as the addresses and telephone numbers of Skoda importers Contents Layout of this Owner s Manual explanations 0 000 Using the system COCK DIE sisng isseire ieena ebd e eaa General VIEW scrrmaareoea dina berated an ni Quick Reference Guide o c Basic functions and important information Instruments and warning lights Overview of the instrument cluster Engine revolutions counter 0 sce eee Sp ed meter crisi ccriierrerisirvanaiame tarii Coolant temperature gauge cece eee FUCl GAUGE niccrunerdcdusaphpreteaeanase neues Counter for distanc
160. d objects in the pockets of the items of clothing car gt fig 120 The installation positions of the head airbags are each marked with Ensure that there are no excessive forces such as violent knocks kicks etc the AIRBAG logo impact on the backrests of the seats otherwise the system may be damaged The head airbag together with the three point seat belts and the side airbags The side airbags would not be deployed in such a case offers additional protection for the head and neck area of the occupants in the e Any seat or protective covers which you fit to the driver or front passenger event of a side collision of major severity gt in Important safety information on seats must only be of the type expressly authorized by Skoda Auto In view of the head airbag on page 122 the fact that the airbag inflates out of the backrest of the seat use of non approved seat or protective covers would considerably impair the protective function of the side airbag e Any damage to the original seat covers in the area of the side airbag module must be repaired without delay by your specialist garage You should therefore always fasten the seat belts not only because this is required by law but also for safety reasons and for your own protection gt page 113 Apart from their normal protective function a further task of the seat belts is to also hold the driver and the occupants in a correct seated position in the event of a side collision
161. data which are supplied by highly sensitive sensors the rotational velocity of the vehicle about its vertical axis the lateral acceleration of the vehicle the braking pressure and the steering angle The direction which the driver wishes to take is determined based on the steering angle and the speed of the vehicle and is constantly compared with the actual behaviour of the vehicle If differences exist such as the car beginning to skid the ESP will automatically brake the appropriate wheel The car is stabilised again by the forces which take effect when the wheel is braked Intervention into the brake system takes place primarily on the outer front wheel of a vehicle which tends to oversteer tendency for the rear of the vehicle to break away while occurs this is on the inner rear wheel of a vehicle which tends to under steer tendency to shift out of the curve This braking control cycle is accompanied by noises During an intervention of the system the warning light amp flashes quickly in the instrument cluster Driving Tips The ESP system cannot be switched off only the TCS system can be switched off by pressing the button gt page 134 fig 131 The warning light page 29 lights up if the TCS system is switched off The warning light 52 lights up permanently if there is a fault in the ESP system The fact that the ESP system operates together with the ABS means that the ESP warning light will also come on if the ABS
162. depress the accelerator when accelerating on uniformly slippery road surfaces such as ice and snow The driven wheels might still spin despite the EDL and affect the stability of the vehicle risk of an accident e You should always adapt your style of driving to the condition of road surface and to the traffic situation even when your vehicle is fitted with EDL The increased safety offered must not tempt you to take greater risks than other wise risk of an accident a Note e ifthe ABS or ASR or where applicable ESP indicator light lights up the EDI may have a fault Contact a specialist garage as soon as possible EA Intelligent Technology e Changes to vehicle e g on engine on the brakes on chassis or another combi nation of tyres and wheels can influence the function of the EDL gt page 174 Accessories changes and replacement of parts m Traction control system TCS The traction control system prevents the driven wheels from spin ning when accelerating Fig 131 TCS switch General The TCS makes it much easier and sometimes at all possible to start off accelerate and climb slopes when the conditions of the road surface are unfavourable Operating principle The TCS switches on automatically when the engine is started and then conducts a self test The system monitors the speeds of the driven wheels with the aid of the ABS sensors If the wheels are spinning the force transmitted to the road su
163. des you with data depending on the equipment installed in the vehicle relating to the radio mobile phone multi functional indicator radio navigation system the unit connected to the MDI input and the automatic gearbox Certain functions and operating conditions are always being checked on the vehicle when the ignition is switched on and also while driving Functional faults if required repair work and other information are indicated by red symbols page 23 and yellow symbols page 23 Lighting up of certain symbols is combined with an acoustic warning signal Information and texts giving warnings are also shown in the display gt page 25 The following information can be shown in the display depending on the equip ment installed on the vehicle Main menu gt page 22 ae luggage compartment door and bonnet ajar warn page zs Service Interval Display gt page 17 Selector lever position for an automatic gearbox gt page 96 Main menu Fig 20 Information display Control elements 4 B5J 6015H You can activate the Main menu by pressing the rocker switch a gt fig 20 for more than 1 second You can select individual menu points by means of the rocker switch A When the pushbutton B is briefly pressed the information you have selected is displayed You can select the following information depending on the equipment installed on the vehicle a MFD gt page 18 Audio a Navigation Phone pag
164. dirt on the wheels can also result in wheel imbalance This may show itself in the form of a wheel vibration which is transmitted to the steering wheel which in certain circumstances can cause premature wear of the steering This means it is necessary to remove the dirt m Underbody protection The underside of your vehicle is protected for life against chemical and mechanical influences One cannot however completely rule out damage to the protective layer when driving so we recommend that you inspect the protective layer on the underside of your vehicle and on the chassis at certain intervals this is best done at the begin ning and end of the winter and to touch up any damaged areas The authorised Skoda Service Partners have suitable spray products available as well as the necessary equipment and are familiar with the instructions for use Therefore we recommend you have such touch up work or additional corrosion protection measures carried out by an authorised Skoda service partner Z WARNING Never use additional underbody protection or corrosion protection agents for the exhaust pipes catalytic converters diesel particle filter or heat shields When the engine reaches its operating temperature these substances might ignite risk of fire m Protection of hollow spaces All the cavities of your vehicle which are at risk from corrosion are protected for life by a layer of protective wax applied in the fact
165. draulic power steering The power steering enables you to steer the vehicle with less physical force The steering characteristics can be changed by a specialist garage You will place great stresses on the power steering system if the steering is turned to full lock when the vehicle is stationary Turning the steering to full lock in sucha situation will be accompanied by noises It is still possible to fully steer the vehicle if the power steering fails or if the engine is not running vehicle being towed in The only difference is that greater physical effort is required It is possible that the hydraulic pump of the power steering will not run due to the low vehicle network voltage if the battery has gone flat and the engine must started with the help off jump leads This condition will be indicated by lighting up of the warning light The power steering operates again if the battery is charged to a specific range when engine is running It also operates again if the engine can be started with its own battery If there is a fault in the power steering the warning light lights up in the instrument cluster gt page 25 Z WARNING Contact your specialist garage if the power steering is defective oe Intelligent Technology Caution Never leave the steering wheel at full lock for more than 15 seconds when the engine is running risk of damaging the power steering m Tyre pressure monitoring system tion
166. driving on poor roads and lanes or when driving over kerbstones steep ramps etc you must pay particular attention to ensuring that any low slung parts of the vehicle such as spoiler and exhaust do not touch the ground and get damaged This particularly applies to models with a lowered suspension sport suspension and also when your vehicle is fully laden m Driving through bodies of water on roads Fig 137 Crossing bodies of water B5J 6099H In order to avoid damage to the vehicle when driving through bodies of water e g flooded roads observe the following Determine the depth of the water when driving through bodies of water The water can reach at the maximum the web on the lower sill of the vehicle fig 137 Drive no more than at walking speed At a higher speed a water wave can form in front of the vehicle which can cause water to penetrate into the air induction system of the engine or into other parts of the vehicle Never let the vehicle stand in the water never drive backwards and do not switch off the engine 146 Driving and the Environment Z WARNING e Driving through water mud sludge etc can reduce the braking power and extend the braking distance risk of accident Avoid sudden and severe braking manoeuvres immediately after driving through bodies of water e After driving through bodies of water the brakes must be cleaned and dried as soon as possible by intermittent braking Only apply th
167. dvertently swallowed coolant Inspecting and Replenishing 163 Caution Do not continue your journey if for some reason it is not possible under the condi tions prevailing to top up with coolant Switch the engine off and obtain profes sional assistance from a specialist garage otherwise it could lead to severe engine damage ee For the sake of the environment Do not re use coolant if it is necessary to drain the coolant in the system It should be collected and disposed of in compliance with environmental protection regulations m Radiator fan The radiator fan may switch on suddenly The radiator fan is driven by an electric motor and controlled according to the coolant temperature The radiator fan may continue running for up to 10 minutes after the engine has been switched off even if the ignition is also off It may also switch on suddenly after a certain time if the coolant temperature has risen because of an accumulation of heat or the warm engine compartment is heated up additionally by strong sunlight Z WARNING You must therefore be aware when working in the engine compartment that the fan may switch on suddenly risk of injury m General Maintenance EA Inspecting and Replenishing Brake fluid Inspecting the brake fluid level Fig 144 Engine compartment Brake fluid reservoir The brake fluid reservoir is located on the left of the engine compartment The brake fluid reservo
168. e 102 a Vehicle status gt page 23 a Settings gt page 24 The menu point Audio is only then displayed when the factory fitted car radio is switched on The menu point Navigation is only then displayed when the factory fitted radio navigation system is switched on a Note e f warning messages are shown in the information display gt page 23 these messages can be confirmed with the button 8 on the windshield wiper lever in order to call up the main menu e f you do not activate the information display at that moment the menu shifts to one level higher every 10 seconds The operation of the factory fitted radio or the navigation system is described in separate operating instructions to be found in the on board literature m Door luggage compartment door and bonnet ajar warning The door luggage compartment and bonnet ajar warning lights up if at least one door the luggage compartment or bonnet are not closed The symbol indicates which door is still open or whether the luggage compartment door or bonnet is not closed The symbol goes out as soon as the doors luggage compartment door and bonnet are completely closed A warning signal sounds if the car is driven at a speed of more than 6km hour and if the engine or the luggage compartment door is open E Auto Check Control Car state The Auto Check Control carries out a check of certain functions and vehicle compo nents The check is performed constantly when t
169. e air conditioning system E Ea Heating and air conditioning system Setting air conditioning system Recommended basic settings of the control elements of the air conditioning system for the respective operating modes Set up Defrost windscreen and side Desired tempera Setting of the control dial windows free from mist ture sora The fastest heating Te eee to 3 3 Comfortable heating Dee Spe ae Paola Nh Ai The fastest cooling To the ibe to the a ao go optimal cooling o ee o 1 20r3 2 Fresh air mode ventilation Lome pee tothe Desired position A Button Is activated automati Do not switch on b cally briefly switched on Switched off Do not switch on Switched off briefly switched on Activated Do not switch on Activated Do not switch on Switched off Air outlet vents 4 Open and align with the side window Opening Opening Opening Open and align to the roof Opening a We recommend you do not use this setting in countries with high humidity climates This can cause the window pane to cool rapidly and subsequent fogging from the outside b The indicator light in the button lights up after switching on the system if some of the conditions were not satisfied for operating the air conditioner It is also used to indicate the system s cooling readiness when all of the conditions have been met gt page 80 Description of the air conditioning system Note e Controls
170. e angle of the seat backrest Remove the pressure of the backrest do not lean on it pull the lever G towards the rear and set the desired angle of the seat backrest with the back After releasing the lever G the seat backrest will remain in the set position The driver s seat should be adjusted in such a way that the pedals can be fully pressed to the floor with slightly bent legs The seat backrest on the driver s seat should be adjusted in such a way that the upper point of the steering wheel can be easily reached with slightly bent arms Z WARNING e Only adjust the driver seat when the vehicle is stationary risk of injury Take care when adjusting the seat Adjusting the seat without care can lead to bruises or injuries e The seat backrests must not be angled too far back when driving otherwise this will affect proper operation of the seat belts and of the airbag system risk of injury m Head restraints B5J 7026H Fig 52 Head restraint Adjusting pulling out Best protection is achieved if the top edge of the head restraint is at the same level as the upper part of your head 58 Seats and Stowage Adjusting the height of a head restraint Grasp the side of the head restraint with both hands and push it in upward direc tion as desired fig 52 left Move the head restraint downwards if required by pressing and holding the safety button with one hand fig 52 right and by pressing
171. e boot lid when it is in the opened position There must be no object in the gap between the opened cover and the rear seat backrest Please ensure that the heating elements of the rear window heater are not damaged as a result of objects placed in this area a Note When opening the boot lid lift the luggage compartment cover risk that objects placed in this area can slip forward m Using the system Seats and Stowage CR Further positions of the luggage compartment cover You can use the luggage compartment cover behind the head restraints for storing light and soft items Fig 61 Luggage compartment cover in the lower position stowed behind the rear seats The luggage compartment cover can also be put into the lower position on the supporting elements fig 61 left The luggage compartment cover can also be stowed behind the rear seats fig 61 right Caution In this position the luggage compartment cover is designed for storing small objects of up to 2 5 kg in weight m 6a Seats and Stowage Foldable luggage compartment cover Combi Variable loading floor in the luggage compartment Combi Remove variable loading floor B5J 5007H Fig 62 Luggage compartment foldable luggage compartment cover removing foldable luggage compartment cover Pulling out Pull the foldable luggage compartment cover in direction of arrow Q as faras Fig 63 Luggage compartment Fold up variable loadin
172. e brakes for the purpose of drying and cleaning the brake discs if the traffic conditions permit this Do not place any other road users in jeopardy Caution When driving through bodies of water parts of the vehicle such as the engine gearbox catalytic converter chassis or electrics can be severely damaged Oncoming vehicles can generate water waves which can exceed the permissible water level for your vehicle Potholes mud or rocks can be hidden under the water making it difficult or impossible to drive through the body of water Donotdrive through salt water The salt can lead to corrosion Immediately rinse all the parts of the vehicle which came into contact with the salt water with fresh water a Note After driving through a body of water we recommend that the vehicle is checked by a specialist garage m Towing a trailer Towing a trailer Technical requirements Your vehicle is designed primarily for transporting persons and luggage It can however also be used for towing a trailer provided certain technical equipment is fitted If your vehicle is already fitted with a factory fitted trailer hitch or with a trailer hitch from the range of Skoda original accessories it meets all the technical and legal requirements Your vehicle is fitted with a 13 pin power socket for the electrical connection between the vehicle and trailer If the trailer which you wish to tow has a 7 pin connector yo
173. e child safety seat Z WARNING e The locking eyes have just been developed for child safety seats which use the ISOFIX system You should therefore never attach other child safety seats seat belts or objects to the locking eyes hazard Z WARNING continued e Ask an authorised Skoda Service Partner whether a child seat which you bought for another vehicle is recommended for use in a Skoda before using an ISOFIX system Certain child seats which use the ISOFIX system can be attached with standard three point seat belts Please pay close attention to instructions from the manufacturer of the child safety seat when installing and removing the seat a Note Child seats which use the ISOFIX system are currently available for children weighing up to about 18 kg This corresponds to an age range up to 4 years The child seats can also be fitted with the Top Tether system gt page 130 m Attaching child seat using the Top Tether system Fig 130 Rear seat Top Tether lIn certain countries national legal provisions also require the equipment of the rear seat with fixing eyes for child seat using the Top Tether system fig 130 Always perform the installation and removal of the child seat using the Top Tether system as stated in the instructions from the manufacturer of the child seat Z WARNING Attach the child seats with the Top
174. e direction of travel If Description of the head airbags this is not done there is a risk of the child suffering severe or even fatal injuries if the front passenger airbag is deployed When transporting a child on the front The head airbag together with the side airbag offers enhanced passenger seat please comply with the appropriate national regulations occupant protection in the event of a side collision regarding the use of child safety seats Your head should never be positioned in the deployment area of the side airbag You might suffer severe injuries in the event of an accident This applies in particular to children who are transported without using a suitable child safety seat gt page 127 Child safety and side airbag e If children adopt an incorrect seated position when travelling they may be exposed to an increased risk of injury in the event of an accident This can result in serious injuries page 125 What you should know about transporting chil dren There must not be any further persons animals as well as objects positioned between the occupants and the deployment area of the airbag No accessories such as a can holder should be attached to the doors Fig 120 Installation position of the head airbags e Only hang light items of clothing on the clothes hooks to the vehicle Never The head airbags are positioned above the doors on both sides in the interior of the leave any heavy or sharp edge
175. e driven cece eee eee Service Reminder ccc cece eee eee eee Digital Clock sereen nannaa Gearshift indicator for changing gears Multi functional indicator onboard computer MAXI DOT display information display AutoCheck Control si iccccawnprerestensneepens Warning lights sisccccccciicagaeeraccieraage nes Unlocking and locking cece eee Vehicle keys iisccarieccnns tigieeneiced nning LOCKING UNIOCKING jessiescieie iiss aiciincaeniaaineecaieceaigs Child safety lOCK sisi cccomarisnrrttapaneriads Central locking System 1 0 ccc cece eee eee REMOLECONHO scsned i derinced debe im pinine Anti theft alarm system oo cece eee Interior monitor and towing protection monitoring Electrical power WindOWS eee ee scenes Electric sliding tilting roof cece eee wow wo Lights and Visibility 0 eee LIGhts aiaro in o nA a InteriorligAting enrirssr ion nonnesrtasiant enoia VIISID icistona cit ninnisin na de Windshield wiper and wash system Rear View MirrOr wk cece eee Seats and Stowage oiccen FLONUSCALS sorre opnunar aaa a a Head restraint sarir ocedecadsins ticeet Heating the front seats 60 cece eee eee REST SEINS saauannataautinraanaset ERE EET Pedals ccacdicisenngeciumirsaancgeimuagaraes luggage compartment cece eee eee Variable loading floor in the luggage compartment COMBI ead detiesmnangemnaisetayaamaecacn mead Luggage
176. e eee eee es 18 Opening asingle door cece eee eee 35 Opening the door Warming light aiisiie icc seiuenieieeaeaaain 29 Operation in winter Batten nioen e O tanks 166 Biodiesel sirrisiesiitnreririirenirtridsi 156 De icing WINdOWS eee eee eee 151 SHOW CHAINS tes cisecaiticiannegeedinon ede daiaces 173 Outside temperature 06 cece eee eee 20 Overview of the engine compartment 159 P Pait ersi nioran ona a a a 151 Paint damage soericssccseersrcpeersiennninias 151 PAGING rocrersikerinirioi gi kieken enais 90 Parking Od tic icieiaaaried aa gnaesaeeedaadae 90 Parking WORE itegdus ios vesadime ds os boeais 4 49 Parking ticket holder 0 0c ee ee eee eee 71 Passive Satety ciadeherceiatn arabes A 109 Payload seis atcedtevonsnaneseaiieniadaseinsieatine jeatiieae ninia 197 Pedals ii ieicninicanbandsaaree noer enna ren 60 Petrol cicss cicnaeuomnuneiteeng semaine NTA 155 Petrol engines Starting the engine nck ieansee dee edge 88 POLISHING esra asr eiar aai 151 POWERSOCKEEssciirntquinasnasanivimanedted beatae 72 POWEP Steering ieee scat sipini ukae aii tenuia i 137 Warning light eecrisrseciierieoineresciiari 27 Power WINKOWS 0 cece cette cece eee eeees 4 Central locking system 0 cee e eee 42 R Radiator tan aiciabsrctvnacaaty ed ukad neal s 163 Raise vehicle 6 cece eens 179 RANGE vorieroretueiri u tetir eiieeii da wed angler 20 Rear TOG IGN senen uiimaeniiiu meres tebe
177. e following vehicles Use whenever possible the interior rear mirror for estimating the distances to the following vehicles Using the system Ea Seats and Stowage Seats and Stowage Front seats Basic information The front seats have a wide range of different settings and can thus be matched to the physical characteristics of the driver and front passenger Correct adjustment of the seats is particularly important for safely and quickly reaching the controls e arelaxed fatigue free body position achieving the maximum protection offered by the seat belts and the airbag system The chapters which follow describe the procedure which you should adopt for adjusting the seats Z WARNING e Never transport more occupants than the maximum seating in the vehicle Each occupant must correctly fasten the seat belt belonging to the seat Chil dren must be fastened page 125 Transporting children safely with a suit able restraint system e The front seats and the head restraints must always be adjusted to match the body size of the seat occupant as well as the seat belts must always be correctly fastened in order to provide an optimal protection for you and your occupants e Always keep your feet in the footwell when the car is being driven never place your feet on the instrument panel out of the window or on the surfaces of the seats This is particularly important for the front seat passenge
178. e if the engine is running You will require significantly greater physical force to depress the brake pedal and to steer the vehicle if the engine is not running Ensure that the tow rope is always kept taught Caution e Do not leave the engine running when towing risk of damaging the engine In vehicles with catalytic converters there is a risk of unburnt fuel from getting into the catalytic converter where it will ignite This in turn would damage the catalytic converter and destroy it You can use the battery of another vehicle as a jump start aid gt page 182 Jump starting e ifthe gearbox of your vehicle no longer contains any oil because of a defect your vehicle must only be towed in with the driven wheels raised clear of the ground or on a special vehicle transporter or trailer The vehicle must be transported on a special vehicle or trailer if it is not possible to tow in the vehicle in the way described or if the towing distance is greater than 50 km When tow starting or towing the vehicle the towing rope should be elastic in order to protect both vehicles Thus one should only use plastic fibre rope or a rope made out of a similarly elastic material e One should be constantly vigilant not to allow impermissibly high towing forces or jerky loadings There is always a risk of excessive stresses and damage resulting at the points to which you attach the tow rope or tow bar when you attempt to tow a vehicle whi
179. e lifting jack itis important to support the vehicle with suitable supporting blocks if you wish to work under the lifted vehicle risk of injury m Securing wheels against being stolen You need a special adapter for slackening the safety wheel bolts Fig 157 Illustration image Safety wheel bolt with adapter Pull off the full wheel trim cap from the wheel hub or cap from the safety wheel bolt Insert the adapter 8 with its toothed side into the inner toothing of the head of the safety wheel bolt a gt fig 157 Insert the wheel wrench fully onto the adapter 8 Slacken the wheel bolt or tighten it firmly page 178 Reinstall the full wheel trim wheel cap after removing the adapter or place the cap onto the safety wheel bolt Breakdown assistance Have the tightening torque checked with a torque wrench as soon as possible Steel and light alloy wheels must be tightened to a tightening torque of 120 Nm The safety wheel bolts on vehicles fitted with them one safety wheel bolt per wheel can only be loosened or tighten up by using the adapter provided It is meaningful to note the code number hammered into the rear side of the adapter or the rear side of the safety wheel bolts You can obtain a replacement adapter from an authorised Skoda Service Partner if necessary by quoting this number We recommend that you always carry the adapter for the wheel bolts with you in the vehicle It should be
180. e oil level is too low page 28 Engine oil 7 In this case check the oil level as soon as possible Top up with an appropriate quantity of oil Caution e Always check the oil level on vehicles with engine 1 2 1 44 kW with twin valve system when the engine is cold Otherwise the measuring result is incorrect und oil could be incorrectly replenished risk of engine damage e The oil level must on no account extend beyond the range a Danger of damaging the catalytic converter e Do not continue your journey if for some reason it is not possible under the conditions prevailing to top up with oil Switch the engine off and obtain profes sional assistance from a specialist garage otherwise it could lead to severe engine damage Note Engine oil specifications page 200 m Replenishing engine oil Inspecting the engine oil level page 160 Unscrew the cap of the engine oil filler opening Pour ina suitable grade of oil in portions of 0 5 litres gt page 200 Inspect the oil level page 160 Carefully screw on the cap of the filler opening and push the dipstick in fully Z WARNING e Avoid dripping oil onto hot parts of the engine when topping up will oil a risk of fire Read and observe the warning notes gt page 158 Working in the engine compartment before working in the engine compartment Se For the sake of the environment The oil level must on no account be above
181. e on no position P account mixed up This may result in major operating problems and also vehicle damage m Never carry out any work close to naked flames Always keep a working fire extinguisher at hand e Allow the engine to cool down Keep children clear of the engine compartment Do not touch any hot engine parts risk of burns Never spill oil and other fluids over the hot engine Such fluids e g the anti The main inspection points freeze contained in the coolant may ignite e Avoid short circuits in the electrical system particularly on the battery Never place your hand into the radiator fan as long as the engine is still warm The fan might suddenly start running Never open the cap of the coolant expansion bottle as long as the engine is still warm The cooling system is pressurized e Cover over the cap of the coolant expansion reservoir with a large cloth when opening it as protection for your face hands and arms from hot steam or hot coolant Do not let objects such as e g cleaning cloth or tools lie in the engine compartment If you wish to work under the vehicle you must secure the vehicle from rolling away and support it with suitable supporting blocks the car jack is not gt i l sufficient for this risk of injury In cases where it be necessary to carry out inspection work when the engine is running there is an additional risk from rotating parts e g the V ribbed
182. e should be level Have all the occupants get out While changing a wheel the occupants of the vehicle should not stand on the road instead of behind a crash barrier Apply the handbrake firmly Engage 1st gear or if your vehicle is fitted with an automatic gearbox position the selector lever into position P Ifa trailer is coupled uncouple it Take the vehicle tool kit and the spare wheel page 175 out of the luggage compartment Z WARNING e If you find yourself in flowing traffic switch on the hazard warning lights system and place the warning triangle on the side of the road at the prescribed gt Z WARNING continued distance from your vehicle Comply with the national legal regulations In this way you are protecting not only yourself but also other road users Never start the engine with the vehicle sitting on the raised jack danger of suffering injury Caution If you have to change a wheel ona slope first block the opposite wheel with a stone or similar object in order to secure the vehicle from unexpectedly rolling away a Note Comply with the national legal regulations m Changing a wheel Always change a wheel on a level surface as far as possible Take off the full wheel trim page 177 or the caps gt page 178 Slacken the wheel bolts gt page 178 Jack up the vehicle until the wheel to be changed is clear of the ground gt page 179 Unscrew t
183. ease first of all check whether the windscreen wiper blades are not frozen to the windscreen before switching them on Switching on windscreen wipers when the windscreen wiper blades are frozen to the windscreen may result in damage both to the windscreen wiper blades and the motor of the windscreen wipers a Note The content of the windscreen wiper reservoir is 3 5 litres On vehicles which are equipped with a headlight cleaning system the content of the reservoir is 5 4 litres m Headlight cleaning system The headlights are being cleaned after the windscreen washer system has been operated for the fifth time the low beam or main beam are switched on as well as the windscreen wiper lever is held in the position G gt page 52 fig 45 for about 1 second You should remove stubborn dirt such as insect residues from the headlight lenses at regular intervals for example when refuelling Please refer to the following guidelines page 151 The headlight lenses You should remove any snow from the fixtures of the washer nozzles and clear ice in winter with a de icing spray in order to ensure proper operation of the cleaning system Caution Never remove the nozzles from the headlamp washer system by hand risk of damage m Using the system Lights and Visibility Replacing the wiper blades for the windscreen wipers Fig 46 Wiper blade for the windscreen B5J 6033H Wiper Remove the wiper blade Fold wi
184. ect seated position for the driver Correct seated position for the driver is important for safe and relaxed driving BSJ 7014H Fig 109 The correct distance of the driver from the steering wheel The correct head restraint adjustment for the driver For your own safety and to reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accident we recommend the following setting e Adjust the steering wheel so that the distance between the steering wheel and your chest is at least 25 cm fig 109 left e Position the driver seat in the forward back direction so that you are able to fully press the pedals with your legs at a slight angle e Adjust the seat backrest so that you are able to reach the highest point of the steering wheel with your arms at a slight angle e Adjust the head restraint so that the top edge of the head restraint is at the same level as the upper part of your head fig 109 right Fasten the seat belt correctly page 115 How are seat belts correctly fastened Driver seat adjustment page 56 Adjusting the front seats Variant 1 or gt page 57 Adjusting the front seats Variant 2 Z WARNING The front seats and the head restraints must always be adjusted to match the body size of the seat occupant as well as the seat belts must always be gt Passive Safety mo Z WARNING continued ZN WARNING continued correctly fastened in order to provide an optimal protect
185. ed doors 36 Unlocking and locking ZN WARNING continued make it more difficult for rescuers to get into the vehicle in an emergency hazard a Note e The anti theft alarm system is also activated with the deactivated safe securing system when locking the vehicle Interior monitoring is however not activated You will be notified of the activation of safe locking after the vehicle is locked with the following message CHECK DEADLOCK in the instrument cluster display In vehicles with an information display the following messages appears Check deadlock Owner s manual m Unlocking the vehicle using the key Fig 25 Turning the key for unlocking and locking the vehicle Turn the key in the locking cylinder of the driver s door in the direction of travel unlock position fig 25 Pull on the door handle and open the door All the doors only the driver s door on vehicles with anti theft alarm system are unlocked The boot lid is then unlocked The switched on interior lights come on over the door contact The safe securing system is deactivated The windows open provided the key is held in the unlock position The indicator light in the driver door stops flashing if the car is not fitted with an anti theft alarm system page 40 a Note If the vehicle is equipped with an anti theft alarm system you must insert the key into the ignition lock and switch the ignition on within 15
186. ed for four persons m How are seat belts correctly fastened Fastening three point seat belts Fasten your seat belt before starting Fig 112 Routing of belt webbing over the shoulders and the lap belt Routing of belt webbing for an expectant mother Correctly adjust the front seat and the head restraint before fastening your seat belt page 110 Correct seated position Slowly pull the belt webbing at the tongue of the lock over your chest and pelvis gt Insert the tongue of the lock into the seat belt buckle belonging to the seat until it is heard to lock in place Pull on the seat belt to check that it has also reliably engaged in the lock Each three point seat belt is equipped with an inertia reel This inertia reel offers you complete freedom of movement if the belt is unreeled slowly If the brakes are applied suddenly the inertia reel will block The seat belts also block when the car accelerates when driving downhill and when cornering Expectant mothers must also wear the seat belt gt A Z WARNING The shoulder part of the seat belt must never run across your neck but must run approximately over the middle of the shoulder and fit snugly against the chest The lap part of the belt must run across the hip and must never be routed across the stomach It must always fit snugly gt fig 112 left Adjust the belt webbing as required Seat belts ZN WARNING conti
187. eeds the tyre will warm up as a result of this This can result in tread separation and even a tyre blowout Immediately replace the damaged rims or tyres Tyres which are 6 years old or more should only be fitted in exceptional cases and when adopting an appropriately cautious style of driving gt For the sake of the environment Tyres which are insufficiently inflated increase your fuel consumption m Wear indicators aS Fig 149 Tyre tread with wear indicators The base of the tread of the original tyres has wear indicators 1 6 mm high installed at right angles to the direction of travel These wear indicators are located at 6 8 points depending on the make and are evenly spaced around the circumference of the tyre fig 149 Markings on the walls of the tyres through the letters TWI triangular symbols or other symbols identify the position of the wear indicators A remaining tread of just 1 6 mm measured in the grooves of the tread next to the wear indicators means that your tyres have reached their legally permissible minimum tread depth Z WARNING You must have your tyres replaced with new ones at the latest when the wear indicators have been worn down The legally permissible minimum tread depth should be observed Z WARNING continued Worntyres do not provide the necessary adhesion to the road surface at high speeds on wet roads One could experience aquaplaning uncontrolled move
188. eee 30 Technical data seid me wiaieidsnon einen ainaindien 197 Telephone wien Meaeus deere dea CEER REENEN 102 Temperature QUISIDE aicvacwrels icmoainedieads dou nhdeaes 20 The first 1500 kilometres 20005 140 TNN O Pasou ahah fad Be eat oh Ee ons 43 TAPER OIG einama ieaiai niaaa kde net ped 95 TOO sreriacrsp i trani ee dane das KETI ERRERA i 175 TOP TEEF erereriirerii iken ee t Raniah 130 Tourist hight sierosa trendi aeaa AAR 46 TOWING uneren iie neoni teoer iniia eaea 184 Towing atrailer 0 cece cece eee tiniis 147 Towing eye TONE rripin nn nE a d E TOERE 185 FOOD cri EE EEE E ETE 185 Towing protection monitoring 4 40 Traction control system TCS 005 134 Warning light iciccnccnccintaneedeeweeedans 30 TONG witarndaiedad dies and ameter A 147 General Maintenance e sees 147 Transporting children safely 4 125 Tread depth srrrrerierrrscirerret ens Palen 170 Turn signal light 0 cece eee eee 193 Turn signal lightS cc cccccetcaneeeaa seeded oes 49 Warning light cece eee eee eee 26 Two way radio systems eee eee ees 102 TVW sc tise in a E A A Manes ET 169 Tyre pressure Warming light ice ies tein eniieesi ate anal we 29 Tyre pressure monitoring system 138 TWE repait Kits face iuiu e inedia ea 180 Tyres Winter tyres crenis das ene dais co aenen 172 U Windows GEFIGING 34 hr t o000 nage ta ture ae cose teen 1
189. eel bolts for steel and light alloy wheels is 120 Nm m Winter tyres The handling of your vehicle will be significantly improved when driving on wintry roads if you fit winter tyres Summer tyres do not offer the same grip on ice snow and at temperatures below 7 C because of their construction width rubber blend tread pattern This applies in particular to vehicles which are equipped with low profile tyres or high speed tyres code index H V or W on wall of tyre Winter tyres must be mounted on all four wheels to obtain the best handling char acteristics You must only fit those types of winter tyre which are approved for your vehicle The permissible sizes of winter tyres are stated in your vehicle documents Approvals may differ because of national legislation Please remember that the tyres should be inflated to 20 kPa 0 2 bar more than is the case for summer tyres gt page 169 Winter tyres no longer offer the same winter performance once the tyre tread has worn down to a depth of about 4 mm Ageing also causes winter tyres to lose most of their winter performance properties even in cases where the remaining tread depth is still clearly more than 4 mm Speed restrictions apply to winter tyres as well as to summer tyres gt page 171 gt You can fit winter tyres of a lower speed category to your vehicle provided that you also do not drive faster than the permissible maximum speed for such tyres even if gt
190. egulations Note It is not normally possible to fit wheels from other models of cars for technical reasons This may also apply in certain circumstances to the wheels of the same type of vehicle m Wheel bolts Wheels and wheel bolts are matched to each other in terms of design Each time you fit other wheels e g light alloy wheels or wheels with winter tyres you must therefore also use the matching wheel bolts of the correct length and shape of spherical cap This is essential to ensure that the wheels are tightly fitted and that the brake system operates properly If you retrofit wheel trims or have this done please also ensure that an adequate flow of air remains assured for cooling the brake system The authorised koda Service Partners are instructed in the technical possibilities which exist regarding converting or retrofitting tyres wheels and wheel trims Incase of incorrect treatment of the wheel bolts the wheel can loosen when the car is moving risk of accident The wheel bolts must be clean and must turn easily However they must never be treated with grease or oil e If the wheel bolts are tightened to a too low tightening torque the rim can lossen when the car is moving risk of accident A tightening torque which is too high can damage the bolts and threads and this can result in permanent defor mation of the contact surfaces on the rims Caution The prescribed tightening torque of the wh
191. ehicle damage the tyres and are rapidly destroyed a Note We recommend that you use snow chains from the Skoda genuine accessories m General Maintenance EA Accessories changes and replacement of parts Accessories changes and replacement of parts General Z Z WARNING continued though in some cases these products may have operational approval or may have been released by a state testing body Skoda vehicles have been built according to the latest discoveries in safety engi neering Thus one should not change the condition in which the vehicle was deliv ered from the manufacturer without some thought If your vehicle is to be retrofitted with accessories one part is to be replaced witha a Note new one or if technical modifications are to be carried out please observe the koda Genuine Accessories and Skoda original parts can be bought from author following information ised Skoda Service Partners who also professionally undertake the assembly of Advise should always be obtained from an authorised koda Service Partner parts which were purchased there before buying any accessories or parts and before making any technical changes For this reason we recommend you have all work carried out by authorised gt A Skoda service partners The guidelines and notes issued by Skoda Auto must be observed when making e All Skoda original accessories from the original accessories catalogue such as technical chang
192. electrical system are switched on more fuel is needed to operate the alternator W Keeping a log of your fuel consumption If you really wish to keep a close check on your fuel consumption it is best to enter the figures in a logbook This does not take much time but is a very worthwhile exer cise It enables you to detect any change positive and negative at an early stage and to take any appropriate action If you find that your fuel consumption is too high you should reflect on how where and in what conditions you have driven the vehicle since you last refuelled m Environmental compatibility Environmental protection has played a major role in the design selection of mate rials and manufacture of your new Skoda Particular emphasis has been paid to a number of aspects including Joints designed to be easily detached Simplified disassembly due to the modular structure system Improved purity of different classes of materials Identification of all plastic parts in accordance with VDA Recommendation 260 Reduced fuel consumption and exhaust emission CO Minimum fuel leakage during accidents Reduced noise Choice of materials Extensive use of recyclable material Air conditioning filled with CFC free refrigerant No cadmium No asbestos Reduction in the vaporisation of plastics Manufacture Solvent free cavity protection Solvent free protection of the vehicle for transportation from the production
193. em Warning light 0 c cece teens 30 Brakes nririnig alate was annie 135 BUIDS sroine panii aa aa a oath ehoe at 191 Warming light scicisniis cover wedeener deans 27 Button on the driver s door Central locking system 0e ees 36 Electrical power windows 0 05 41 C CANCE sesiuse attain tare aacnene aaa e e 175 Car SEATS soii A E toenail Maas 23 Catalytic converter sausauina eee eee 140 Central locking system 0 cece eee eee 35 OCK eon rere arene EE irr nar ard er any mer an er 36 WINO Gaede cromices ce niidi a stint 36 CHANGES sicst iadetegawrdtiiws deadodnaadd eam a 174 Changing awheel 0 cece cece 176 Changing wheels around 00 see eee 171 Charging the battery aace 166 Warning light cpeirisicsneiserreenisi netiis 27 Check engine oil level aace 160 Child Safety tauracs mou rtievad tuntini 125 SIDE SIDAG sive pedona rondaan ea re 127 Child safety lock 0 0 cece cece cence eee 34 Child safety seat on the front passenger seat 126 Safety information cece eee eee 125 CHIIGISC SE eri deienastee antiioire ae ashore neue Rede en 127 Classification into groups 000e 127 ISOFIX SYST M 2 cece eid 130 Children and safety ssccicrorsiciiriosiiseiiws 125 CHROME pants ecrire ridiani ay meen 151 Cigarette lighter cece eee eee eee 72 ClESMING as errei enere anne eeued genuine 149 Climatronic Defrosting WINdOWS
194. em according to vehicle equipment consists of an electronic control unit the front airbags for the driver and front passenger gt page 118 the side airbags page 120 head airbags gt page 121 an airbag indicator light in the instrument cluster gt page 31 a front passenger airbag switch gt page 123 an indicator light for a switched off front seat passenger airbag in the middle of the dash panel gt page 123 A fault in the airbag system exists if the airbag indicator light does not light up when the ignition is switched on the airbag indicator light does not go out after about 3 seconds after the ignition is switched on the airbag indicator light goes out and comes on again after the ignition is switched on the airbag indicator light comes on or flickers when driving e the airbag indicator light showing a switched off front passenger airbag in the middle of the dash panel flashes Airbag system wo Z WARNING To enable the occupants of a vehicle to be protected with the greatest possible effect when the airbag is deployed the front seats must be gt page 110 Correct seated position correctly adjusted to match the body size of the occu pant e Ifyou donot fasten the seat belts when driving lean too far forward or adopt an incorrect seated position you are exposing yourself to increased risk of injury in the event of an accident e Have the airbag system checked immediatel
195. em anti theft alarm system will be reactivated again This func tion is intended to prevent the car being unlocked unintentionally Display of the locking The turn signal lights flash once to confirm that the vehicle has been correctly locked If the vehicle is locked by pressing the button and some doors or the boot lid are not closed the turn signal lights flash only after closing Z WARNING If the vehicle is locked from the outside and the safe securing system is acti vated there must not be any person in the vehicle as it is then not possible to open either a door or a window from the inside The locked doors make it more difficult for rescuers to get into the vehicle in an emergency hazard a Note e Operate the radio remote control only when the doors and boot lid are closed and you have visual contact with the vehicle e Oncein the car do not press the lock button of the radio remote control before inserting the key into the ignition lock to prevent the car from being inadvertently locked and the alarm system being switched on Should this happen press the unlock button of the radio remote control m Synchronisation of the remote control If the vehicle cannot be unlocked by actuating the remote control system then it is possible that the code in the key and the control unit in the vehicle are no longer synchronised This can occur when the buttons on the radio operated key are actu ated a number of ti
196. emove the wiper blade Fold windscreen wiper arm out from the windscreen and position the wiper blade at right angles to the wiper arm fig 47 Hold the window wiper arm at the top end with one hand With the other hand unlock the locking button a in the direction of arrow and remove the wiper blade Attach the wiper blade Position the wiper blade onto the wiper arm and lock the locking button Check whether the windscreen wiper blade is correctly attached The same remarks apply here as for gt page 53 m Replacing the rear window wiper blade version 2 Fig 48 Wiper blade for the rear window Remove the wiper blade Fold windscreen wiper arm out from the windscreen and position the wiper blade at right angles to the wiper arm fig 48 Hold the window wiper arm at the top end with one hand With the other hand unlock the locking button Q and remove the wiper blade in the direction of arrow Attach the wiper blade Push the wiper blade until it locks up to the stop Check whether the windscreen wiper blade is correctly attached Fold the windscreen wiper arm back onto the windscreen The same remarks apply here as for gt page 53 m Rear view mirror Manual dimming interior rear view mirror Basic setting Pull the lever on the bottom edge of the mirror forward Dimming mirror Pull the lever on the bottom edge of the mirror back m Lights and Visibility Rear mirror
197. engine off Investigate the function indicated Obtain professional assistance Meaning of the red symbols SEA Engine oil pressure too low gt page 28 Overheated clutches of the automatic gear 0 peruse pes Three successive warning signals will sound if a red symbol appears m Yellow symbols A yellow symbol signals a warning Check the relevant function as soon as possible The meaning of the yellow symbols Check engine oil level engine oil sensor faulty JEA gt page 28 One warning signal will sound if a yellow symbol appears If several operational faults of priority 2 exist the symbols appear one after the other and are each illuminated for about 5 seconds m z4 Instruments and warning lights Set up You can change certain settings by means of the information display The current setting is shown on the information display in the respective menu at the top below the line You can select the following information depending on the equipment installed on the vehicle Language MFD Data Time Winter tyres Units Alternative speed displayed Service Interval Factory Setting Back After selecting the menu point Back you will reach one level higher in the menu Language Here you can set in which language the warning and information texts should be displayed Displays of the MFA Here you can switch off or on certain displays of the multi functional indicator Time Here you can
198. eplacing fuses at the battery manual gearbox automatic gearbox DSG on page 188 Note The fuses 1 7 can be replaced by a specialist garage m Replace fuses at the battery automatic gearbox B5J 7024H Fig 167 The battery Open the positive terminal cover fuse cover Breakdown assistance 190 Fuses and light bulbs Open the positive terminal cover gt page 189 fig 167 left Fuse assignment at the battery automatic gearbox Press onto the interlocks of the fuse covers A gt page 189 fig 167 on the right and open the covers Press together the interlocks of the fuse cover 8 simultaneously and push out the cover in the direction of the arrow Find out which fuse belongs to the component which is not operating gt page 190 Fuse assignment at the battery automatic gearbox Defect fuses can be detected by their melted metal strips Replace the defect fuse by a new fuse of the same ampere number Fig 168 Schematic representation of fuse assignment at battery Z WARNING Read and observe the warning notes gt page 158 Working in the engine compartment before working in the engine compartment Certain electrical components are only standard on certain vehicle model versions or only suppliable as optional equipment for certain models Caution No Power consumer Never attempt to repair fuses and also do not replace them with a fuse of a 1 Dynamo higher a
199. erating in order to avoid a high fuel consumption and resonance of the vehicle m Looking ahead when driving A vehicle s highest fuel consumption occurs it accelerates Avoid accelerating and braking unnecessarily If you drive with forsight you will not need to brake so often and will also then not have to accelerate so much Let your vehicle coast to a stop for example if this is possible when you see that the next set of traffic lights is at red m Driving and the Environment Shifting gears and saving energy Shifting up early saves on fuel 700 Fig 134 Fuel consumption in litres 100 km and speed in km h Manual gearbox Drive no more than about one length of your vehicle in first gear Shift up into the next higher gear at approx 2 000 to 2 500 revs An effective way of achieving good fuel economy is to shift up early You will consume more fuel if you drive at unnecessarily high revolutions in any given gear To shift in a fuel efficient manner follow page 18 Gearshift indicator for changing gears Automatic gearbox Depress the accelerator pedal slowly Do not depress it beyond the kickdown position however Only depress the accelerator pedal slowly if your vehicle is fitted with an automatic gearbox in order to automatically select an economic driving programme You will achieve good fuel economy by shifting up early and shifting down late General The gt fig 134 shows the ratio of fuel consu
200. erence of the most important operating elements of the vehicle It is necessary to observe all the information which is contained in the following chapters of the Owner s Manual Unlocking and locking car Fig 2 Remote control key B5J 6002H Q Unlocking the vehicle Unlocking the boot lid Locking the vehicle Folding out folding up of the key Further information page 39 Unlocking and locking the vehicle m Setting steering wheel position Fig 3 Adjustable steering wheel Lever on the steering column the correct distance of the driver from the steering wheel You can set the height and the forward back position of the steering wheel to the desired position Pull the lever below the steering wheel down fig 3 left Set the steering wheel to the desired position concerning height and forward back position Push the lever upwards as far as the stop You can set the height and the forward back position of the steering wheel to the desired position Further information gt page 86 Setting steering wheel position Z WARNING e Adjust the steering wheel so that the distance between the steering wheel and your chest is at least 25 cm fig 3 right Not maintaining this minimum distance will mean that the airbag system will not be able to properly protect you hazard e You must not adjust the steering wheel when the vehicle is moving e For safety reasons the lever must a
201. es trailer hitch child seats etc is approved By adhering to the prescribed procedures no damage whatsoever can arise to the We recommend you also purchase car radios antennas and other electrical vehicle or to its vehicle or operational safety The vehicle will also meet the valid accessories from an authorised Skoda service partner who you should also have provisions of the German Road Traffic Licensing Regulation StVZO after the modi install them m fications have been carried out More information is available from an authorised Skoda service partner who will also be able to carry out all the necessary work correctly Interference on the electronic components and their software can lead to opera tional faults This interference can also impair not directly affected systems because of the networking of the electronic components This means this may put the vehicle s road safety at risk and can lead to increased wear on parts Any damage which is done caused by technical changes made without consulting a Skoda dealer is excluded from the guarantee see guarantee certificate Z WARNING e Work or modifications on your vehicle which have been carried out unpro fessionally can cause operational faults risk of accident We advise you in your own interest to only use Skoda Genuine Accessories and Skoda original parts which have been expressly approved for use on your Skoda Reliability safety and suitabiliity have been
202. es it possible for you to also shift gears manually gt page 98 gt 96 Automatic gearbox Starting off and Driving Depress the brake pedal fully and keep it depressed Press the Shiftlock button button in handle of the selector lever move the selector lever into the desired position e g in D and then release the Shiftlock button Release the brake pedal and depress the accelerator gt AN Stop The selector lever position N does not have to be selected when stopping just for a short time such as at a cross roads It is absolutely sufficient to hold the stopped vehicle stationary by depressing the foot brake The engine can however be allowed just to idle Parking Depress the brake pedal and hold it depressed Apply the handbrake firmly Press and Shiftlock button in the selector lever move the selector lever to P and then release the Shiftlock button The engine can only be started when the selector lever is in position P or N The following message is shown in the information display if the selector lever is not in the position P or N when locking the steering switching the ignition on off or when starting the engine Move selector lever to position P N or in the instrument cluster display gt P N At temperatures below 10 C the engine can only be started in the selector lever position P It is sufficient to engage selector lever position P when parking on a flat surface When parking on a slope
203. es with opposing traffic system driving on the left right without dazzling the oncoming vehicles When the mode tourist light is active the side to side swivel of the headlights is deactivated Activating tourist light Before activating the tourist light the following conditions must be met Ignition switched off light switched off light switch in the position O control dial for the headlamp beam adjustment in the position no gear engaged or selector lever in the position N automatic gearbox tourist light deactivated Switch on the ignition Up to 10 seconds after the ignition is switched on Turn the light switch to the position Z0 gt page 45 Engage the reverse gear manual gearbox or move the selector lever into the position R automatic gearbox Turn the control dial for headlamp beam adjustment from the position to the position 3 page 48 Deactivating tourist light Before deactivating the tourist light the following conditions must be met Ignition switched off light switched off light switch in the position O control dial for the headlamp beam adjustment in the position 3 no gear engaged or selector lever in the position N automatic gearbox tourist light activated Switch on the ignition Up to 10 seconds after the ignition is switched on Turn the light switch to the position Z0 gt page 45 Engage the reverse gear manual gearbox or move the selector lever into the position
204. essing the switch to the a position gt page 43 fig 33 at the front for as long as it takes for the sliding tilting roof to close completely gt Z WARNING Close the sliding tilting roof carefully risk of injury m Convenience operation You can also close an open sliding tilting roof from the outside Hold the key in the locking cylinder of the driver s door in the lock position or press the lock button of the remote control until the sliding tilting roof is closed gt The closing operation stops when one releases the key or the lock button Z WARNING Close the sliding tilting roof carefully risk of injury The force limiter does not operate with the convenience closing m Emergency operation Fig 34 Detail of the headliner Points for positioning screwdriver opening for positioning the key You can close and or open the sliding tilting roof by hand if the system is defect Position the flat blade of a screwdriver carefully against the rear edge of the cover for the electrical drive at the points of the arrows 4 fig 34 on the left Pull the cover down Insert an Allen key Group 4 up to the stop into the opening at the point of the arrow 2 and close and or open the sliding tilting roof fig 34 on the right Press on the cover again by first of all inserting the plastic lugs and then pushing the cover up Have the fault rectified by a specialist workshop
205. essor Tyre inflation hose Tyre inflation pressure indicator Air release valve ON and OFF switch 12 volt cable connector page 72 Tyre inflator bottle with sealing agent Replacement valve core OO OOOOOOOOO The valve remover Q has a slot at its lower end which fits into the valve core This is the only way in which you can remove and re install the valve core from the tyre valve The same also applies to the replacement valve core 1 m Preparing to use the tyre repair kit Before using the tyre repair kit carry out the following preparatory work Park the vehicle as far away as possible from the traffic flow Park on as flat and firm a surface as possible Breakdown assistance yet Have all the occupants get out While changing a wheel the occupants of the vehicle should not stand on the road instead of behind a crash barrier Switch off the engine and engage 1st gear or if your vehicle is fitted with an automatic gearbox position the selector lever into position P Apply the handbrake firmly Check whether you can carry out the repairs with the tyre repair kit gt page 180 General information Ifa trailer is coupled uncouple it Remove the tyre repair kit from the luggage compartment Stick the sticker 2 gt fig 158 on the dash panel in view of the driver Do not remove the foreign body e g screw or nail from the tyre Unscrew the valve cap Use the valve remover 1 to
206. etres forwards or backwards to allow the sealing agent to distribute in the tyre Screw the tyre inflation hose of the air compressor 5 firmly back onto the tyre valve and repeat the inflation procedure Ifyou cannot reach the required tyre inflation pressure here either this means the tyre has sustained too much damage You cannot seal with tyre with the breakdown kit gt A Switch off the air compressor with the ON and OFF switch Remove the tyre inflation hose 5 from the tyre valve After reaching a tyre inflation pressure of 2 0 2 5 bar you can drive at a maximum speed of 80 km h 50 mph Check the tyre inflation pressure after driving 10 minutes gt page 182 Check after driving for 10 minutes Z WARNING e During inflation the tyre inflation hose and air compressor may get hot risk of injury Do not place hot tyre inflation hoses or hot air compressors on flammable materials risk of fire If you cannot inflate the tyre to at least 2 0 bar this means the damage sustained was too serious The sealing agent cannot be used to seal the tyre Do not drive the vehicle Get professional assistance Caution Switch off the air compressor after running 8 minutes at the latest danger of over heating Allow the air compressor to cool a few moments before switching it on again E Check after driving for 10 minutes Check the tyre inflation pressure after driving 10 minutes If the
207. excessive voice pauses e Avoid insufficient articulation e Close the doors windows and sliding roof in order to reduce or stop disturbing exterior noise itis recommended to speak louder at higher speeds so that the tone of your voice is louder than the increased surrounding noise e During the dialogue avoid additional noise in the vehicle e g simultaneously talking occupants Do not speak if the system makes an announcement The microphone for voice control is inserted in the moulded headliner and directed to the driver and front passenger Therefore the driver and the front passenger can operate the equipment If a voice command is not detected the system answers with Sorry and a new entry can be performed After the 2nd error the system repeats the aid After the 3rd error the answer Cancelled is given and the dialogue is ended Switch on voice control dialogue You can start the dialog at any time e by pressing the button briefly on the adapter gt page 104 fig 107 by pressing the button longer on the multi function steering wheel gt page 105 fig 108 Switching off voice control dialogue If the system is currently playing back a message you will have to end the message currently being played back by pressing the button 4 briefly on the adapter by pressing the button longer on the multi function steering wheel If the system is expecting a voice command y
208. ext will be displayed in the information display Top up wash fluid m Control system for exhaust The warning light comes on after the ignition has been switched on If the warning light does not go out after starting the engine or it lights up when driving a fault exists in an exhaust relevant component The engine management Using the system Instruments and warning lights 23 system selects an emergency programme which enables you to drive to the nearest specialist garage by adopting a gentle style of driving m a oe Anti spin regulation ASR a The warning light lt lights up if the TCS system is switched off Further information about the TCS gt page 134 m Tyre pressure monitoring The warning light lights up if there is a substantial drop in inflation pressure in one of the tyres Reduce the speed and check or correct as soon as possible the inflation pressure in the tyres gt page 169 An audible signal sounds as an additional warning signal If the warning light flashes there is a system fault Visit the nearest specialist garage and have the fault rectified Further information about the tyre pressure monitoring system gt page 138 Z WARNING When the warning light l lights up immediately reduce the speed and avoid sudden steering and brake manoeuvres Please stop the vehicle without delay at the nearest possible stop and inspect the tyres and their inflation
209. f as an occupant you have a subdued pain and or temperature sensitivity e g through medication paralysis or because of chronic illness e g diabetes we recommend not to use the seat heating of the driver or front passenger seat This can lead to burns on the back the posterior and the legs which are difficult to heal If the seat heating is used we recommend to make regular breaks in your journey when driving long distances so that the body can recuperate from the stress of the journey Please consult your doctor who can evaluate your specific condition Caution e You should not kneel on the seats or otherwise apply pressure at specific points in order to avoid damaging the heating elements of the seat heaters e Donotuse the seat heating if the seats are not occupied by persons or if objects are fastened or stored on them for example a child seat a bag etc A fault of the heating elements in the seat heating can occur e Do not clean the seats moist page 153 gt a Note The seat heating should only be switched on when the engine is running This has a significant effect of saving on the battery capacity m Rear seats Folding the rear seats forwards B5J 5021H Fig 54 Fold the seat cushion forwards unlock the seat backrest To enlarge the luggage compartment the rear seats can be folded forwards if necessary remove the seat cushions page 60 The rear seats can be folded forward individually on vehi
210. f the side lights are switched on the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel are also illuminated except the symbols and Fig 108 Multifunction steering wheel Mobile phone operation Overview of the functions of the multifunction steering wheel with mobile phone operation Button Action Operation press briefly Accept call end call entry in the main menu of the telephone list of the dialed numbers deactivate voice control press ae e e Activating voice operation rejecting a call ta turn upwards Increase volume Za turn downwards Decrease volume The buttons operate the functions for the operating mode of the current telephone m Using the system eo Communication Operate the telephone via the information display In the menu Phone you can choose from the following menu items a Phone book a Dial number a Call register a Voice mailbox Bluetooth a Settings a Back Phone book In the menu point Phone book is the list of the loaded contacts from the telephone memory and the SIM card of the mobile phone Dial number In the menu point Dial number you can write any telephone number Select in sequence the desired digits with the aid of the handwheel and confirm it by pressing the handwheel You can select the numbers 0 9 the symbols and the functions Cancel Call Delete Call register In the menu point Call register you can select the following menu points a Missed calls a Di
211. fect can be High temperatures such as those caused by intensive sun s rays accentuate this caustic effect It may therefore be necessary in certain circumstances to wash the car once a week It may also be sufficient however to wash the car once a month followed by appropriate wax treatment It is essential to also thoroughly wash the underside of your vehicle at the end of the winter road salting and gritting period Z WARNING When washing your vehicle in the winter Water and ice in the brake system can affect the braking efficiency risk of accident m Automatic vehicle wash systems The paintwork of the vehicle is sufficiently resistant that the vehicle can be washed normally in automatic vehicle wash plants without any problem The actual stress to which the paintwork is subjected however depends greatly on the design of the vehicle wash system the filtering of the water and the type of washing and care products used If the paintwork of your vehicle appears mat after being washed or even has scratches point this out to the operator of the vehicle wash plant Use a different vehicle wash plant if necessary There are no particular points to note before washing your vehicle in an automatic vehicle wash system other than the usual precautionary measures closing the windows unscrewing the aerial etc General Maintenance 150 Taking care of your vehicle and cleaning the vehicle If you have any particular at
212. front bumper or on the body Never place any objects on the surface of the dash panel on the front passenger side E Side airbags Description of side airbags The side airbag increases protection of the passenger concerned in the case of a side impact Fig 118 Driver seat Installation position of airbag B5J 6069H The side airbags are housed in the upholstery of the seat backrests of the front seats and are marked with the lettering AIRBAG fig 118 on the middle part The side airbag system in combination with the three point seat belts offers addi tional protection for the upper area of the body chest stomach and pelvis of the occupants of the vehicle in the event of severe side collisions Z in Important safety information on the side airbag on page 121 Apart from their normal protective function a further task of the seat belts is to also hold the driver and front passenger in a correct seated position in the event of a side collision so as to enable the side airbags to offer the maximum protection 720 Airbag system You should therefore always fasten the seat belts not only because this is required by law but also for safety reasons and for your own protection gt page 113 Why seat belts m Function of the side airbags Risk of injury to the upper part of the body is reduced by fully inflated side airbags Fig 119 Inflated side airbag _ B5J 6070H When the side a
213. g particular hazard Never use a child safety seat on the front passenger seat in which the child is seated with its back facing the direction of travel This child safety seat is positioned in the deployment area of the front passenger airbag The airbag may cause the child severe or even fatal injuries in the event of it being deployed This is also clearly stated on the sticker which is located on the centre column of the body on the front passenger side fig 123 The sticker is visible upon opening the front passenger door For some countries the sticker is also affixed to the sun visor of the front passenger Itis essential to always switch off the front passenger airbag when a child safety seat is nevertheless attached to the front passenger seat where the child is seated with its back facing in direction of travel gt page 123 Deactivating airbags If this is not done there is a risk of the child suffering severe or even fatal injuries if the front passenger airbag is deployed When transporting a child on the front passenger seat please comply with the appropriate national regu lations regarding the use of child safety seats e Ifthe front passenger airbag has been switched off by a specialist garage using the vehicle system tester the passenger s side airbag and the head airbag remain switched on Please comply with any differing national legal regulations regarding the use of child safety seats e Ifa child safety seat
214. g floor remove the stop into the secured position gt fig 62 The variable loading floor makes it easier to handle bulky luggage and creates an Folding even luggage compartment floor when the rear seats are folded forward The maximum permissable surface load of the variable loading floor is 75 kg Press the cover in the handle area in direction of arrow 2 the cover rolls up automatically Removing the variable loading floor Unlock the variable loading floor by turning the locking bolts A by approx 180 to the left fig 63 You can fold together the variable loading floor by moving it in the direction of the arrow Removing Have the foldable luggage compartment cover removed to transport bulky goods by pressing on the side of the cross rod in direction of arrow 3 and taking it out by moving it in direction of arrow 4 fig 62 Lift up the variable loading floor in direction of arrow Q gt fig 63 and remove it by pulling in direction of arrow 2 fig 63 Z WARNING No objects should be placed on the luggage compartment cover the vehicle Installing the variable loading floor ee ae be endangered if there is sudden braking or the vehicle collides Place the variable loading floor once folded together onto the carrier rails with something Fold open the variable loading floor Caution Lock the variabble loading floor by turning the locking bolts 4 by approx 180 to the right
215. g light 1 does not go out after the basic setting there is a fault in the system Have the vehicle inspected by your nearest specialist garage Warning light lights up If the tyre inflation pressure of at least one wheel is insufficiently inflated in comparison to the stored basic value the warning light gt A lights up Warning light flashes If the warning light flashes there is a system fault Have the vehicle inspected by your nearest specialist garage Z WARNING When the warning light l lights up immediately reduce the speed and avoid sudden steering and brake manoeuvres Please stop the vehicle without delay at the nearest possible stop and inspect the tyres and their inflation pres sures The driver is responsible for the correct tyre inflation pressures For this reason the tyre inflation pressures must be checked regularly Under certain circumstances e g sporty style of driving wintry or unpaved roads the warning light can be delayed or does not light up at all e The tyre pressure monitoring system does not take away the responsibility from the driver for the correct tyre inflation pressure Note The tyre pressure monitoring system e does not replace the regular tyre inflation pressure control because the system cannot detect an even pressure loss e cannot warn in case of very rapid tyre inflation pressure loss e g in case of sudden tyre damage In this case careful
216. g the interior of the vehicle If the windows are opened dust as well as other dirt can get into the vehicle and in addition the wind noise is more at certain speeds m Force limiter of the power windows The electrically operated power windows are fitted with a force limiter It reduces the risk of bruises or injuries when closing the windows If there is an obstacle the closing process is stopped and the window goes down by several centimetres If the obstacle prevents the window from being closed during the next 10 seconds the closing process is interrupted once again and the window goes down by several centimetres You must try to close the window once again within 10 seconds after the window has gone down twice even if the obstacle was not yet removed the closing process is stopped During this time it is not possible to automatically close the window The force limiter is still switched on The force limiter is only switched off if you attempt to close the window within the next 10 seconds the window closes now with full strength If you wait longer than 10 seconds the force limiter is switched on again Z WARNING You should take particular care when closing the windows You may otherwise suffer severe injuries as a result of getting an arm for example jammed in the window E Window convenience operation You can open and close the electrically powered windows as follows when unlocking and locking the ve
217. g the specta air to flow into the storage compartment cles and otherwise must be kept closed We recommend that you switch off the cooling if it is operating in the heating mode e Donotplace any items which are sensitive to heat in the storage box you may or if you are not using the cooling system for the storage compartment m damage them m Storage compartment on the driver s side Stowage compartment in centre console A Fig 82 Dash panel Storage compart Fig 84 Centre console Storage B5v 6047H ment on the driver s side J a compartment Unlockable compartment below the steering wheel on the left m Unlocable compartment in the centre console m Storage compartment in the front seat Fig 85 Front seat Storage compartment Tilt the lock to open the flap and pull out the flap fig 85 Tilt the lock to close the flap and press flap close Caution The storage compartment is designed for storing small objects of up to 1 kg in weight m Front seat armrest with storage compartment B5J 7009H Fig 86 Armrest Storage compartment open storage compartment Fold the armrest Press the bottom button on the face end of the armrest fig 86 on the left Fold the armrest forwards and release the button Seats and Stowage pa Opening stowage compartment Press the top button and fold up the cover of the storage compartment gt fig 86 on the right a Note The moving space of the arms can be restr
218. ger open it from outside The door can be unlocked from the inside by pulling the door opening lever once and then opening from the outside m Luggage compartment door Fig 28 Unlock the boot lid handle of the boot lid Opening the boot lid Invehicles with central locking press the button in the driver s door gt page 37 fig 28 left and open the boot lid in the direction of arrow gt page 37 fig 28 right In vehicles with central locking press the lever above the number plate and open the boot lid in the direction of arrow gt page 37 fig 28 right Closing the boot lid Pull the boot lid down and close it with a slight swing gt A handle which makes the closing easier is located on the inner paneling of the boot lid Z WARNING Ensure that the lock is properly engaged after closing the boot lid Other wise the boot lid might open suddenly when driving even if the boot lid lock is closed risk of accident e Never drive with the boot lid fully opened or slightly ajar otherwise exhaust gases may get into the interior of the vehicle risk of poisoning Do not press on the rear window when closing the boot lid it could crack risk of injury a Note e After closing the boot lid it is automatically locked within 1 second and the anti theft alarm system is activated This applies only if the vehicle was locked before closing the boot lid e The function of the hand grip ab
219. gine revolutions per minute Newton meter measuring unit for the engine torque discharged quantity of carbon dioxide in grams per driven kilometre Petrol engine with a turbocharger and a direct fuel injec tion system Diesel engine with turbocharger and injection system Common Rail 5 speed manual gearbox 6 speed automatic gearbox 7 speed automatic gearbox DSG The vehicles of this category are designed and con structed for conveying goods with a maximum weight of 3 5 tons Diesel particle filter Technical Data 97 Performances The listed performance values were determined without performance reducing equipment e g air conditioning system E Weight Fig 179 Type plate The indicated unloaded weight is for orientation purposes only It is for the basic equipment variant of the vehicle not including special features or accessories The unloaden weight contains a fuel tank topped up to 90 and a driver weight of 75 kg It is possible to calculate the approximate loading capacity from the difference between the permissible total weight and the unloaded weight You need to include the following into the loading capacity Passengers e all luggage and other loads e Roof loads incl the roof rack When using the towing device the corresponding drawbar load max 50 kg The following specifications are listed on the type plate fig 179 gt Technical data EA Technical Data Q Permissible gross we
220. h until the steam or coolant has stopped escaping e For safety reasons the bonnet must always be properly closed when driving One should therefore check that the lock has in fact engaged properly after closing the bonnet Stop your vehicle immediately while driving if you notice that the lock is not properly engaged and close the bonnet properly risk of an accident m Working in the engine compartment Particular care is required when carrying out any work in the engine compartment There is a risk of injuries scalding accidents and fire when working in the engine compartment e g inspecting and replenishing oil and other fluids For this reason it is essential to comply with the warning instructions stated below and with the general applicable rules of safety The engine compartment of your car is a hazardous area gt Inspecting and Replenishing 159 A WARNING Z WARNING continued Never open the bonnet if you see that steam or coolant is flowing out of the Do not smoke engine compartment risk of scalding Wait long enough until the steam or coolant has stopped escaping e Switch off the engine and pull out the ignition key e Apply the handbrake firmly Cauti e fyour vehicle is fitted with a manual gearbox move the gearshift lever into auton a Neutral or if it is fitted with automatic gearbox move the selector lever into When replenishing fluids in the engine always ensure that the fluids ar
221. has been disconnected and reconnected the warning light 52 comes on after switching on the ignition The warning light must go out after driving a short distance m Electronic stability programme ESP The warning light comes on for a few seconds when the ignition is switched on If the ESP helps to stabilise the vehicle for example when applying and releasing a braking force to an individual wheel then the indicator light 52 flashes The warning light amp lights up permanently if there is a fault in the ESP system The fact that the ESP system operates together with the ABS means that the ESP warning light will also come on if the ABS system is not operating properly If the warning light 52 comes on immediately after starting the engine the ESP system can be switched off for technical reasons In this case the ESP system can be switched on again by switching the ignition on and off If the warning light goes out the ESP system is fully functional again Further information on the ESP gt page 133 Electronic stability programme ESP a Note If the battery has been disconnected and reconnected the warning light 52 comes on after switching on the ignition The warning light must go out after driving a short distance m 30 Instruments and warning lights Antilock brake system ABS The warning light shows the functionality of the ABS The warning light comes on for a few seconds after the ignition h
222. he angle of the seat backrest Relieve any pressure on the seat backrest do not lean on it and turn the hand wheel G to adjust the angle of the backrest The driver s seat should be adjusted in such a way that the pedals can be fully pressed to the floor with slightly bent legs The seat backrest on the driver s seat should be adjusted in such a way that the upper point of the steering wheel can be easily reached with slightly bent arms Z WARNING e Only adjust the driver seat when the vehicle is stationary risk of injury Take care when adjusting the seat Adjusting the seat without care can lead to bruises or injuries The seat backrests must not be angled too far back when driving otherwise this will affect proper operation of the seat belts and of the airbag system risk of injury m Adjusting the front seats Variant 2 Po o B5J 4046F O Fig 51 Controls at seat This front seat variant is only available in some countries Adjusting a seat in a forward back direction Pull the lever in the middle section G gt fig 51 up and push the seat into the desired position Release the lever Q and push the seat further until the lock is heard to engage Adjusting height of seat Lift the seat if required by pulling or pumping lever 2 upwards Lower the seat if required by pushing or pumping lever 2 downwards Using the system Seats and Stowage Adjust th
223. he ignition is switched on both when the vehicle is stationary as well as when driving Some operational faults urgent repairs service work or other information appear in the display of the instrument cluster The displays are shown with a red or yellow light symbol depending on the priority of the message The red symbols indicate danger priority 1 while the yellow symbols indicate a warning priortity 2 Information for the driver may also appear in addition to the symbols page 25 There is at least one error message when the term Vehicle status is displayed in the menu After selecting this menu the first of the error messages is displayed Several error messages are shown on the display under the message e g 1 3 This indicates that the first of a total of three error messages is displayed The respective messages are displayed one after the other in an interval of 5 seconds Check as soon as possible the displayed error messages As long as the operational faults are not rectified the symbols are always indicated again After the first display the symbols are indicated without information for the driver Using the system Instruments and warning lights 23 If a fault occurs a warning signal will also sound in addition to the symbol and text in the display Priority 1 three warning signals Priority 2 one warning signal m Red symbols A red symbol signals danger Bring the vehicle to a stop Switch the
224. he slot of the safety lock on the left door to the left on the right door turn it to the right So long as the child safety lock is switched on it is not possible to open the door from the inside with the door opening lever In this case the door can be opened only from the outside m Central locking system Description Unlocking or locking the vehicle causes all doors to be unlocked or locked at the same time by the central locking system The boot lid is unlocked when opening It can be opened by pressing the hand grip above the licence plate gt page 37 Operation of the central locking system is possible e from the outside using the vehicle key gt page 36 using the buttons for the central locking system gt page 36 witha remote control key page 38 Indicator light in the driver s door After locking the vehicle the indicator light flashes for around 2 seconds in quick succession afterwards it will begin to flash at longer intervals If the vehicle is locked and the safe securing system gt page 35 is not operating the indicator light in the driver door blinks for about 2 seconds fast goes out and starts to flash evenly at longer intervals after about 30 seconds If the indicator light first of all flashes fast for about 2 seconds afterwards lights up for about 30 seconds and then flashes slowly there is a fault in the central locking system or interior monitor page 40 Visit a specialist garage to obtain as
225. he vehicle body to dry off the windows Residues of preservatives in the window leather can dirty the window and reduce visibility Do not affix any stickers over the inside of the rear window to avoid damage to the heating elements of the rear window heater Caution e Never remove snow or ice from the glass parts with warm or hot water risk of formation of cracks in the glass When removing snow or ice from the windows and mirror lenses make sure not to damage the paintwork of the vehicle m The headlight lenses Please do not use any aggressive cleaning or chemical solvent products for cleaning the front headlights risk of damage to the plastic lenses Please use soap and clean warm water General Maintenance A Taking care of your vehicle and cleaning the vehicle Caution Never wipe the headlights dry and do not use any sharp objects for cleaning the plastic lenses this may result in damage to the protective paintwork and conse quently in formation of cracks on the headlight lenses e g through effect of chem ical products m Door and window seals The rubber seals on the doors boot lid bonnet and windows remain supple and last longer if you treat them regularly with a rubber care product e g with a spray with silicone free oil You also avoid premature wear of the seals and prevent leakages in this way It is also easier to open the doors Rubber seals which are well cared for also do not stick together i
226. he vehicle doors can be opened from the inside as follows the door is unlocked by actuating the door opening lever The door opens upon actuating the door opening lever again Note The opened door cannot be locked with the securing knob This prevents the possibility of forgetting the key in the locked vehicle The opened doors at the rear and the front passenger door are locked by pressing the securing knob and slamming the door closed e Please refer to the safety guidelines A in Description on page 35 m Child safety lock The child safety lock prevents the rear door from being opened from the inside Fig 24 Switching child safety lock on for vehicles without or with central locking system The rear doors are equipped with a child safety lock You can switch the child safety lock on and off using the vehicle key Switching child safety lock on On vehicles without central locking system turn the slot of the safety lock on the left door to the left gt fig 24 on the right door turn it to the right On vehicles with central locking system turn the slot of the safety lock on the left door to the right on the right door turn it to the left fig 24 Switching child safety lock off On vehicles without central locking system turn the slot of the safety lock on the left door to the right on the right door turn it to the left On vehicles with central locking system turn t
227. he wheel bolts and place them on a clean surface cloth paper etc Take off the wheel Fit on the spare wheel and tighten the wheel bolts slightly Lower the car Tighten the wheel bolts firmly alternately and diagonally using the wrench crosswise gt page 178 Mount the full wheel trim wheel trim cap or the caps a Note e All bolts must be clean and must turn easily You must never grease or oil the wheel bolts When fitting on unidirectional tyres ensure that the tyres rotate in the correct direction gt page 169 m Subsequent steps After changing the wheel you must perform the following steps Stow the vehicle tool kit in the space provided Stow the replaced wheel in the luggage compartment Check the tyre pressure on the spare wheel just mounted as soon as possible Have the tightening torque of the wheel bolts checked with a torque wrench as soon as possible Steel and light alloy wheels must be tightened to a tightening torque of 120 Nm Change the damaged wheel or consult a specialist garage about possibilities for getting repairs done Z WARNING It is necessary to observe the guidelines given on gt page 171 New tyres and wheels if the vehicle is subsequently fitted with tyres which are different to those it was fitted with at the works Note If you find when changing the wheel that the wheel bolts are corroded and difficult to turn the bolts must be
228. head restraints adjustable for height adjustable steering column The specified safety equipment works together in order to optimally protect you and those travelling with you in accident situations The safety equipment does not protect you or the people travelling with you if you or your occupants adopt an incorrect seated position or the equipment is not correctly adjusted or used For this reason you will be provided with information on why these equipment components are very important how it protects you and the occupants what should be observed when using the equipment and how you and the people travel ling with you can make full use of the existing safety equipment This Owner s Manual contains important warning notes which you and those travelling with you should pay attention to in order to reduce a risk of injury Safety concerns everybody m Before setting off The driver is always fully responsible for his occupants and for the operating safety of the vehicle For your own safety and the safety of the people travelling with you please pay attention to the following points before setting off Ensure that the lighting and the turn signal system are functioning properly Inspect the tyre inflation pressure Ensure that all the windows offer a good visibility to the outside e Safely attach the items of luggage page 60 Loading the luggage compart ment Ensure that no objects can obstruct the pedal
229. hicle only close the sliding tilting roof Opening a window Hold the key in the locking cylinder of the driver s door in the unlock position or press the unlock button of the radio remote control until all the windows are opened Closing a window Hold the key in the locking cylinder of the driver s door in the lock position or press the lock button of the radio remote control until all the windows are closed You can interrupt the opening or closing operation of the windows immediately by releasing the key or the lock button Z WARNING The system is fitted with a force limiter gt page 42 If there is an obstacle the closing process is stopped and the window goes down by several centimetres You should then take particular care when closing the windows You may other wise suffer severe injuries as a result of getting an arm for example jammed in the window m Operational faults Electrically operated power windows do not operate If the battery of the car has been disconnected and then reconnected the electri cally operated power windows do not operate The system must be activated Proceed as follows in order to re establish the function e Switch on the ignition e slightly pull on the upper edge of the relevant button and hold it until the window is closed release the switch you must pull the respective switch again in upward direction for approx 3 seconds Operation in winter Ice accumula
230. his setting by repeatedly pressing pushbutton Z WARNING You should not leave recirculated air mode on over a longer period of time as stale air may result in fatigue in the driver and occupants divert your attention and also cause the windows to mist up The risk of having an accident increases Switch recirculated air mode off as soon as the windows begin misting up E Air conditioning system manual temperature control Description The air conditioning system is a combined cooling and heating system It makes it possible to optimally control the air temperature at any season of the year Description of the air conditioning system It is important for your safety and for your driving comfort that the air conditioning system is operating properly The air conditioning system operates when switch fig 92 is pressed and the following conditions are met engine running outside temperature above approx 2 C and blower switch switched on positions 1 to 4 Air at a temperature of about 5 C may flow out of the vents under certain circum stances when the cooling system is operating Lengthy and uneven distribution of the air flow out of the vents and large differences in temperature for example when getting out of the vehicle can result in chills in sensitive persons a Note Werecommend you have a specialist garage clean the air conditioning system once every year W Using the system
231. ible to adapt the routing of the belt webbing at the front seats by adjusting the height of the seat m Taking seat belts off Fig 114 Releasing lock tongue from belt lock Press the red button in the belt lock fig 114 The spring force causes the tongue of the lock to jump out Guide the seat belt back with your hand to enable the inertia reel to wind up the belt webbing more easily A plastic knob in the belt webbing holds the belt tongue in a position which is easy to get hold of m Belt tensioner Safety for the driver and front passenger wearing their seat belts is enhanced by the belt tensioners fitted to the inertia reels of the front three point seat belts The three point seat belts are automatically tensioned in the event of a frontal colli sion of a certain severity The belt tensioners can also be deployed if the seat belts are not fastened The fastened three point seat belt is automatically tensioned in the event of a frontal or side collision of a certain severity Belt tensioners are not activated in the event of minor frontal collisions side and rear end collisions in the case of a rollover and also not in accidents in which no major forces are produced from the front Z WARNING Anywork on the belt tightener system including removal and installation of system components because of other repair work must only be carried out by a specialist garage e The protective function of the sy
232. ic conditions The route indicated by the warning light must not tempt you to disregard the national regulations for road traffic Caution As long as the warning light gt lights up one must take into account an increased fuel consumption and in certain circumstances a power reduction of the engine a Note Further information about diesel particle filter gt page 139 Diesel particle filter diesel engine m Seat belt warning lightA The warning light A comes on after the ignition is switched on as a reminder for the driver and front passenger to fasten the seat belt The warning light only goes out if the driver or front passenger has fastened his seat belt Unlocking and locking Unlocking and locking Vehicle keys Note eer Please approach an authorised Skoda Service Partner if you lose a key since he can Description obtain a new one for you m Changing the battery in the remote control key B5J 7004H Fig 22 Set of keys without remote control Keys with remote control key B5J 7005H Two keys are provided with the vehicle Depending on the equipment your vehicle can be equipped with keys without radio remote control fig 22 left or with radio Fig 23 Remote control key remove cover remove battery remote control fig 22 right Each remote control key contains a battery which is housed under the cover fig 23 If the battery is discharged the red indicator light A does
233. icle inspected by a specialist garge if you find any stains caused by oil or other fluids on the floor m Driving Tips Driving and the Environment w3 Avoid driving short distances Short distances result in an above average high fuel consumption 1 100km Fig 136 Fuel consumption in litres 100 km at different temperatures Avoid driving a distance of no more than 4 km if the engine is cold The engine and catalytic converter must first have reached their optimal operating temperature in order to effectively reduce fuel consumption and pollutant emis sions The cold engine vehicle consumes approx 15 20 litres 100 km of fuel immediately after starting Fuel consumption drops to 10 litres 100 km after just 1 kilometre The engine reaches its operating temperature outside temperature and engine dependent only after about 4 to 10 kilometres and the fuel consumption then stabilizes You should therefore avoid driving short distances whenever possible An important factor in this connection is also the ambient temperature The gt fig 136 shows the different fuel consumptions for the same distance on the one hand at 20 C and on the other hand at 10 C Your vehicle has a higher fuel consumption in winter than in summer E Checking tyre inflation pressures Tyres which are correctly inflated save fuel Always ensure that your tyres are inflated to the correct pressure at all times The rolling resistance will be increa
234. icted if the armrest is folded down In city traffic the armrest should not be folded down m Storage compartment in the front doors Fig 87 Stowage compartment in door panel A bottle holder is located in the area 8 of the storage compartment for the front doors Z WARNING Use the area A gt fig 87 of the storage compartment only for storing objects which do not project so that the effectiveness of the side airbag is not impaired m N Fig 88 Removeable storage compart __ B5J 4019H ments A storage box is located on both sides in the side trim panel of the luggage compartment fig 88 Caution The removeable storage boxes are intended for storing small objects of up to 2 5 kg in weight m Flexible storage compartment BE 550 402011 Fig 89 Flexible storage compartment A flexible storage compartment is located on the right side of the luggage compart ment Removing Take hold of the flexible storage compartment at both upper corners Seats and Stowage Removeable storage compartments in the luggage compartment Press the upper corners to the inside and release the storage compartment by pulling upwards Take it out by pulling towards the middle of the vehicle Installing Insert both ends of the flexible storage compartment into the openings of the right side trim panel of the luggage compartment and push it downwards until it locks Caution The flexible storage
235. idescreen wiper will operate every 6 seconds Automatic wipe wash for the rear window pane Push the lever away from the steering wheel into the spring tensioned position Q the windscreen wiper and wash system will operate Letting go of the lever will cause the windscreen wash system to stop and the windscreen wiper to continue for another 1 3 wiper strokes depending on the period of spraying of the windscreen The lever will stay in position after releasing it O Switching windscreen wipers off Move the lever back into its home position The windscreen wipers and the windscreen washer system only operate if the igni tion is switched on The rear window will be wiped again if the window wipers are on when reverse gear is selected The windscreen washer nozzles for the windscreen are heated when the ignition is switched on Top up with wash liquid gt page 168 Z WARNING Properly maintained windscreen wiper blades are essential for clear visibility and safe driving gt page 53 e Do not use the windscreen washer system at low temperatures without heating the windscreen beforehand Otherwise the window cleaner could freeze on the windscreen and restrict the view to the front e Inthe event of a freezing up of the windscreen first of all remove the ice gt page 151 and then operate the windscreen wiper otherwise the windscreen wiper blades could be damaged Caution In frosty weather pl
236. ight The permissible overall weight of the vehicle trailer combination when the vehicle is being operated with a trailer 3 Maximum permissible front axle load 4 Maximum permissible rear axle load The identification plate is affixed to the lower part of the column between the front and rear doors on the front passenger side Z WARNING Do not exceed the permissible overall weight risk of accident and damage to the vehicle m Identification details a ae aiin Fig 180 Vehicle data sticker Vehicle data sticker The vehicle data sticker gt fig 180 is located on the floor of the luggage compart ment and is also stated in the Service schedule The vehicle data sticker contains the following data Vehicle identification number VIN Vehicle type Gearbox code paint number interior equipment number engine output engine code Partial description of the vehicle 7GG 7MB 7MG vehicles with DPF page 139 OOG OOO Vehicle identification number VIN The vehicle identification number VIN vehicle body number is stamped into the engine compartment on the right hand shock absorber dome This number is also located on a sign on the lower left hand edge below the windscreen together with a VIN bar code Engine number The engine number is stamped into the engine block Sticker on inside of fuel filler flap The sticker is affixed to the inside of the fuel filler flap They contain the following
237. ign importers are happy to provide information about technical aspects of the vehicle required maintenance work and possibilities for getting repairs done m Unleaded petrol A vehicle fitted with a petrol engine must always be refuelled with unleaded petrol gt page 140 The automobile associations can provide you with information regarding the locations of filling stations which offer unleaded petrol m Headlights The low beam of your headlights is set asymmetrically It illuminates the side of the road on which you are driving to a greater extent If you drive abroad on the other side of the road you will dazzle oncoming traffic Halogen projector headlights The adaptation of the headlights valid for vehicles which are designed for driving on the left and on the right must be performed by switching over a bezel by a specialist garage Halogen projector headlights with cornering light function Headlight beam setting gt page 46 Tourist light Halogen headlight When using Halogen headlights it is necessary to stick a sticker over a certain part of the headlights in order to prevent the dazzling of oncoming traffic Driving Tips Driving and the Environment as You can purchase headlight stickers from the range of the Skoda original parts a Note You can obtain further information regarding masking over or converting the head lights from your specialist garage m Avoiding damage to your vehicle When
238. ignition lock Main beam Rear fog light Fog lights Blower Heatable windscreen washing nozzles windscreen cleaning system Not assigned Rear window heater Horn Front window wiper Central control unit for convenience system Anti theft alarm system Cigarette lighter power socket in the luggage compartment ABS START STOP DC DC converter ESP Turn signal lights brake lights START STOP DC DC converter infotainment Radio Electrical power window front and rear left side Electrical power window front and rear right side Parking light left side Electric sliding tilting roof No 54 55 56 57 58 Power consumer START STOP instrument cluster Anti theft alarm system Control unit for automatic gearbox DSG Headlight cleaning system Parking light right side Left low beam headlight range adjustment Low beam on the right a a Ifthe engine is switched off already one electrical component which is connected can dis charge the battery Replacing fuses at the battery manual gearbox automatic gearbox DSG EJ B5J 7032H Fig 165 The battery fuse cover Press together the interlocks of the fuse cover simultaneously in direction of arrow A gt fig 165 and push out the cover in direction of arrow cover upwards in direction of arrow D Release the fixtures in the a using a flat screwdriver and fold the Find out which fuse belongs to the component which is not operating
239. ill which is closest to the wheel to be removed fig 156 Position the lifting jack below the jacking point and move it up until its claw is positioned directly below the vertical web of the lower sill Align the lifting jack so that its claw grasps the vertical web on the engraving of the lower sill A and the bottom base plate of the lifting jack 8 is resting flat with its complete surface against firm ground Turn the lifting jack up further until the wheel is just clear of the ground Ground below the lifting jack which is soft and slippery can cause the vehicle to slip off the jack It is therefore always necessary to place the lifting jack on a solid surface or use a wide and stable base Use a non slip base e g a rubber foot mat if the surface is smooth such as cobbled stones a tiled floor etc Z WARNING e Always raise the vehicle with the doors closed risk of injury Breakdown assistance v9 Z WARNING continued e Take suitable measures to prevent the base of the lifting jack from slipping off risk of injury e Place the lifting jack only on a solid and even surface e Not positioning the lifting jack at the specified points can result in damage to the vehicle The jack can also slip off if it does not have sufficient grip risk of injury Never start the engine if the vehicle is lifted risk of accident Never lie under the vehicle if the vehicle is only lifted with the vehicl
240. ine oil must not be refilled Engine oil can be refilled Engine oil must be refilled Further information page 160 Check engine oil level m Instruments and warning lights iS Instruments and warning lights Overview of the instrument cluster 40 5 vita We 1172 7 ty 77 40 20 M BsJ 6011H Fig 15 Instrument cluster Engine revolutions counter gt page 15 Button for Display Reset trip counter for distance driven with counter for distance driven gt page 16 Resetting Service Interval Display with Service Interval Display gt page 17 Set hours minutes with digital clock page 18 Activate deactivate display mode with Multi functional display gt page 18 Fuel gauge gt page 16 m with Information display gt page 22 Speedometer page 16 Engine revolutions counter Coolant temperature gauge gt page 16 Button for display mode The red zone of the rev counter scale 4 fig 15 indicates the range in which the Set hours minutes engine control unit begins to limit the engine speed The engine control unit Activating deactivating the second speed in mph or km h restricts the engine speed to a steady limit value Service interval Display of the remaining number of days kilometres or Shift into the next higher gear or select the selector lever position D of the auto miles to the next Inspection Service Reset matic
241. ing in the engine compartment a Note Arrangement of the indicator lights depends on the model and model version e Operational faults are shown in the instrument cluster as red symbols priority 1 danger or yellow symbols priority 2 warning m Turn signal system lt 1 gt gt Either the left or right D indicator light flashes depending on the position of the turn signal lever The indicator light flashes at twice its normal rate if a turn signal light fails Switching off the hazard warning light system is switched on will cause all of the turn signal lights as well as both indicator lights to flash Further information about the turn signal system gt page 49 m Main beam EO The indicator light 2 comes on when the main beam is selected or also when the headlight flasher is operated Further information about the main beam gt page 49 m Low beam ZO The indicator light Z0 comes on when low beam is selected gt page 45 m Rear fog light The warning light comes on when the fog light is on gt page 47 m Bulb failure The warning light comes on if a bulb is faulty e upto 2 seconds after the ignition is switched on when switching on the defective light bulb The following text e g will be displayed in the information display Check front right dipped beam The rear side igs and the licence plate lighting require several light bulbs The indicator light only lights up if
242. io traffic information CD MP3 Navigation press briefly Switch off on tone press for along period of time Swich the unit on off 4 turn upwards Increase volume a turn down Decrease volume wards Changing to the next stored radio station gt press briefly Changing to the next stored traffic information Changing to the next title Interrupting the traffic report gt press button for Interruption of the traffic report fast forward along time Changing to the previously stored radio station lt press briefly Changing to the previously stored traffic information Changing to the previous title Interrupting the traffic report lt press button for along time as Ba OQO Interruption of the traffic report fast rewind gt Using the system EA Communication a On vehicles which are equipped with the universal telephone preinstallation GSM II pressing the button Q only allows to operate the telephone The buttons apply for the respective operating mode of the current radio or radio navigation system a Note The loudspeakers in the vehicle are matched to a power output of the radio and radio navigation system of 4x 20 W m Mobile phones and two way radio systems The installation of a mobile phone and two way radio system in a vehicle should be carried out by a specialist garage Skoda Auto permits the operation of mobile phones and two way radio systems with a professionally installed external aeri
243. ion bottle Please contact an authorised Skoda Service Partner if you have any questions regarding the coolant or if you wish to fill up with a different coolant An authorised Skoda Service Partner can also supply you with the correct coolant additives Coolant capacity Petrol engines Capacities in liter 1 2 ltr 44 kW EU5 5 5 1 2 Itr 51 kW EU5 EU2 DDK 55 1 4 Itr 63 kW EUS 55 1 6 Itr 77 kW EU4 EU2 DDK 29 1 4 Itr 132 kW TSI EU5 6 6 1 2 Itr 63 kW TSI EU5 Z 1 2 Itr 77 kW TSI EU5 Z Diesel engines Capacities in liter 1 2 Itr 55 kW TDI CR DPF EUS 6 6 1 6 Itr 55 kW TDI CR DPF EU5 8 4 1 6 Itr 66 kW TDI CR DPF EU5 8 4 1 6 Itr 77 kW TDI CR DPF EU5 8 4 Caution Other coolant additives may cause operational problems which in particular involves significantly reducing the anticorrosion effect e Any faults or problems resulting from corrosion may cause a loss of coolant and as a consequence of this result in major engine damage m Inspecting the coolant level A M 55J 6081H expansion bottle Fig 143 Engine compartment Coolant The coolant expansion bottle is located in the engine compartment on the right Switch the engine off Open the bonnet gt A in Working in the engine compartment on page 158 Check the level of coolant in the coolant expansion bottle fig 143 The coolant level when the engine is cold must lie between the MIN 8 and MAX marking
244. ion for you and your occupants The driver must maintain a distance of at least 25 cm to the steering wheel page 110 fig 109 Not maintaining this minimum distance will mean that the airbag system will not be able to properly protect you hazard When driving hold the steering wheel with both hands firmly on the outer edge in the 9 o clock and 3 o clock position Never hold the steering wheel firmly in the 12 o clock position or in another way e g in the middle of the steering wheel or at the inner steering wheel edge In such cases injuries to the arms the hands and the head can occur when the driver airbag is deployed The seat backrests must not be angled too far back when driving otherwise this will affect proper operation of the seat belts and of the airbag system risk of injury Ensure that there are no objects in the footwell as any objects may get behind the pedals during a driving or braking manoeuvre You would then no longer be able to operate the clutch to brake or accelerate m Correct seated position for the front passenger The front passenger must maintain a distance of at least 25 cm from the dash panel so that the airbag offers him the greatest possible safety it is deployed For the safety of the front passenger and to reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accident we recommend the following setting e Adjust the front passenger seat as far as possible to the rear e Adjust the head
245. ir distribution or increasing or decreasing the blower speed The temperature is nevertheless regulated m Defrosting windscreen Defrosting windscreen switching on Press the button gt page 83 fig 93 Defrosting windscreen switching off Once again press the button or the button AUTO The temperature control is controlled automatically More air flows out of the air outlet vents 1 and 2 m Setting temperature Youcanset the desired interior temperature after switching on the ignition with the control dial Q You can set the interior temperature between 18 C 64 F and 29 C 86 F The interior temperature is regulated automatically within this range If you select the temperature below 18 C 86 F LO appears in the display If you select the temperature higher than 29 C 86 F HI appears in the display In both limit positions the Climatronic operates at maximum cooling or heating capacity respec tively The temperature is not controlled in this case Lengthy and uneven distribution of the air flow out of the vents in particular at the leg area and large differences in temperature for example when getting out of the vehicle can result in chills in sensitive persons m Controlling blower There are a total of seven blower stages available The Climatronic system controls the blower stages automatically in line with the interior temperature You can also however adapt the blower
246. ir on right hand steering models is positioned on the other side of the engine compartment Switch the engine off Open the bonnet A in Working in the engine compartment on page 158 Inspect the brake fluid level in the reservoir gt fig 144 The level must be between the MIN and MAX markings Aslight drop in the fluid level results when driving due to normal wear and tear and automatic adjustment of the brake pads and is perfectly normal There may be an indication of a leak in the brake system however if the fluid level drops significantly within a short time or if it drops below the MIN marking If the brake fluid level is too low this is indicated by the warning light lighting up in the instrument cluster gt page 30 In this case stop immediately and do not drive any further Obtain professional assistance Z WARNING Read and observe the warning notes gt page 158 Working in the engine compartment before working in the engine compartment e Ifthe fluid level has dropped below the MIN marking do not drive any further risk of accident Contact a Skoda dealer to obtain professional assistance m Replacing brake fluid Brake fluid absorbs moisture This causes the fluid to absorb moisture from the surrounding air over a period of time Excessive water in the brake fluid may be the cause of corrosion in the brake system The water content also lowers the boiling point of the brake f
247. irbags are deployed the head airbag and the belt tensioner are also automatically deployed on the relevant side In certain accident situations the front side and head airbag are simultaneously deployed If an airbag is deployed the airbag is filled with gas The airbags inflate in fractions of a second and at a high speed in order to be able to offer that additional protection in the event of an accident fig 119 A grey white non harmful gas is released when airbag is inflated This is perfectly normal and is not an indication of a fire in the vehicle The load of the occupants is cushioned when plunging into the fully inflated airbag and the risk of injury to the entire upper body chest stomach and pelvis is reduced on the side facing the door m Airbag system aa Important safety information on the side airbag Z WARNING continued Correct use of the airbag system considerably reduces the risk of e Anywork on the side airbag system including removing and installing system injury components because of other repair work e g removing seats must only be carried out by a specialist garage m Z WARNING It is essential to always switch off gt page 123 Deactivating airbags the Head airbags front passenger airbag when attaching a child safety seat on the front passenger seat where the child is seated with its back facing in direction of FEN travel in some countries also when the child is facing th
248. irements for the acceptance of warranty claims relating to corrosion damage and paint defects on the bodywork We recommend you use vehicle care products from Skoda original accessories which are available from authorised Skoda service partners Please follow the instructions for use on the package Z WARNING Care products may be harmful to your health if not used according to the instructions Always store care products in a safe place out of the reach of children risk of poisoning amp For the sake of the environment e Always select environmentally friendly products when purchasing vehicle care products Do not dispose of the packages with residues of care products in domestic waste ll Care of the exterior of vehicle Washing the vehicle Frequent washing protects your vehicle The best protection for your vehicle against harmful environmental influences is frequent washing and wax treatment How often you should wash your vehicle depends on a wide range of factors such as Taking care of your vehicle and cleaning the vehicle a9 Frequency of use The parking situation garage below trees etc Season of the year Weather conditions Environmental influences The longer insect residues bird droppings tree sap road and industrial dust tar soot particles road salt and other aggressive deposits remain adhering to the paint work of your vehicle the more detrimental their destructive ef
249. is to also hold the driver and front passenger in a correct seated position in the event of a frontal collision so as to enable the front airbags to offer the maximum protection You should therefore always fasten the seat belts not only because this is required by law but also for safety reasons and for your own protection gt page 113 Why seat belts Caution The dash panel must be replaced after the front passenger airbag has been deployed m Airbag system no Function of the front airbags Important safety information regarding the front airbag system Risk of injury to the head and chest area is reduced by fully inflated Correct use of the airbag system considerably reduces the risk of airbags injury Fig 116 Inflated airbags Fig 117 Safe distance to steering wheel The airbag system is designed in such a way that the airbags for the driver and front passenger are deployed in the event of a violent frontal collision A WARNING In certain accident situations the front side and head airbag are simultaneously Never transport children on the front seat of a vehicle without using a proper deployed restraint system If airbags are deployed in the event of an accident the child j iniuri I If the airbags are deployed the airbags are filled with a propellant gas and inflated Mighesarey Ra oneven tatal cece oe in front of the driver and front passenger gt fig 116 The airbags inflate in fractions e For the drive
250. isk of damaging the engine e Do not leave the engine running when towing risk of damaging the engine In vehicles with catalytic converters there is a risk of unburnt fuel from getting into the catalytic converter where it will ignite This in turn would damage the catalytic converter and destroy it You can use the battery of another vehicle as a jump start aid gt page 182 Jump starting 8a Starting off and Driving g For the sake of the environment Never warm up the engine when the vehicle is standing Drive off right away When driving the engine reaches its operating temperature more rapidly and the pollutant emissions are lower m Petrol engines These engines are fitted with a starter system which selects the correct fuel air mixture for every external air temperature e Do not operate accelerator before and when starting engine interrupt the attempt at starting after 10 seconds if the engine does not start right awayand wait for about 30 seconds before repeating the attempt Itis possible that the fuse on the electrical fuel pump is defect if the engine still does not start Check the fuse and replace it if necessary gt page 186 e fthe engine does not start contact the nearest specialist garage to obtain professional assistance It may be necessary if the engine is very hot to slightly depress the accelerator after the engine has started m Diesel engines Glow plug system Diesel engines
251. isting up a Note If recirculation mode is switched on for around 15 minutes the symbol lt gt will begin to flash in the display as a sign that the recirculation mode is switched on long term If the recirculation mode is not switch off the symbol flashes for around 5 minutes E Using the system Starting off and Driving Setting steering wheel position Fig 94 Adjustable steering wheel Lever below the steering column Safe distance to steering wheel You can set the height and the forward back position of the steering wheel to the desired position Adjust the driver seat gt page 56 Pull the lever below the steering wheel down fig 94 left gt Set the steering wheel to the desired position concerning height and forward back position Then push the lever up against the steering column until it locks into place Z WARNING You must not adjust the steering wheel when the vehicle is moving The driver must maintain a distance of at least 25 cm to the steering wheel gt fig 94 right Not maintaining this minimum distance will mean that the airbag system will not be able to properly protect you hazard e For safety reasons the lever must always be firmly pushed up to avoid the steering wheel altering its position unintentionally when driving risk of acci dent e If you adjust the steering wheel further towards the head you will reduce the protection offered by the driver
252. ition key cannot or cannot easily be turned into this position in order to release the steering lock Position G The engine is started in this position At the same time switched on low beam or main beam or other electrical components with major power consumption are briefly switched off The ignition key moves back into position 2 when one releases the key The ignition key must be turned back into position each time before starting the engine again The starter repeat lock in the ignition lock prevents the starter being engaged when the engine is running and thus getting damaged Z WARNING When driving the ignition key must always be in the position 2 ignition switched on without the engine running This position is indicated by the warning lights coming on If this is not the case it could result in unexpected locking of the steering wheel risk of accident Do not withdraw the ignition key from the lock until the car has come to a stop The steering lock can engage immediately risk of accident e Always withdraw the ignition key if you are going to leave the vehicle even for a short time This is particularly important if children are left in the vehicle The children might otherwise start the engine or operate electrical equipment e g power windows risk of injury m Using the system Starting off and Driving a7 Starting the engine General You can only start the engine only using an origin
253. koda original parts or from a specialist garage Colour coding of fuses Colour Maximum amperage light brown 5 brown VS red 10 blue 15 yellow 20 white 25 green 30 Z WARNING Read and observe the warning notes gt page 158 Working in the engine compartment before working in the engine compartment Caution Never attempt to repair fuses and also do not replace them with a fuse of a higher amperage risk of fire This may also cause damage at another part of the electrical system Have the electrical system checked as quickly as possible by a specialist garage if a newly inserted fuse blows again after a short time a Note We recommend that you have these fuses replaced by a specialist garage m Fuses and light bulbs a87 Fuse assignment in the dash panel B5J 7023H Fig 164 Schematic representation of the fuse box for vehicles with left hand steering right hand steering Certain electrical components are only standard on certain vehicle model versions or only suppliable as optional equipment for certain models No 1 nau ff u N 1 12 13 Power consumer S contact START STOP Instrument cluster headlight range adjustment ABS control unit Petrol engine Speed regulating system Reversing light manual gearbox Ignition Engine control unit automatic gearbox Brake pedal switch coolant fan Operating controls for the heating control unit for air conditioning sys
254. l the engine The cooling system does not require any maintenance under normal operating conditions The coolant consists of water with a concentration of coolant additive of 40 This mixture not only provides antifreeze protection down to 25 C but also protects the cooling and heating system from corrosion It also prevents the formation of scale and significantly increases the boiling point of the coolant You must therefore not reduce the concentration of antifreeze agent in the coolant by adding water also not during the summer months or in countries with a warm climate The concentration of coolant additive in the coolant must be at least 40 You can increase the amount of antifreeze in the coolant if a higher concentration of antifreeze is necessary for climatic reasons but only up to 60 antifreeze protection down to approx 40 C The antifreeze protection tails off above that concentration Vehicles exported to countries with a cold climate e g Sweden Norway Finland are already factory filled with a coolant which offers antifreeze protection down to about 35 C In these countries the concentration of coolant additive should be at least 50 General Maintenance 162 Inspecting and Replenishing Coolant The cooling system is factory filled with coolant purple in colour which complies with the specification TL VW 774 G We recommend you only replenish with the anti freeze indicated on the coolant expans
255. low for the speed of the vehicle and tending to lock This control cycle is notice able from a pulsating movement of the brake pedal which is accompanied by noises This is consciously intended to provide the driver with the information that the wheels are tending to lock ABS control range You must always keep the brake pedal depressed to enable the ABS to optimally control the brake application in this braking range Never interrupt the application of the brakes As soon as the vehicle speed has increased to about 20 km hour an automatic test procedure is conducted during which you will be able to hear a pumping noise for about 1 second Z WARNING The ABS can also not overcome the physical limits of your vehicle Please do not forget this particularly when driving on icy or wet road surfaces If the ABS is operating within the control range adapt your speed immediately to the conditions of the road surface and the traffic situation The increased safety offered by the ABS must not tempt you to take greater risks than otherwise risk of an accident The normal braking system is still fully functional if there is an ABS fault Visit a specialist garage immediately and adjust your style of driving according to the damage to the ABS as you will not know how great the damage is and the limitation it is placing on the braking efficiency Note e A warning light comes on if a fault occurs in the ABS system gt page 30
256. lowing functions are initially deactivated or are no longer able to operate fault free Operation Operating measure Electrical power window operational faults page 43 Car radio or radio navigation system Entering see the operating instructions for the code number the car radio or radio navigation system Set hours gt page 18 Data in the multi functional indicator are 1 deleted page 18 We recommend having the vehicle checked by an authorised Skoda Service Partner to ensure full functionality of all electrical systems m Replacing the battery You should only replace a battery with a new battery of the same capacity voltage 12 V amperage and of the same size Suitable vehicle battery types are available from authorised Skoda service partners We recommend you have a battery change carried out by an authorised Skoda service partner to ensure the new battery is fitted properly and the original battery id disposed according to the regulations Caution Vehicles with a START STOP system are fitted with special battery types which allow the battery control unit to control the energy level during the recurring engine start This battery may only be replaced with a battery of the same type General Maintenance g For the sake of the environment Batteries contain poisonous substances such as sulphuric acid and lead They must be disposed of in an environmentally friendly manner and under no circumstances must the
257. luid One may only use new genuine brake fluid from Skoda Auto The brake fluid must comply with one of the following standards or specifications e VW 50114 e FMVSS 116 DOT4 e DIN ISO 4925 CLASS 4 We recommend that you have the brake fluid replaced by an authorised Skoda Service Partner as part of an Inspection Service Z WARNING Using old brake fluid can result in severe stress on the brakes because of the formation of vapour bubbles in the brake system This greatly impairs the braking efficiency and thus also the safety of your vehicle Caution Brake fluid damages the paintwork of the vehicle amp For the sake of the environment Due to problems of disposal the specialist tools and expertise required we recom mend you have the brake fluid replacement carried out by an authorised Skoda service partner E Battery General information Improper manipulation of the vehicle battery can cause damage to it For this reason we recommend you have all work on the vehicle battery carried out by an authorised Skoda service partner There is a risk of injuries scalding accidents and burns when carrying out any work on the battery and on the electrical system For this reason it is essential to comply gt with the warning instructions gt A stated below and with the general applicable rules of safety Z WARNING e The battery acid is strongly corrosive and must therefore be handled with
258. lways be firmly pushed up to avoid the steering wheel altering its position unintentionally when driving risk of accident m Quick Reference Guide Seat belt height adjuster Q Adjusting a seat in a forward back direction Adjusting height of seat Adjust the angle of the seat backrest Further information gt page 56 Adjusting the front seats Variant 1 and gt page 57 Adjusting the front seats Variant 2 Z WARNING Only adjust the driver seat when the vehicle is stationary risk of injury m 6 Fig 4 Front seat Seat belt height A eom adjuster Electric exterior mirror adjustment To adjust the belt height press the height adjuster and move it up or down gt fig 4 Then pull firmly on the belt to ensure that the seat belt height adjuster has correctly locked in place Further information gt page 115 Seat belt height adjuster on the front seats Z WARNING Adjust the height of the belt in such a way that the shoulder part of the belt is Fig 6 Inner part of door Rotary knob positioned approximately across the middle of your shoulder on no account across your neck m Adjusting the front seats Adjusting the left hand exterior mirror mi Heating of the external mirror L R Adjusting the right hand exterior mirror 0 Switching off operating control B5J 5023F Fig 5 Controls at seat Version 1 version 2 Using the system
259. ly be engaged when the vehicle is stationary gt A If you wish to move the selector lever into or out of this position you must press the Shiftlock button in the handle of the selector lever and at the same time depress the brake pedal R Reverse gear Reverse gear must only be engaged when the vehicle is stationary and the engine idling gt A The brake pedal must be depressed and at the same time the Shiftlock must be pressed if you wish to obtain the selector lever positions R P or N When the ignition is switched on and the selector lever is in position R the reverse lights will come on Q Neutral The transmission is in Neutral in this position The brake pedal must be depressed if the lever is in its position for longer than 2 seconds in order to move the selector lever out of the position N into the position D with the ignition switched on ona vehicle travelling at less than 5 km hour or on a stationary vehicle Position for driving forward When the selector lever is in this position the forward gears are shifted up and down automatically in line with engine load vehicle speed and the dynamic shift programme You must depress the brake pedal if you wish to move into position D from N when the vehicle is travelling at less than 5 km hour or is stationary gt In certain circumstances e g when driving in mountainous regions or when towing a trailer it may be beneficial to select the manual shift p
260. ly bring the vehicle to a standstill without sudden steering movements and without sharp braking e in order to ensure a proper functioning of the tyre inflation pressure control system it is necessary to carry out the basic setting again every 10 000 km or 1x a year m Intelligent Technology 39 Diesel particle filter diesel engine In the diesel particle filter the resulting soot particles are collected and burnt during the combustion of diesel fuel TMB0G65J3973000122 542474 FABIA JDA 8102 CE 7IKWBMT EOA 100 SSL 5RQ IKK GFF 1AT SFE IN2 INL HZJ 4LF 4R3 SNC 4QU 4x3 eh BGL GYO SAK SRM 3X1 4K3 B01 GO2 QN3 7X1 9ZW BWO 7A2 JGA DA Fig 133 Vehicle data sticker G0 76G LOB Code 7GG 7MB or 7MG on the vehicle data sticker see gt fig 133 indicates that your vehicle is equipped with a diesel particle filter The vehicle data sticker is located on the floor of the luggage compartment and is also stated in the Service schedule The diesel particle filter filters the soot particles completely from the exhaust The soot is collected in the diesel particle filter and burnt regularly To assist this proce dure we recommend not to drive regularly over short distances If the diesel particle filter is full or it is not functioning correctly it is indicated by the warning light gt Z WARNING e The diesel particle filter achieves very high temperatures Therefore do not park at points where the hot filter co
261. m is pressed Conditions that enable an automatic engine start without driver intervention The vehicle moves at a speed of more than 3 km h The difference between the set and the actual temperature in the interior is too great The battery voltage is too low The pressure in the brake system is not sufficient Messages in the instrument cluster valid for vehicles without information display ERROR START STOP START STOP NOT POSSIBLE Error in the START STOP system Automatic engine shut down is not pos sible START STOP ACTIVE Automatic engine shut down stop phase SWITCH OFF IGNITION START MANUALLY Switch off the ignition Start the engine manually N WARNING e Ifthe engine is switched off neither the brake booster nor the electrohy draulic power steering operates Never let the vehicle roll with the engine switched off 9a Starting off and Driving Caution If the START STOP system is used at very high outside temperatures over a longer period of time the vehicle battery can be damaged a Note e Achange in ambient temperature can affect the temperature inside the battery with several hours delay For example if the vehicle is standing outside for a long period of time at a temperature below freezing or is in direct sunlight it may take several hours until the temperature inside the battery reaches the appropriate temperature for the START STOP system In some cases it is necessa
262. mation on the type plate of the towing device are merely test data for the towing device The data relating to your vehicle which is often less than this test data can be found in your vehicle registration docu ments Distribution of the load Distribute the load in the trailer in such a way that any heavy items are located as close as possible to the axle Secure the items to prevent them slipping Tyre pressure Correct the tyre inflation pressure on your vehicle for that of fully laden gt page 169 The inflation pressure of the tyres fitted to the trailer adjust in accord ance with the manufacturer s recommendation Exterior mirrors You have to have additional exterior mirrors fitted if you are not able to see the traffic behind the trailer with the standard rear view mirrors Both exterior mirrors should be attached to folding arms Adjust the mirrors so that they provide you with an adequate field of view to the rear Headlights Before starting off with a hitched trailer also check the setting of the headlights Alter the setting as necessary with the aid of the headlight beam adjuster gt page 48 Detachable ball head The ball rod is detachable on vehicles with towing device and suppliable from Skoda original accessories It is stowed together with separate fitting instructions in the spare wheel well in the luggage compartment of the vehicle a Note We recommend that you also have your vehicle inspected
263. mes into direct contact with dry grass or other combustible materials risk of fire Never use additional underbody protection or corrosion protection agents for the exhaust pipes catalytic converters diesel particle filter or heat shields When the engine reaches its operating temperature these substances might ignite risk of fire a Note When using diesel fuel with high sulphur content the life of the diesel particle filter is clearly reduced A specialist garage will be able to tell you which countries use only diesel fuel with high sulphur content m Driving Tips 140 Driving and the Environment Driving and the Environment The first 1500 kilometres and then afterwards A new engine The engine has to be run in during the first 1500 kilometres Up to 1000 kilometres Do not drive faster than 3 4 of the mamimum speed of the gear in use that is 3 4 of the maximum permissible engine speed Donotuse full throttle Avoid high engine revolutions Donot tow a trailer From 1000 up to 1500 kilometres Increase the power output of the engine gradually up to the full speed of the gear engaged that is up to the maximum permissible engine revolutions During the first operating hours the engine has higher internal friction than later until all of the moving parts have harmonized The driving style which you adopt during the first approx 1 500 kilometres plays a decisive part in the success of running
264. mes outside of the operative range of the equipment or the battery on the remote control was replaced a0 Unlocking and locking This means it is necessary to synchronise the code as follows e Press any button on the remote control pressing of the button means that the door will unlock with the key within 1 minute m Anti theft alarm system Description The anti theft alarm system increases the level of protection against people seeking to break into the vehicle The system triggers audible and visual warning signals if an attempt is made to break into the vehicle How is the alarm system activated The anti theft alarm system is activated automatically when the vehicle is locked with the key on the driver s door or by using the radio remote control It is activated 30 seconds after locking the door How is the alarm system deactivated The anti theft alarm system is deactivated if the vehicle is unlocked by only using the radio remote control The anti theft alarm system is reactivated if the vehicle is not opened within 30 seconds after transmitting the radio signal Once you unlock the vehicle by inserting the key into the driver door you then have to insert the key into the ignition lock and switch the ignition on within 15 seconds after opening the door in order to deactivate the anti theft alarm system The alarm will be triggered if you do not switch on the ignition within 15 seconds When is the alarm triggered
265. mperage risk of fire This may also cause damage at another part of the electrical system 2 Interior Have the electrical system checked as quickly as possible by a specialist garage 3 Electrical auxiliary heating system if a newly inserted fuse blows again after a short time 4 ESP a Note 5 Electrohydraulic power steering We recommend that you have these fuses replaced by a specialist garage 6 Glow plugs Some vehicles are only fitted with the cover 8 page 189 fig 167 on the IESE right m 8 The radiator fan 9 The air conditioning system 10 ABS 11 Central control unit 12 Automatic gearbox electrical auxiliary heating system Caution Please refer to the following guidelines gt in Replace fuses at the battery auto matic gearbox on page 189 m Bulbs Replacing bulbs The relevant lamp must always be switched off before a light bulb is replaced Do not take hold of the glass bulb with naked fingers even the smallest amount of dirt reduces the working life of the light bulb Use a clean cloth serviette or some thing similar Defect light bulbs should only be replaced with light bulbs of the same type The designation is located on the light socket or the glass bulb Changing certain bulbs is not something which you can do yourself but requires to be done by a specialist Other parts of the vehicle must be removed in order to change the light bulbs This applies in particular to bulbs which can only
266. mption to the speed of your vehicle in the relevant gears Fuel consumption in 1st gear is the highest while that in 5th or the 6th gear is the lowest a Note Also use the information supplied by the multi functional indicator gt page 18 m Avoiding full throttle Driving more slowly means saving fuel Fig 135 Fuel consumption in litres 100 max km and speed in km h Sensitive use of the accelerator will not only significantly reduce fuel consumption but also positively influence environmental pollution and wear of your vehicle You should avoid exploiting the top speed of your vehicle wherever possible Fuel consumption pollutant emissions and vehicle noises increase disproportionally at high speeds The gt fig 135 shows the ratio of fuel consumption to the speed of your vehicle You will cut your fuel consumption by half if you only make use three quarters of the possible top speed of your vehicle m Reducing idling Idling also costs fuel It is worthwhile switching off the engine in a traffic jam or when waiting at a level crossing or at traffic lights with a lengthy red phase Even after just 30 40 seconds you will have saved more fuel than that is needed when you start the engine up again If an engine is only idling it takes much longer for it to reach its normal operating temperature Wear and tear and pollutant emissions though are particularly high in the warming up phase This is why you should drive
267. n 2 or 2D fig 36 Pull the switch into position The fog lights light up at the same time If the vehicle is not fitted with fog lights the rear fog light is switched on by turning the light switch to the position ZO and is pulled out directly to the position 2 This switch does not have two positions but only one position The warning light QF lights up in the instrument cluster when the rear fog light is switched on gt page 25 Only the rear fog light of the trailer lights up if the vehicle is fitted with a towing device from Skoda original accessoriesand when you are towing a trailer which is fitted with the rear fog light 5 If both switch on versions are conflicting for example if the steering wheel is turned to the left and the right turn signal light is switched on the turn signal light has the higher priority a8 Lights and Visibility Caution The rear fog light should only be switched on if visibility is particularly poor conform with any varying legal provisions to avoid dazzling vehicles behind your vehicle m Headlamp range adjustment ZO Once the low beam is switched on you can then adapt the range of the headlights to the load of the vehicle Fig 37 Dash panel Lights and Visibility Turn the control dial gt fig 37 until you have adjusted the low beam so that oncoming traffic is not dazzled Settings The positions correspond approximately to the following vehicle loads Front
268. n Itr 100 km and CO in g km Urban 75 Non urban 4 7 Combination 5 7 CO gt emission combination 132 Weight in kg Permissible gross weight 1545 1515 1565 1520 Unloaden weight ready for work 1090 m0 800 500 gt 800 450 Permissible trailer load trailer braked unbraked 900 500 900 450 a Vehicles of category N1 b Uphills up to 12 Uphills up to 8 Technical Data 203 Engine 1 2 1 51 kW EU5 EU2 DDK Output kW per rpm Max torque Nm per rpm Number of cylinders Displacement cm 51 5400 112 3000 3 1198 Performances FABIA ESTATE CAR Maximum speed km h 163 164 Acceleration 0 100 km h s 14 9 15 0 Fuel consumption in Itr 100 km and CO in g km Urban 7 3 6 8 Non urban 4 5 4 3 2 Combination 562 CO emission combination 128 119 Weight in kg Permissible gross weight 1550 1520 1570 1525 Unloaden weight ready for work 1095 115 800 500 800 450 Permissible trailer load trailer braked unbraked d d 900 500 900 450 E a The value corresponds to the status with Greentec package b Vehicles of category N1 Uphills up to 12 d Uphills up to 8 Technical data 204 Technical Data Engine 1 2 1 63 kW TSI EU5 Output kW per rpm Max torque Nm per rpm Number of cylinders Displacement cm 63 4800 160 1500 3500 4 1197 Performances FABIA ESTATE CAR Maximum speed km h 177 178 Acceleration 0 100 km h s TA 11 8 Fuel
269. n be entered as an interconnected spoken row of digits complete number in the form of order of digits separation through a brief voice pause or through individually spoken digits After each order of digits separation through brief voice pause all of the digits detected up to now are repeated by the system The digits 0 9 symbols X are permitted The system detects no continuous digit combinations such as twenty three but only individually spoken digits two three m Call name Switch on the voice operation gt page 107 Switch on voice control dialogue Give the command CALL XYZ after the signal tone Example for calling the name from the phone book Voice command Announcement CALL XYZ e g WORK Say home work mobile XYZ work is dialed Store voice recording of a contact If automatic name recognition does not work reliably for some contacts you can save an individual voice entry for this contact in the menu item Phone book Voice Tag Record You can also store your own voice entry using voice control in the menu FURTHER OPTIONS m Music playback via Bluetooth The universal telephone preinstallation GSM IIl makes it possible to play back music via Bluetooth from the devices such as MP3 player mobile phone or notebook In order to enable the music playback via Bluetooth it is necessary to connect the terminal device with the hands free system in the menu Phone Bluet
270. n cold winter weather m Locking cylinder Use special products designed for this purpose to deice the locking cylinders Note When washing your vehicle ensure that as little water as possible gets into the locking cylinders m Wheels Steel wheels You should also thoroughly wash the wheels and wheel trims when giving your vehicle its regular wash This prevents any brake dust dirt and road salt from sticking to the wheel hubs You can remove stubborn brake abrasion adhering to the wheels with an industrial cleaner Touch up any damage to the paintwork on the wheels before rust is able to form Light alloy wheels Regular care of light alloy wheels is necessary in order to retain their decorative appearance over long periods It is particularly important to remove regularly any road salt and brake abrasion from light alloy wheels otherwise the light metal will suffer Wash thoroughly and then treat the wheels with a protective product for light alloy wheels which does not contain any acidic components We recommend to apply a hard wax layer onto the wheel hubs every three months You must not use any products which cause abrasion when treating the wheel hubs Any damage to the paint layer on the wheel hubs must be touched up immediately Z WARNING One should remember when cleaning the wheels that moisture ice and road salt may adversely affect braking efficiency risk of an accident Note Severe layers of
271. n vehicles with the START STOP system the negative cable of the charger must not be connected directly to the negative pole of the vehicle battery but only to the engine earth gt fig 160 m the vehicle General Manual transmission cars can be towed in with a tow bar or a tow rope or with the front or rear wheels raised Automatic transmission cars can be towed in with a tow bar or a tow rope or with the front wheels raised If the vehicle is raised at rear the automatic gearbox is damaged A tow bar is safest way of towing a vehicle and also minimises any shocks You can use a tow rope only if a suitable tow bar is not available Please pay attention to the following instructions if you are going to use a tow rope Driver of the towing vehicle Release the clutch particularly gently when starting off or depress the acceler ator particularly gently if your vehicle is fitted with an automatic gearbox In manual transmission cars do not hit the gas pedal until the rope is taught The maximum towing speed is 50 km h Driver of the towed vehicle Switch the ignition on so that the steering wheel is not blocked and you can also operate the turn signal lights the headlight flasher the windscreen wipers and windscreen washer system Take the vehicle out of gear or move the selector lever into position N if your vehicle is fitted with an automatic gearbox Note that the brake servo unit and power steering only operat
272. nboard computer Introduction The multi functional indicator appears in the display gt page 19 fig 18 or in the information display gt page 22 depending on the equipment fitted to your vehicle The multi functional indicator offers you a range of useful information The outside temperature page 20 Driving time gt page 20 Current fuel consumption page 20 Average fuel consumption gt page 20 gt Range gt page 20 Distance driven gt page 21 Average speed gt page 21 Current speed gt page 21 oil temperature gt page 21 Warning against excessive speeds gt page 21 In vehicles which are fitted out with an information display it is possible to switch off the display of some information a Note Incertain national versions the displays appear in the Imperial system of meas ures e ifthe display of the second speed is activated in mph the current speed is not indicated in km h on the display m Memory vT p a B5J 6103H Fig 18 Multi functional indicator The multi functional indicator is equipped with two automatic memories The selected memory is displayed in the middle of the display field fig 18 The data of the single trip memory memory 1 is shown if a 1 appears in the display A 2 shown in the display means that data relates to the total distance memory memory 2 Switching over the memory takes place with the button B fig 19 on the wind shield wiper lever
273. ndscreen wiper arm away from the windscreen Press the locking button in order to unlock the wiper blade and pull off in the direction of arrow Attach the wiper blade Push the wiper blade until it locks up to the stop Check whether the windscreen wiper blade is correctly attached Fold the windscreen wiper arm back onto the windscreen Windscreen wiper blades in proper condition are essential to obtain good visibility Wiper blades should not be allowed to become dirtied by dust insect remains and preserving wax Juddering or smearing of the wiper blades could then be due to wax residues left on the windscreen by vehicle washing in automatic vehicle wash systems It is there fore important to degrease the lips of the winscreen wiper blades after every pass through an automatic vehicle wash system Z WARNING e Ifthe windscreen wipers are handled carelessly there is a risk of damage to the windscreen You should clean the wiper blades regularly with a windscreen cleaner in order to avoid any smears Clean the windscreen wiper blades with a sponge or cloth if it is very dirty for example from insect residues sa Lights and Visibility ZN WARNING continued Replace the windscreen wiper blades once or twice a year for safety reasons Windscreen wiper blades are available at specialist garages m Replacing the rear window wiper blade version 1 Fig 47 Wiper blade for the rear window R
274. neral Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical data Layout of this Owner s Manual explanations Layout of this Owner s Manual explanations The Owner s Manual has been systematically designed in order to make it easy for you to find and absorb the information you require Z WARNING The most important notes are marked with the heading WARNING These WARNING notes draw your attention to a serious risk of accident or injury While reading the text you will frequently encounter a double arrow followed by a small warning symbol This symbol is intended to draw your attention to a WARNING note at the end of the section to which you must pay careful atten tion Chapters table of contents and subject index The text of the Owner s manual is divided into relatively short sections which are combined into easy to read chapters The chapter you are reading at any particular moment is highlighted at the bottom right of the page The Table of contents is arranged according to the chapters and the detailed Subject index at the end of the Owner s Manual helps you to rapidly find the infor mation you are looking for O Caution Sections A Caution note draws your attention to the possibility of damage to your vehicle y f The majority of Sections apply to all models e g damage to gearbox or points out general risks of an accident Since there is a wide range of different equipment and options available it is clearly amp
275. net partition Combi 04 Bicycle holder in the luggage compartment ROOPTACK cass cad onediee cd amaitvan ace iia iieis Front cup holder vi c2evtaccwaled Siveendaveee se Rearcup holder sicsiccdaisigeawan ened area Parking ticket holder ccc cece eee eee ee ASRIY crrciiicriereisii vini enann erences Cigarette lighters and power sockets Storage compartments cece eee eee Heating and air conditioning system INGHODUCTION ceni ranerne sman Air outlet VENTS weecicciesiigeernienesaay enees Heating 24 scdddennutraeniamanider battens e Ei Air conditioning system manual temperature control Climatronic automatic air conditioning Starting off and Driving iecere Setting steering wheel position Ignition IOK ainiin a tists Wace Starting the engine cece eee ee Switching off the engine cece eee ee 45 45 49 51 52 54 56 56 57 58 59 60 60 64 66 67 69 70 71 71 71 72 73 77 77 78 78 80 83 86 86 86 87 88 Shifting manual gea Handbrake Parking aid DOK sireno en Na Cruise control system CCS cece eee eee START STOP Automatic gearbox Automatic gearbox Communication Multifunction steering wheel 0 008 Universal telephone Voice control preinstallation GSM II Music playback via Bluetooth Inputs AUX IN and M P
276. ng a child on the front passenger seat please comply with the the sitting position or seated position is not correct gt Z in Important safety infor appropriate national regulations regarding the use of child safety seats mation regarding the front airbag system m There must not by any further persons animals or objects positioned between the front seated occupants and the deployment area of the airbag e The steering wheel and the surface of the airbag module in the dash panel on the passenger side must not be stuck onto covered or modified in any other way These parts should only be cleaned with a dry cloth or a cloth moistened with water No objects such as cup holders mobile phone mounts etc may be The specially developed airbag allows the gas to flow out of the inflated airbag ina controlled manner depending on the load of the particular car occupant in order to cushion head and chest areas The airbag then deflates subsequently to such an extent after an accident to again provide a clear view forward ZN WARNING continued attached to the covers of the airbag modules or be located within the immediate area e No modifications of any kind may be made to parts of the airbag system Any work on the airbag system including installing and removing system compo nents because of other repair work e g removing the steering wheel must only be carried out by a specialist garage Never carry out changes on the
277. nic gt page 85 The air inlet in front of the windscreen must be free of ice snow or leaves in order to ensure that the heating and cooling systems operate properly After switching on the cooling Condensation from the evaporator of the air condi tioning may drip down and form a puddle below the vehicle This is quite normal and not an indication of a leak Z WARNING For your own safety and that of other road users ensure that all the windows are free of ice snow and misting Please familiarize yourself about how to correctly operate the heating and ventilation systems how to demist and defrost the windows as well as with the cooling mode You should not leave recirculated air mode on over a longer period of time as stale air may result in fatigue in the driver and occupants divert your atten tion and also cause the windows to mist up The risk of having an accident increases Switch recirculated air mode off as soon as the windows begin misting up a Note The used air streams out through the air removal openings in the luggage compartment We recommend that you do not smoke in the vehicle when the recirculating air mode is operating since the smoke which is drawn at the evaporator from the inte rior of the vehicle forms deposits in the evaporator of the air conditioning system This produces a permanent odour when the air conditioning system is operating Using the system Heating and air
278. nition and then flashes for 12 seconds afterwards in 2 second intervals The following text will be displayed in the information display Airbag belt tensioner deactivated If the passenger front airbag has been switched off using the switch for switching off airbags in the end face of the dash panel on the front passenger side the warning light comes on for 4 seconds after the ignition has been switched on e switching off the airbag is indicated in the middle of the dash panel by the lighting up of the yellow indicator light in display PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF gt page 123 Z WARNING Have the airbag system checked immediately by a specialist garage if a fault exists Otherwise there is a risk of the airbag not being activated in the event of an accident a Note Further information about switching off airbags gt page 123 Deactivating airbags m Diesel particlulate filter diesel engine If the warning light comes on this means that soot has accumulated in the diesel particle filter because of the frequent short distances 32 Instruments and warning lights In order to clean the diesel particlulate filter the vehicle should be driven at an even If the seat belt has not been fastened by the driver or front passenger a permanent speed of at least 60 km h at engine speeds of 1 800 2 500 rpm for at least warning signal sounds at vehicle speeds greater than 20 km h and simultaneously 15 min
279. not an indication of a fire in the vehicle Inthe event of an accident in which the airbags are deployed the interior lighting comes on if the switch for the interior light is in the door contact position the hazard warning light is switched on all the doors are unlocked the fuel supply to the engine is interrupted m Front airbags Description of the front airbags The airbag system is not a substitute for the seat belt A p i OETA Fig 115 Driver airbag in the steering wheel front passenger airbag in the dash panel The front airbag for the driver is housed in the steering wheel fig 115 left The front airbag for the front passenger is housed in the dash panel above the storage compartment gt fig 115 right The installation positions are each marked with the AIRBAG logo The front airbag system in combination with three point safety belts offers addi tional protection for the head and chest area of the driver and front passenger in the event of a frontal collision of major severity gt Z in Important safety informa tion regarding the front airbag system on page 119 The airbag is not a substitute for the seat belt but is part of the complete passive vehicle safety concept Please note that an airbag can only offer you optimal protection in combination with a seat belt which is fastened Apart from their normal protective function a further task of the seat belts
280. not run over the belly Tighten the belt webbing over your hip if neces sary e Please comply with any differing national legal regulations regarding the use of child safety seats m Transporting children safely Attaching a child seat using the ISOFIX system B5J 5014H Fig 129 Locking eyes ISOFIX system Push the ISOFIX child seat into the installed mounting funnels There are two locking eyes between the rear exterior seat backrest and the surface of the seat itself on both sides for fixing the ISOFIX system child seat in place Insert the mounting funnels a onto the locking eyes amp between the seat backrest and the seat cushion fig 129 Push the notched arms of the child seat into the locking eyes until they are heard to lock in place gt fig 129 Pull on both sides of the child seat One can mount a child safety seat using the ISOFIX system quickly easily and reli ably Please pay close attention to instructions from the manufacturer of the child safety seat when installing and removing the seat Child seats fitted with the ISOFIX system can only be mounted and fixed in a vehicle fitted with an ISOFIX system when these child seats have been released for this type of vehicle according to the ECE R 44 standard Child safety seats with the fixing system ISOFIX can be obtained from Skoda orig inal accessories Complete installation instructions are enclosed with th
281. nt passenger airbag when attaching in excep tional circumstances a child safety seat on the front passenger seat where the child is seated with its back facing in direction of travel gt page 123 e Please comply with any differing national legal regulations regarding the use of child safety seats If this is not done a child seated on the front passenger seat may suffer severe or even fatal injuries if the front passenger airbag or airbags are deployed You should have the front passenger airbag or airbags reactivated just as soon as you no longer use a child safety seat on the front passenger seat m Child safety seats in Group 1 Fig 126 Child seat with padded table in Group 1 installed on rear seat bench facing the direction of travel Child seats in Group 1 are for babies and small children up to 4 years of age with a weight of between 9 and 18 kilograms It is best for children in the lower range of this group to use a child seat which allows the child to sit with its back to the direc tion of travel It is best for children in the upper range of the Group O to use a child seat which allows the child to sit fig 126 in the direction of travel Child seats in which the child is facing with its back towards the direction of travel should not be used on the front passenger seat when the vehicle is fitted with a front passenger airbag gt page 126 Use of child safety seats on the front passenger seat Z WARNIN
282. nued e The lap part of the belt should be positioned as low as possible at the pelvis of an expectant mother in order to avoid exerting any pressure on the lower abdomen fig 112 right e Always ensure that the webbing of the seat belts is properly routed Seat belts which are not correctly adjusted can themselves cause injuries even in minor accidents A seat belt which is hanging too loose can result in injuries as your body is moved forward by the kinetic energy produced in an accident and is then suddenly held firm by the seat belt e Only insert the lock tongue into the lock which is the correct one for your seat This will affect the protection which the belt offers and increase the risk of an injury m Seat belt height adjuster on the front seats Fig 113 Front seat Seat belt height adjuster B5J 4022H The seat belt height adjuster makes it possible for you to adapt the routing of the front three point seat belt in the area of the shoulder to match your body size To adjust the belt height press the height adjuster and move it up or down gt fig 113 Then pull firmly on the belt to ensure that the seat belt height adjuster has correctly locked in place Seat belts Z WARNING Adjust the height of the belt in such a way that the shoulder part of the seat belt is positioned approximately across the middle of your shoulder on no account across your neck Note It is also poss
283. nuously if you hold the rocker button pressed in the RES position Once the car has reached the desired speed release the rocker button The set speed is then stored in the memory Slower You can decrease the stored speed by pressing the rocker button 8 in the SET position Holding down the pushbutton pressed in the SET position will cause the speed of the vehicle to reduce continuously Once the car has reached the desired speed release the rocker button The set speed is then stored in the memory Ifyou release the rocker button when the car is travelling at a speed of less than 30 km h the speed is not stored the memory is erased It is then necessary to again store the speed with the rocker button B in the position SET after an increase in speed of the vehicle to more than 30 km hour m Switching off the cruise control system temporarily You can switch off the cruise control system temporarily by depressing the brake pedal or clutch pedal on vehicles fitted with an automatic gearbox only with the brake pedal You can switch off temporarily the cruise control system if you press the switch in the middle position The set speed remains stored in the memory The Resumption of the stored speed is achieved by releasing the brake or clutch pedal on vehicles fitted with automatic gearbox only after releasing the brake pedal and after shortly pressing the rocker button 8 page 91 fig 99 into the position R
284. of a physical disability you have installed other seats e g orthopaedic seats without side airbags Monitoring the airbag system The functionality of the airbag system is also monitored electronically when one airbag has been switched off If the airbag was switched off using diagnostic equipment The airbag indicator light lights up for 3 seconds each time the ignition is switched on and then flashes after that for about 12 seconds Airbag system a23 If the airbag was switched off using the airbag switch on the side of the dash panel the airbag indicator light in the instrument cluster comes on for about 3 seconds each time the ignition is switched on e switching off the airbag is indicated by the lighting up of the indicator light in the display PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF 3 in the middle of the dash panel gt fig 122 right a Note Your authorised Skoda Service Partner will be able to advise you whether national legislation in your country allows airbags in your vehicle to be deactivated and which ones m Switch for the front passenger airbag B5J 7018H Fig 122 Switch for the front passenger airbag indicator light for a switched off front seat passenger airbag Only the front passenger airbag is deactivated with the switch Deactivating an airbag Switch off the ignition Turn the slot of the airbag switch using the ignition key in the direction of the arrow to the position OFF fig 122 left
285. olant which you use for replenishing the system must comply with one specific specification page 161 Coolant Do not use an alternative additive if the prescribed coolant additive is not available in exceptional cases Just top up the system with water and as soon as possible arrange adjustment to correct the mixing ratio of water and coolant additive again by a specialist garage Only use fresh coolant for topping up the system Do not fill up over the MAX marking Excess coolant which is heated up is forced out of the cooling system through the pressure relief valve in the cap of the coolant compensation bottle Wait until the engine has cooled down for a system which has suffered a major loss of coolant before pouring in coolant This is necessary to avoid engine damage Z WARNING The cooling system is pressurized Do not open the cap of the coolant expan sion bottle if the engine is still hot risk of scalding The coolant additive and thus all of the coolant is harmful to your health Avoid contact with the coolant Coolant vapours are also harmful to the health It is important therefore to always safely store any coolant additive in its orig inal container out of the reach of children risk of poisoning e fany splashes of coolant get into your eyes rinse out your eyes immediately with clear water and contact a doctor as soon as possible e You should also consult a doctor without delay if you have ina
286. ompartment gt page 76 A pin holder is located inside the lower flap Flexible storage compartment gt page 76 Clothes hooks gt page 76 A WARNING The storage compartments must always be closed when driving for safety A WARNING reasons E Please do not place anything on top of the dash panel Such objects might slide or fall down when driving when accelerating or cornering and may distract you from concentrating on the traffic situation risk of accident Ensure that when driving no objects from the centre console of from other storage possibilities may get into the footwell of the driver You would then no longer be able to apply the brakes operate the clutch or accelerator risk of accident m Using the system A Seats and Stowage Cooling of storage compartment on front passenger side Stowage compartment for spectacles The storage compartment can be fitted for vehicles with an air conditioning system with a closable inlet for cooled air Fig 83 Detail of the headliner Stowage compartment for spectacles EN Fig 81 Storage compartment Using cooling system Press on the lid of the stowage compartment the stowage compartment opens downwards gt fig 83 You can switch the cooling system on or off using the control dial gt fig 81 i O Caution Opening the air inlet when the air conditioning system is on causes fresh or interior e The compartment must only be opened when removing or insertin
287. on the covers of the airbags or within the immediate deployment range of airbags This might result in injuries to the occupants in the event of an accident Never leave a mobile phone on a seat on the dash panel or in another area from which it can be thrown during a sudden braking manoeuvre an accident or a collision In this case the occupants of the vehicle might be injured Note Observe the country specific regulations for the use of mobile phones in vehicles m Universal telephone preinstallation GSM II Introduction The universal telephone preinstallation GSM II is a built in hands free system it provides a voice operated convenience mode via the multifunction steering wheel or the radio navigation system All communication between a telephone and the hands free system of your vehicle can only be established with the help of the Bluetooth technology The adapter serves only for charging the telephone and for transmitting the signal to the external aerial of the vehicle To ensure an optimum signal transmission always leave the telephone with the adapter in the telephone cradle Furthermore the volume can be changed individually during the call at any time with the button for setting the radio or radio navigation system or with the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel Z WARNING Pay attention primarily to the traffic situation As the driver you are fully respon sible for road safety Use
288. on no account connect the cables wrongly risk of a cable fire Ensure that battery acid does not come into contact with the vehicle body otherwise damage could occur to the paintwork Donot place the battery in direct daylight in order to protect the battery housing from the effects of ultra violet light e If the vehicle was not used for 3 to 4 weeks the battery may have discharged This reason for this is that some equipment also draw current when in stand by e g control units You can prevent the discharging of the battery by disconnecting the negative terminal or charging the battery constantly with a very low charging current g For the sake of the environment A removed battery is a special type of waste which is harmful to the environment contact your specialist garage regarding disposing of the battery Note e Please also refer to the guidelines gt page 167 also after connecting the battery Batteries older than 5 years should be replaced m General Maintenance Inspecting and Replenishing Battery cover iS B5J 7021H Fig 145 The battery Pull up the cover automatic gearbox manual gearbox The battery is located in the engine compartment below a plastic box Unlock the interlock on the positive terminal side of the battery fig 145 left Pull up the cover in direction of arrow fig 145 left automatic gearbox or gt fig 145 right manual gearbox The ins
289. ooth Media player The operation of the music playback from the connected device can be performed via the hands free system with the voice control page 107 Basic voice commands for operating the telephone control unit or directly via the connected device a Note The device to be connected must support the Bluetooth profile A2DP see Owner s manual of the device to be connected This function is not available in vehicles fitted with the Blues car radio m EA Communication Inputs AUX IN and MDI The input AUX IN is located below the armrest of the front seats and is marked with The input MDI is located in the front below the front passenger storage compart ment The inputs AUX IN and MDI connect the external audio sources e g iPod or MP3 player and playback music from these devices via your radio or factory fitted car radio or radio navigation system The description of the operation can be found in the relevant Owner s Manual of your car radio or your radio navigation system a Note The loudspeakers in the vehicle are matched to a power output of the radio and radio navigation system of 4x 20 W m Safety Passive Safety Basic information Driving the safe way Passive safety measures reduce the risk of injury in accident situa tions In this section you will find important information tips and notes on the subject of passive safety in your vehicle We have combined everything here which yo
290. or a car with fixed service intervals QG2 We therefore recommend having the Service Interval Display reset only by an authorised Skoda Service Partner who is familiar with the procedure for resetting the display with a vehicle system tester Please refer to the brochure Service schedule for extensive information about the service intervals m Digital clock The time is set with the buttons G and gt page 15 fig 15 Select the display which you wish to change with the button 5 and carry out the change with the button In vehicles which are fitted out with the information display it is possible to set the time in the menu Time gt page 24 Z WARNING The clock should not be adjusted while driving for safety reasons but only when the vehicle is stationary m Gearshift indicator for changing gears 3 Fig 17 Shift recommendation for changing gears An information for the engaged gear a gt fig 17 is shown in the display of the instrument cluster In order to minimise the fuel consumption a recommendation for shifting into another gear is indicated in the display If the control unit recognises that it is appropriate to change the gear an arrow is shown in the display The arrow points up or down depending on whether it is recommended to shift into a higher or lower gear At the same time the recommended gear is indicated instead of the currently engaged gear A m Multi functional indicator o
291. or comes on when driving stop immediately and check the brake fluid in the reservoir page 164 Brake fluid If the fluid level has dropped below the MIN marking do not drive any further risk of accident Contact a Skoda dealer to obtain professional assistance m Handbrake The warning light also comes on if the handbrake is applied An audible warning is also given if you drive the vehicle for at least 3 seconds at a speed of more than 6 km h The following text will be displayed in the information display Release parking brake m Cruise control The warning light lights up when operating the speed regulating system m Airbag system Monitoring the airbag system The warning light comes on for a few seconds when the ignition is switched on Using the system Instruments and warning lights ra There is a fault in the system if the warning light does not go out or comes on or flashes while driving A This also applies if the warning light does not come on after the ignition is switched on The following text will be displayed in the information display Error Airbag The functionality of the airbag system is also monitored electronically when one airbag has been switched off The following situation applies if the front side and head airbags or belt tensioner have been switched off using the vehicle system tester The warning light lights up for 3 seconds after switching on the ig
292. order to connect a mobile phone with the hands free system it is necessary to connect the telephone to the hands free system Detailed information on this is provided in the operating instructions of your mobile phone The following steps must be carried out for the connection Activate the Bluetooth in your telephone and the visibility of the mobile phone Switch on the ignition Inthe information display choose the menu Phone Phone search and wait until the control unit has ended the search Select your mobile phone in the menu of the units found Confirm the PIN as standard 1234 Using the system Ifthe hands free system announces as standard SKODA_BT on the display of the mobile phone enter the PIN as standard 1234 within 30 seconds and wait until the connection is established After ending the connection confirm in the information display that a new user profile was created If no more free space is available for creating a new user profile delete an existing user profile If you have not managed to connect your mobile phone with the hands free system within 3 minutes after switching on the ignition switch the ignition off and then again on The visibility of the hands free system is established again for 3 minutes The visibility of the Bluetooth device is automatically switched off if the vehicle starts off or if the mobile phone connects to the device During the connecting procedure no othe
293. ore be run appropriately risk of accident Never drive with damaged tyres risk of accident Note Please observe the various differing legal requirements regarding tyres m Tyre life Fig 148 An opened fuel filler flap with a tyre size and tyre inflation pressure table The life of your tyres very much depends on the following points Tyre pressure The working life of tyres will be shortened considerably if the tyres are insufficiently or over inflated and this will have an adverse effect on the handling of your vehicle Correctly inflated tyres are of particular importance when travelling at high speeds It is therefore good to check the tyre pressure including that of the spare wheel at least once a month and also before setting off on a long trip The tyre inflation pressures for summer tyres are indicated on the inside of the fuel filler flap fig 148 The inflation pressures for winter tyres are 20 kPa 0 2 bar higher than those for summer tyres gt page 172 The tyre pressure should be at the highest pressure specified for your vehicle at all times General Maintenance Always check the inflation pressure of tyres when cold Do not reduce the higher pressure of warm tyres Adapt the inflation pressure of the tyres accordingly if your vehicle is carrying a significantly higher payload Tyre inflation pressure Tyre size 185 55 R15 The same inflation pressure values apply to tyres of the tyre size
294. ors are deactivated the indicator light in the safety switch 5 lights up Z WARNING e If you lock the vehicle from the outside do not leave any person in the vehicle since it is no longer possible to open the windows from the inside in an emergency o a Unlocking and locking Z WARNING continued e The system is fitted with a force limiter page 42 If there is an obstacle the closing process is stopped and the window goes down by several centimetres You should then take particular care when closing the windows You may other wise suffer severe injuries as a result of getting an arm for example jammed in the window tis recommended to deactivate the electrically operated power windows in the rear doors safety pushbutton S page 41 fig 32 when children are being transported on the rear seats Caution Keep the window glass clean to ensure that electric power windows work prop erly Inthe event of a freezing up of the windscreen first of all eliminate the ice gt page 151 and then operate the power windows otherwise the power window mechanism could be damaged a Note e After switching the ignition off it is still possible to open or close the windows for a further 10 minutes The power windows are switched off completely once you open the driver or front passenger door When driving always use the existing heating air conditioning and ventilation system for ventilatin
295. orting two bicycles tension the strap gt fig 72 between the saddles by pushing the bicycles apart Note Hangthe carabines at the ends of the strap into the lashing eyes behind the rear If a vehicle is not factory fitted with roof rails you can purchase them from Skoda seats Original accessories W Pull the strap through the tensioning clasp first of all on the one side and then on the other side Attachment points for base roof carrier Ifitis necessary the position of the bicycles in the vehicle can be additionally rectified Z WARNING When transporting passengers and objects which require the seats to be folded forwards ensure the safety of the passengers being transported Place the bicycles in the bicycle carrier in such a position that no collision between the steering arm and the rear window can occur E Ji Fig 73 Attachment points for base roof carrier gt Using the system Installing Insert the attachment points of the roof rack into the mounts of the body so that the pins of the attachment points grasp into the holes of the body a Note e Pay attention to the information regarding assembly and disassembly in the attached instructions e f you have any questions please contact a specialist garage m Roof load Distribute weight evenly over the roof luggage rack system The maximum permis sible roof load including roof rack system of 75 kg and the maximum permissible
296. ory This wax protection does not require to be inspected or re treated Please remove any small amount of wax which flows out of the cavities at high temperatures with a plastic scraper and clean the spot using petroleum cleaner Z WARNING Safety and environmental protection regulations should observed when using petroleum cleaner to remove wax a risk of fire m Care of the interior of vehicle Plastic parts artificial leather and cloths You can clean plastic parts and artificial leather with a moist cloth You should only treat such parts with special solvent free plastic cleaning and care products it does prove to be adequate Upholstery cloth and cloth trim on the doors luggage compartment cover headliner etc are best treated with special cleaning products using if necessary a dry foam and a soft sponge or brush Caution Solvent free cleaners attack the material and can damage it m Fabric covers of electrically heated seats Do not clean the seat covers moist as this may result in damage to the seat heating system Clean such covers using special agents for example dry foam m Natural leather Natural leather requires quite particular care and attention Leather should be treated from time to time according the following guidelines depending on how much it is used Normal cleaning Clean soiled areas of the leather with slightly moistened cotton or woollen cloth Severe soiling Clean
297. oster boosts the pressure which you generate with the brake pedal The necessary pressure is only generated when the engine is running Z WARNING Never switch off the engine before the vehicle is stationary The brake booster only operates when the engine is running Greater phys ical effort for braking is required when engine is switched off Because if you do not stop as normal this can cause an accident and severe injuries When stopping or braking with a petrol engine car and manual transmission in the low rev range press down the clutch Failure to do so may impair the func tioning of the brake booster You apply greater force than you are used to on the brake pedal danger of accident m Antilock brake system ABS ABS prevents the wheels locking when braking General The ABS contributes significantly to enhancing the active safety of your vehicle Compared to a car not fitted with the ABS brake system you are able to retain optimal steering ability even during a full brake application on a slippery road surface because the wheels do not lock up You must not expect however that the braking distance will be shorter under all circumstances as a result of the ABS The braking distance for example on gravel and fresh snow when you should anyway be driving slowly and cautiously will be longer Operating principle The brake pressure will be reduced on a wheel which is rotating at a speed which is too
298. ou can end the dialog yourself with the command CANCEL by pressing the button 4 briefly on the adapter by pressing the button longer on the multi function steering wheel a Note When there is an incoming call the dialog will be ended immediately m Using the system Communication 07 Voice commands Basic voice commands for operating the telephone control unit Voice command Action HELP After this command the system repeats all possible commands With this command you call up the contact from the GAUL ANZ phone book page 108 After this command for example the phone book can PHONE BOOK be repeated a voice entry for the contact can be updated or deleted etc CALL HISTORY Lists of dialed numbers missed calls etc After this command a phone number can be entered DIAL NUMBER which establishes a connection to the requested party After this command the system selects the last REENA selected number MUSIC pen from the mobile phone or another paired After this command the system offers other context FURTHER OPTIONS eee E SETTINGS Selection for setting Bluetooth dialogue etc CANCEL The dialogue is ended a In vehicles equipped with the Amundsen radio navigation system this function can be reached via the menu on the radio navigation system see the Amundsen Owner s manual After giving the command DIAL NUMBER the system requests the entry of a tele phone number The telephone number ca
299. ou having to depress the accelerator pedal This is only possible within the range which is permitted by the power output and braking power of the engine The cruise control system makes it possible particu larly on long journeys for you to rest your accelerator foot Z WARNING e For safety reasons the cruise control system must not be used in dense traffic or on unfavourable road surfaces such as icy roads slippery roads loose gravel risk of accident In order to prevent unintentional use of the cruise control system always switch off the system after use a Note e Models fitted with a manual gearbox Always depress the clutch pedal if you switch on the cruise control system when the gearbox is in Neutral Otherwise the engine can rev up unintentionally The cruise control system is not able to maintain a constant speed when driving on steep downhill sections The weight of the vehicle increases the speed at which it travels One should shift down in good time to a lower gear or slow the vehicle down by applying the foot brake Itis not possible on vehicles fitted with an automatic gearbox to switch on the cruise control system if the selector lever is in the position P N or R m Using the system Starting off and Driving lor Storing a speed Fig 99 Operating lever Rocker button and switch of the cruise control system B5J 6059H The cruise control system is operated by means of the
300. ourable effect on your fuel consumption 7 Only valid for some countries Adopting a sporty style of driving with rapid movements of the accelerator pedal combined with sharp acceleration and frequent changes in speed exploiting the top speed of the car or depressing the accelerator pedal kickdown function will cause the gearbox to switch over to this style of driving and shift down earlier with frequent changes in gears in comparison to the moderate style of driving Selecting the most appropriate driving programme for the particular style of driving is a continuous process Irrespective of this it is however possible to switch or shift down into a dynamic shift programme by depressing the accelerator rapidly The gearbox shifts down into a lower gear matching the speed of the car and this allows you to accelerate rapidly e g when overtaking without having to depress the accelerator pedal fully into the kickdown range The original programme will be reactivated to match your particular style of driving once the gearbox has shifted up again When driving in hilly regions the gears are selected to match uphill and downhill sections This avoids the gearbox frequently shifting up and down when negoti ating an uphill stretch When driving downhill it is possible to shift down into the Tiptronic position in order to exploit the engine brake torque m Tiptronic The Tiptronic allows the driver to also shift gears manually 10 14
301. ously both to the front occupants of the car seated on the side on which the collision occurs as well as to the rear occupants Any impact of the head against parts of the interior or objects outside of the car is cushioned by the inflated head airbag The reduction in any impact to the head and the resultant minimizing of any movements of the head additionally reduce the risk of injuries to the neck area The head airbag also offers additional protection in the case of an offset impact by covering the front door pillar In certain accident situations the front side and head airbag are simultaneously deployed The airbags inflate in fractions of a second and at a high speed in order to be able to offer that additional protection in the event of an accident A grey white non harmful gas is released when airbag is inflated This is perfectly normal and is not an indication of a fire in the vehicle m ment area of the head airbags if any objects such as ball point pens etc are attached to them This might result in injuries to the occupants if the head airbag is deployed Installing impermissible accessories in the area of the head airbags may considerably impair the protection offered by the head airbag in the event of it being deployed When the deployed head airbag is inflated parts of the acces sories fitted may in certain circumstances be thrown into the interior of the car and cause injuries to the occupants gt page 174
302. ove the licence plate is deactivated when starting off or as of aspeed of more than 5 km hour for vehicles with central locking The function of the hand grip is activated again when the vehicle has stopped and a door is opened E E Unlocking and locking Emergency unlocking of the boot lid Fig 29 Emergency unlocking of the boot lid If there is a fault in the central locking you can open the boot lid as follows Fold the backrest of the rear seat forwards page 59 Insert a screwdriver or similar tool into the opening in the trim in the direction of arrow a fig 29 to the stop Unlock the lock 3 under the trim in the direction of arrow Open the boot lid luggage compartment door m Remote control Description You can use the remote control key e to unlock and lock the vehicle e unlocking boot lid electrically open and close the windows The transmitter with the battery is housed in the handle of the remote control key The receiver is located in the interior of the car The operating range of the remote control key is approx 10 m But this range can be reduced if the batteries are weak The key has a fold open key bit which can be used for unlocking and locking the car manually and also for starting the engine If a lost key is replaced or if the receiver unit has been repaired or a new unit installed it is then necessary for an authorised Skoda Service Partner to initialise the system Only af
303. panel joints if you spray your vehicle in winter down with a hose risk of freezing Do not use any insect sponges rough kitchen sponges or similar cleaning prod ucts risk of damage to the surface of paintwork amp For the sake of the environment Only wash your vehicle at washing bays specifically reserved for this purpose This ensures that no water which may be contaminated by oil flows into the sewage system It is not even permitted to wash your vehicle in certain areas except at such specific washing bays m Washing with a high pressure cleaner When you wash your vehicle with a high pressure cleaner it is essential to comply with the instructions for use of the cleaning equipment This applies in particular to the pressure used and to the spraying distance Maintain a sufficiently large distance to soft materials such as rubber hoses or insulation material On no account use circular spray nozzles or so called dirt cutters Z WARNING It is particularly important that you do not clean tyres with circular spray jets Damage may occur even at a relatively large spraying distance and if sprayed only for a short time Caution The water containing wax must be no hotter than 60 C otherwise the vehicle can be damaged m Wax treatment Good wax treatment is an effective way of protecting the paintwork from harmful environmental influences and minor mechanical damage The vehicle must be treated with
304. partment and cause injuries a Note e The fire extinguisher must comply with the relevant and valid legal require ments e Pay attention to the expiration date of the fire extinguisher If the fire extin guisher is used after the expiration date its proper function is no longer assured The fire extinguisher is only supplied in certain countries within the scope of delivery m Vehicle tool kit Fig 151 Luggage compartment Storage compartment for vehicle too kit B5J 4032H The vehicle tool kit and the lifting jack are housed in a plastic box in the spare wheel gt fig 151 or in the space for the spare wheel There is also space here for the remov able ball for the trailer towing device Breakdown assistance Breakdown assistance The vehicle tool kit contains the following parts depending on equipment fitted Wheel wrench Wire clamps for removing the full wheel trims Towing eye Adapter for the wheel bolts lock Extraction pliers for wheel bolt caps Replacement lamp Screwdriver Before placing the lifting jack back in its storage area screw in the arm of the lifting jack fully Z WARNING e The factory supplied lifting jack is only intended for your model of vehicle On no account attempt to lift a heavier vehicle or other loads risk of injury Ensure that the vehicle tool kit is safely attached in the luggage compartment E Spare wheel The spare wheel is stowed in
305. pres sures e Under certain circumstances e g sporty style of driving wintry or unpaved roads the warning light L can be delayed or does not light up at all a Note If the battery has been disconnected the warning light comes on after switching on the ignition The warning light must go out after driving a short distance W Selector lever lock automatic gearbox If the green warning light lights up operate the brake pedal This is necessary in order to be able to move the selector lever out of the position P or N Further information about the selector lever lock gt page 97 m Traction control system TCS 52 The warning light comes on for a few seconds when the ignition is switched on The warning light comes on when driving when a control cycle is activated The warning light amp lights up permanently if there is a fault in the TCS system The fact that the TCS system operates together with the ABS means that the TCS warning light will also come on if the ABS system is not operating properly If the warning light 52 comes on immediately after starting the engine the TCS system can be switched off for technical reasons In this case the TCS system can be switched on again by switching the ignition on and off If the warning light goes out the TCS system is fully functional again Further information about the TCS gt page 134 Traction control system TCS a Note If the battery
306. pressure control value The tyre pressure monitoring system compares with the aid of the ABS sensors the speed and also the rolling circumference of the individual wheels If the rolling circumference of a wheel is changed the warning light lights up in the instru ment cluster gt page 29 and an audible signal sounds The rolling circumference of the tyre can change if the tyre inflation pressure is too low e the structure of the tyre is damaged the vehicle is loaded on one side the wheels of an axle are loaded heavily e g when towing a trailer or when driving uphill or downhill snow chains are mounted the temporary spare wheel is mounted one wheel per axle was changed Basic setting of the system After changing the tyre inflation pressures after changing one or several wheels the position of a wheel on the vehicle e g exchanging the wheels between the axles or when the warning light lights up while driving a basic setting of the system must be carried out as follows e Inflate all tyres to the specified inflation pressure page 169 Fig 132 Button for setting the tyre infla Switch on the ignition e Press button fig 132 for more than 2 seconds While pressing the button the warning light lights up At the same time the memory of the system is erased and the new calibration is started which is confirmed with an audible signal and then the warning light l goes out e ifthe warnin
307. quences of a short circuit Melting of lead struts explo sion and burning of the battery jets of acid spurting out Itis prohibited to work with a naked flame and light to smoke or to carry out any activities which produce sparks Avoid creating sparks when working with cables and electrical devices Strong sparking represents a risk of injury Before carrying out any work on the electrical system switch off the engine the ignition as well as all electrical components and disconnect the negative cable on the battery If you wish to replace a bulb it is sufficient to switch off the appropriate light Never charge a frozen or thawed battery risk of explosion and caustic burns Replace a frozen battery e Never jump start the batteries which have a too low electrolyte level risk of explosion and caustic burns Never use a battery which is damaged risk of explosion Immediately replace a damaged battery Inspecting and Replenishing 65 Caution e You must only disconnect the battery if the ignition is switched off otherwise the electrical system electronic components of the vehicle may be damaged When disconnecting the battery from the electrical system of the vehicle first disconnect the negative terminal of the battery Then disconnect the positive terminal When reconnecting the battery first connect the positive terminal and only then the negative terminal of the battery You must
308. r You will be exposed to increased risk of injury if it becomes necessary to apply the brake or in the event of an accident If an airbag is deployed you may suffer fatal injuries when adopting an incorrect seated position tis important for the driver and front passenger to maintain a distance of at least 25 cm from the steering wheel or dash panel Not maintaining this minimum distance will mean that the airbag system will not be able to properly protect you hazard The front seats and the head restraints must always also be correctly adjusted to match the body size of the occupant Z WARNING continued Ensure that there are no objects in the footwell as any objects may get behind the pedals during a driving or braking manoeuvre You would then no longer be able to operate the clutch to brake or accelerate Do not transport any objects on the front passenger seat except those provided for this purpose e g child safety seat risk of accident m Adjusting the front seats Variant 1 Fig 50 Controls at seat B5J 6003H Adjusting a seat in a forward back direction Pull the lever Q fig 50 up and push the seat into the desired position Release the lever Q and push the seat further until the lock is heard to engage Adjusting height of seat Lift the seat if required by pulling or pumping lever 2 upwards Lower the seat if required by pushing or pumping lever 2 downwards Adjust t
309. r a short time in the event of a punc ture and when adopting an appropriately cautious style of driving It should be replaced as quickly as possible by a normal wheel General Maintenance Wheels and Tyres Z WARNING Z WARNING Only use those tyres or wheel rims which have been approved for your model of Skoda Auto vehicle Failure to observe this instruction will adversely affect the road safety of your vehicle risk of accident Approval and licencing of your vehicle on public roads may also become void as a result e You must on no account drive at a higher speed than is permissible for your tyres risk of an accident resulting from tyre damage and loss of control over your vehicle Tyres which are 6 years old or more should only be fitted in exceptional cases and when adopting an appropriately cautious style of driving e Never fit tyres which have already been used without having adequate knowledge of their previous history Tyres age even if they have not been used at all or only very little A spare tyre must only be used in exceptional cases and only then when adopting an appropriately cautious style of driving e Donot where possible replace individual tyres but at least replace them on both wheels of a given axle at the same time Always fit the tyres with the deeper tread depth to the front wheels gt For the sake of the environment Old tyres must be disposed of in conformity with the appropriate r
310. r and front passenger it is important to maintain a distance of at ofa second and at a high speed in order to be able to offer that additional protection least 25 cm from the steering wheel or dash panel gt fig 117 Not maintaining in the event of an accident The forward movement of the driver and of the front this minimum distance will mean that the airbag system will not be able to prop passenger is cushioned when they make contact with the fully inflated airbag and erly protect you hazard The front seats and the head restraints must always the risk of injury to head and chest is thus reduced also be correctly adjusted to match the body size of the occupant Itis essential to always switch off gt page 123 Deactivating airbags the front passenger airbag when attaching a child safety seat on the front passenger seat where the child is seated with its back facing in direction of travel in some countries also when the child is facing the direction of travel If this is not done there is a risk of the child suffering severe or even fatal injuries A grey white non harmful gas is released when airbag is inflated This is perfectly if the front passenger airbag is deployed In certain countries national legal normal and is not an indication of a fire in the vehicle provisions also require that the side or head passenger airbags be deactivated The airbag develops enormous forces when triggered which can lead to injuries if When transporti
311. r mobile phone may be connected with the hands free system Up to four mobile phones can be paired to the hands free system whereby only one mobile phone can communicate with the hands free system Connection with an already paired mobile phone After switching on the ignition the connection is automatically established for the already paired mobile phone Check on the mobile unit if the automatic connection was established Disconnecting the connection By withdrawing the ignition key By disconnecting the device in the information display By disconnecting the device in the mobile phone Solving connection problems When the system reports No paired phone found check the operating state of the phone e ls the telephone switched on Is the PIN code entered Is Bluetooth active Is the visibility of the mobile phone active Was the telephone already paired with the hands free system Some mobile phones have a menu in which the authorization for establishing a Bluetooth connection is performed via the input of a code If the input for the authorization is necessary it must always be performed when re establishing the Bluetooth connection Communication 103 gt EA Communication Z WARNING In the event of air transport the Bluetooth function of the hands free system must be switched off by a specialist garage Note e Not valid for all mobile phones which enable a communication
312. r operation of the locking cylinder and the ignition lock Using the system Unlocking and locking S gt For the sake of the environment Dispose of a used battery in accordance with environmental regulations a Note Pay attention to the correct polarity when changing the battery The replacement battery must have the same specification as the original battery e If itis still not be possible to unlock or lock the vehicle with the remote control key even after replacing the battery this means that the system has to be synchro nised gt page 39 m Electronic immobiliser The electronic immobiliser prevents the vehicle being operated by an unauthorised person An electronic chip is integrated in the head of the key The immobiliser is deacti vated with the aid of this chip when the key is inserted in the ignition lock The elec tronic immobiliser is automatically activated when you withdraw the ignition key from the lock Note It is only possible to start the engine of your car with a Genuine koda key with the matching code E Locking Unlocking Valid for vehicles without a central locking system Locking from outside The securing knob will move upwards or downwards in the door when unlocking or locking Locking from inside All closed vehicle doors are locked by pressing the securing knobs from the inside The doors cannot be opened from the outside when the securing knobs have been pressed T
313. r possible to operate the sliding tilting roof after opening one of the front doors however Note If the battery has been disconnected and reconnected it is possible that the sliding tilting roof does not close fully Here you have to set the control dial to the switch position A and press it forward for about 10 seconds m Opening and tilting Comfort position Turn the switch to position fig 33 Opening fully Turn the switch to position B and hold it in this position spring tensioned posi tion Tilting roof Turn the switch to position Unlocking and locking When the sliding tilting roof is in the comfort position the intensity of the wind noise is much less The sun screen is also opened automatically when the roof slides open You can slide the sun screen into the opened or closed position by hand when the sliding tilting roof is closed Caution It may be necessary during winter to remove any ice and snow in the area of the sliding tilting roof before opening it in order to prevent damaging the opening mechanism and the seal m Closing Sliding closed closing the sliding tilting roof Turn the switch to position A gt page 43 fig 33 Safety closing The sliding tilting roof is fitted with a force limiter If an obstacle e g ice prevents closing the sliding tilting roof stops and opens completely You can close the sliding tilting roof completely without force limiter by pr
314. r rear window heater ccc cece cette 51 Note G TOS SWH eenen inea aE d 133 e Cars with factory fitted radio or navigation system are supplied with separate Air OUTST VENTS caicmi nar dendwedieneboawcumadid wid dntandadiiutidlatediie 78 instructions for operating such equipment Switch for hazard warning lights ccseececeeeeeveveverees 48 e The arrangement of the controls and switches and the location of some items G Indicator light for a switched off front seat passenger airbag 123 a aa a UN eas wa ae o lef a l ee C Depending on equipment ined symbols on the controls and switches are the same as for left hand drive models m Operating controls for the heating cece cece eee eens 78 Operating controls for the air conditioning system 80 Operating controls for Climatronic 0c cece cece eee eens 83 Storage compartments on the front passenger side 73 G5 Front passenger airbag usc dcsecinacsasaecaeteeuedeaeseans 118 Switch passenger airbag deactivation ccc cece cece eens 123 G Switch depending on equipment fitted Release for luggage compartment door cece eee ees 37 NtCMOrMOnitOr 2ccissoniantie ete hah tae ey inden 40 Fuse box inthe dash panel n ccecce ceee 186 Using the system Quick Reference Guide Quick Reference Guide Basic functions and important information Introduction The chapter of the brief instruction is used as a quick ref
315. r unlock manu ally the other doors and the boot lid Emergency locking of the door page 37 Emergency unlocking of the boot lid gt page 38 m Safe securing The central locking system can be equipped with a safe securing system Locking the vehicle from the outside causes the door locks to be automatically blocked The indicator light flashes for around 2 seconds in quick succession afterwards it will begin to flash at longer intervals It is not possible to open the doors with the door handle either from the inside or from the outside This acts as an effective deterrent for attempts to break into your vehicle You can deactivate the safe securing system by locking twice within 2 seconds If the safe securing system is not operating the indicator light in the driver door flashes for about 2 seconds fast goes out and starts to flash evenly at longer inter vals after about 30 seconds The safe securing system is again activated the next time the vehicle is unlocked and locked again If the vehicle is locked and the safe securing system is deactivated you can open the vehicle from the inside by pulling on the door opening lever The door is unlocked and opened at the same time Z WARNING If the vehicle is locked from the outside and the safe securing system is acti vated there must not be any person and animals in the vehicle as it is then not possible to open either a door or a window from the inside The lock
316. re a risk of overheating of the clutch due to an overload the clutch would open auto matically and the vehicle would move backwards danger of accident e Ifyou must stop at a slope depress and hold the brake pedal so that you can prevent the vehicle from rolling back Caution e The double clutch on the automatic gearbox DSG is equipped with an overload protection If you make use of the uphill function on a vehicle which is stationary or driving slowly uphill it will result in an increase of thermal stress of the clutches e Inthe event that they overheat the warning light t and a warning text appears in the information display gt page 23 In such a case bring the vehicle to a stop switch off the engine and wait until the warning light and the warning go out risk of gearbox damage You can continue the trip as soon as the warning light and the warning go out E Selector lever positions 10 14 1 Consumption 5 3 100km 18 5 C a 12440 1253 2 Fig 101 Selector lever information display Selector lever positions The selector lever position you have engaged is shown in the information display of the instrument cluster with the corresponding gear symbol highlighted gt fig 101 gt on the right In the positions D and S the gear you have already engaged will be additionally displayed on the display Parklock The driven wheels are locked mechanically in this position The Parklock must on
317. remove the valve core and place it down ona clean surface E Seal and inflate tyres Sealing tyres Forcefully shake the tyre inflator bottle io fig 158 several times Firmly screw inflation hose 3 onto the tyre inflator bottle in a clockwise direc tion QD The film on the cap is pierced automatically Remove the plug from the inflation hose 3 and plug the open end fully into the tyre valve Hold the bottle 0 with the floor facing upwards and fill the whole sealing agent in the tyre inflator bottle into the tyres Remove the empty tyre inflator bottle from the valve Screw the valve core back into the tyre valve using the valve remover Q Pumping up the tyres Screw the tyre inflation hose S fig 158 of the air compressor firmly onto the tyre valve Check whether the air release valve 7 is closed On vehicles fitted with a manual gearbox move the gearshift lever into Neutral Start the engine and run it in idle Breakdown assistance 182 Breakdown assistance Insert the plug into the 12 Volt socket Switch on the air compressor with the ON and OFF switch 8 Allow the air compressor to run until reaching a pressure of 2 0 2 5 bar Maximum run time of 8 minutes gt Switch off the air compressor with the ON and OFF switch Ifyou cannot reach an air pressure of 2 0 2 5 bar unscrew the tyre inflation hose 5 from the tyre valve Drive the vehicle approx 10 m
318. replaced before checking the tightening torque Drive cautiously and only at a moderate speed to a workshop where the tight ening torque can be checked m Full wheel trim Fig 153 Removing the full wheel trim ams B5J 6087H Breakdown assistance Breakdown assistance iz gt Breakdown assistance Pulling off Hook the clamp found in the vehicle tool kit into the reinforced edge of the full wheel trim Push the wheel key through the clamp support the wheel key on the tyre and pull off the wheel trim gt page 177 fig 153 Installing First press the full wheel trim onto the wheel at the valve opening provided Then press the full wheel trim into the wheel in such a way that its entire circumference locks correctly in place Caution Use the pressure of your hand do not knock on the full wheel trim Heavy knocks mainly on the points where the full wheel trim has not been inserted into the wheel can result in damage to the guide and centering elements of the full wheel trim Check for yourself that the safety wheel bolt is located in the hole in the area of the valve before fitting the full wheel trim onto a steel wheel which is attached with a safety wheel bolt page 179 Securing wheels against being stolen m Wheel bolts with caps The caps are designed to protect the wheel bolts 3 A Fig 154 Changing a wheel Pull off cap from the wheel bolt Pulling off Insert the plastic
319. restraint so that the top edge of the head restraint is at the same level as the upper part of your head page 110 fig 109 right e Fasten the seat belt correctly gt page 115 How are seat belts correctly fastened In exceptional cases the front passenger airbag can be deactivated gt page 123 Deactivating airbags Adjusting the passenger seat gt page 56 Adjusting the front seats Variant 1 Z WARNING e The front seats and the head restraints must always be adjusted to match the body size of the seat occupant as well as the seat belts must always be correctly fastened in order to provide an optimal protection for you and your occupants e The front passenger must maintain a distance of at least 25 cm to the dash panel Not maintaining this minimum distance will mean that the airbag system will not be able to properly protect you hazard e Always keep your feet in the footwell when the car is being driven never place your feet on the instrument panel out of the window or on the surfaces of the seats You will be exposed to increased risk of injury if it becomes necessary to apply the brake or in the event of an accident If an airbag is deployed you may suffer fatal injuries when adopting an incorrect seated position The seat backrests must not be angled too far back when driving otherwise this will affect proper operation of the seat belts and of the airbag system risk of injur
320. rface is automatically adapted by reducing the engine speed The system operates at all speeds The TCS operates in combination with the ABS page 136 Antilock brake system ABS The TCS will not function if a fault exists in the ABS system The TCS warning light lights up in the instrument cluster when there is a fault on the TCS 5 gt page 29 During an intervention of the system the TCS warning light 5 flashes in the instru ment cluster page 30 Switching off You can switch the TCS off and on again as you wish by pressing the button gt fig 131 The TCS warning light lights up in the instrument cluster when the TCS is switched off amp gt page 29 The TCS should normally always be switched on It may be good practice in certain exceptional cases such as when you wish to have wheel slip to switch off the system Examples when driving with snow chains when driving in deep snow or on a loose surface when it is necessary to rock a car free when it has become stuck then you should switch on the TCS again Z WARNING You should always adjust your style of driving to the conditions of the road surface and the traffic situation The increased safety offered must not tempt you to take greater risks than otherwise risk of an accident a Note e All four wheels must be fitted with the same tyres in order to achieve problem free operation of the TCS Differing rolling circumferences of the tyres
321. risk of injury is increased due to incorrect routing of the seat belt m Examples of an incorrect seated position An incorrect seated position can lead to severe injuries or death for the occupants Seat belts offer their optimum protection only if the webbing of the seat belts is properly routed Incorrect seated positions considerably reduce the protective func tions of the seat belts and therefore increase the risk of injury due to an incorrect routing of the seat belt The driver is fully responsible for himself and his occupants in particular for the children Do not permit an occupant to adopt an incorrect seated position when the car is moving The following list contains the examples of seated positions which are dangerous for the occupants This list is not complete however we would like you to get inter ested in this subject Therefore while the car is moving never stand up in the vehicle stand up on the seats kneel on the seats tilt the seat backrest fully to the back lean against the dash panel lie on the rear seat bench only sit on the front area of the seat sit to the side lean out of the window put the feet out of the window put the feet on the dash panel put the feet on the seat upholstery transport somebody in the footwell have the seat belt not fastened when driving occupy the luggage compartment ne Passive Safety Z WARNING e If the occupant adopts an incorrect se
322. rogramme gt page 98 for a short time in order to adapt the gearbox ratios manually to the driving situations G Position for sporty style of driving Shifting up later into a higher gear makes it possible to fully exploit the power potential of the engine The gearbox also then shifts down at higher engine speeds as in the position D Using the system Automatic gearbox op The gearbox does not shift into the 6th gear in the position S because the maximum speed is reached with the 5th gear The Shiftlock on the selector lever grip must be pressed when moving the selector lever out of the position D into the position S Z WARNING Never move the selector lever into position R or P when driving risk of an accident When the engine is running and the vehicle is stationary it is necessary to hold the car with the brake pedal in all the positions of the selector lever except P and N since the power transmission is never completely interrupted also not when the engine is idling the vehicle creeps e You must on no account unintentionally operate the throttle e g by hand from the engine compartment if a drive position is engaged when the car is stationary The vehicle would otherwise immediately start off also when the handbrake is firmly applied risk of an accident e You must move the selector lever into position P and firmly apply the hand brake first before you or any other person opens the bonnet and sta
323. rrectly interlocked It is only then that the three point seat belt can reliably fulfil its function The seat backrests must be securely interlocked in position so that no objects in the luggage compartment can slide into the passenger compartment if there is sudden braking risk of injury a Note If the housing of the net partition is installed first of all fold the left seat backrest forward and then the right double seat backrest m Inserting head restraints in the seat cushions Fig 55 Rear seats Inserting head p5J 4009H restraints in the seat cushions 60 Seats and Stowage The rear head restraints can be inserted into the relevant holes of the folded forward seat cushions E Removing seat squabs Fig 56 Removing seat squabs J B5J 4010H The luggage compartment can be increased in size by removing the rear seat Removing Fold the seat cushion forwards completely Press the wire clamps in the direction of the arrow gt fig 56 and remove the seat cushion from its holder Installing Press the wire clamps in the direction of the arrow and place it in its holder Fold the seat cushion back into its original position m Pedals Concerning a secure depressing of the pedal you should use only footmats from the Skoda genuine accessories Operation of the pedals must not be hindered Z WARNING e Greater pedal distances may be needed when there is a fault in the brake system
324. rts working on the engine when it is running risk of accident It is also essential to observe all warnings gt page 158 Working in the engine compartment m Selector lever lock Automatic selector lever lock With the ignition on the selector lever is locked when it is in the positions P and N You must first of all depress the brake pedal in order to move the selector lever out of this position The warning light page 29 lights up in the instrument cluster as areminder for the driver when the selector lever is in the positions P and N A time delay element ensures that the selector lever is not blocked when rapidly switching over the position N e g from R to D This does for example allow one to seesaw out a stuck vehicle The selector lever lock will click into place if the lever is in the N position for more than 2 seconds without the brake pedal being pressed The selector lever lock is only active if the vehicle is stationary or moving at speed of less than 5 km hour The lock is switched off automatically into position N when the car is travelling at a higher speed Not valid for vehicles with automatic gearbox DSG 98 Automatic gearbox Shiftlock button The Shiftlock button in the handle of selector lever prevents certain selector lever positions being engaged inadvertently The selector lever lock is cancelled when you press the Shiftlock button Keylock Ignition key withdrawal lock You c
325. ry to manually start the engine using the key for example if the driver s seat belt is not fastened or if the driver door is open for a period of more than 30 seconds during the stop phase Pay attention to the rele vant messages in the instrument cluster e ifthe Climatronic is switched into the automatic mode this may in certain circumstances prevent the automatic engine shut down m Automatic gearbox Automatic gearbox Information for driving with the 6 speed automatic gearbox The maximum speed is reached in the 5th gear The 6th gear serves as an economic driving programme which is intended to reduce the fuel consumption Shifting up and down through the gears is performed automatically You can also however switch the gearbox over into the Tiptronic mode This mode makes it possible for you to also shift gears manually gt page 98 Starting off and Driving Depress the brake pedal fully and keep it depressed Press the Shiftlock button button in handle of the selector lever move the selector lever into the desired position e g D gt page 96 and then release the Shiftlock button Waita moment until the gearbox has shifted a slight engagement nudge can be felt Release the brake pedal and depress the accelerator gt A Stop The selector lever position N does not have to be selected when stopping just for a short time such as at a cross roads It is sufficient to hold the vehicle stationary using
326. s bullet is flying through the interior compartment and hits an occupant Z WARNING Store the objects in the luggage compartment and attach them to the lashing eyes e Loose objects in the passenger compartment can be thrown forward during a sudden manoeuvre or in case of an accident and can injure the occupants or other oncoming traffic This risk is still increased if the objects which are flying around are hit by a deployed airbag In this case the objects which are thrown back can injure the occupants hazard ZN WARNING continued Please note that the handling properties of your vehicle may be affected when transporting heavy objects as a result of the displacement of the centre of gravity The speed and style of driving must be adjusted accordingly The items carried in the luggage compartment should be stored in sucha way that no objects are able to slip forward if there are any sudden driving or braking manoeuvres undertaken risk of injury When transporting fastened objects which are sharp and dangerous in the luggage compartment enlarged by folding the rear seats forward or removing the rear seats ensure the safety of the passengers transported on the other rear seats gt page 111 Correct seated position for the occupants on the rear seats e Ifthe rear seats next to the folded forward seat are occupied ensure maximum safety e g by placing the goods to be transported in such a
327. s The level may also rise slightly above the MAX marking when the engine is warm If the coolant level in the reservoir is too low this is indicated by the warning light in the instrument cluster gt page 28 However we recommend you check the level of the coolant on the container directly at regular intervals Loss of coolant A loss of coolant is first and foremost an indication of a leak in the system You should not merely top up the coolant in the reservoir It is also important to have the cooling system inspected without delay by a specialist garage Losses can only occur through the pressure relief in the cap of the coolant expan sion bottle which is completely free of leaks if the coolant boils as a result of over heating and is forced out of the cooling system Z WARNING Read and observe the warning notes gt page 158 Working in the engine compartment before working in the engine compartment Caution One should contact a specialist garage as soon as possible if the source of over heating itself cannot be determined and removed since there may be grave damage to the engine m Replenishing the coolant Switch the engine off Allow the engine to cool down Place a cloth over the cap of the coolant expansion reservoir gt page 162 fig 143 and unscrew the cap carefully by turning it to the left gt A Top up the coolant Screw the cap tight until it is heard to lock The co
328. s and types of clothing cannot reflect the signal of the parking aid Thus these objects or people who wear such clothing are not recognised by the sensors of the parking aid Note The parking aid does not operate if you are towing a trailer applies to models which feature a factory fitted towing device e A system fault is indicated if a warning signal sounds for about 5 seconds after switching the ignition on and engaging reverse gear and there is no obstacle close to your vehicle It is possible that the audible warning does not function correctly an obstacle behind the vehicle may not be detected take extra care Have the fault rectified by a specialist workshop e ifthe audible warning sounds for 3 seconds after switching the ignition on and engaging the reverse gear a fault has occured in the system It is possible that the audible warning does not function correctly an obstacle behind the vehicle may not be detected take extra care Have the fault rectified by a specialist workshop The sensors must be kept clean and free of ice to enable the parking aid to operate properly e ifthe parking aid is activated and the selector lever of the automatic gearbox is in the position P warning signal indicates interruption vehicle can no longer move E Cruise control system CCS Introduction The cruise control system CCS maintains a constant speed more than 30 km h 20 mph once it has been set without y
329. s up to 8 Technical data 208 Technical Data Engine 1 4 I 132 kW TSI EU5 Output kW per rpm Max torque Nm per rpm Number of cylinders Displacement cm 132 6200 250 2000 4500 4 1390 Performances FABIA RS COMBI RS Maximum speed km h 224 226 Acceleration 0 100 km h s 7S Fuel consumption in Itr 100 km and CO in g km Urban 7 7 Non urban 5 2 Combination 6 2 CO gt emission combination 148 Weight in kg Permissible gross weight 1718 1713 Unloaden weight ready for work 1318 1313 Technical Data 209 Engine 1 2 1 55 kW TDI CR DPF EU5 Output kW per rpm Max torque Nm per rpm Number of cylinders Displacement cm 55 4200 180 2000 3 1199 Performances FABIA Petree ESTATE CAR Sine Maximum speed km h 166 172 167 172 Acceleration 0 100 km h s 14 2 14 2 14 3 14 3 Fuel consumption in Itr 100 km and CO in g km Urban 4 8 4 9 4 1 4 8 4 9 41 Non urban 3 32 3 45 3 0 3 32 3 45 3 0 Combination 3 89 3 9 3 4 3 89 3 9 3 4 CO emission combination 994 1925 89 994 102 gt 89 Weight in kg Permissible gross weight 1644 1614 1658 1628 1664 1619 1674 1629 Unloaden weight ready for work 1189 1203 1209 1219 Permissible trailer load trailer braked unbraked 1000 500 1000 450 1200 500 1200 450 E a b c Unloaded weight with special equipment up to 1 280 kg Unloaded weight with special equipment more than 1 280 kg Vehicles of category N1 d
330. seats occupied luggage compartment empty All seats occupied luggage compartment empty All seats occupied luggage compartment laden Driver seat occupied luggage compartment laden Caution The headlamp range should always be adjusted in a way that the headlights do not dazzle other road users especially oncoming traffic e andthe range is sufficient for safe driving E Switch for hazard warning lights A Fig 38 Dash panel Switch for hazard warning lights Press switch A fig 38 to switch the hazard warning light system on or off All the turn signal lights on the vehicle flash at the same time when the hazard warning light system is switched on The indicator light for the turn signals and the indicator light in the switch also flash at the same time You can also switch on the hazard warning light system if the ignition is switched off The hazard warning light system is switched on automatically if an airbag is deployed in the event of an accident Please comply with any legal requirements when using the hazard warning light system a Note Switch on the hazard warning light system if for example e you encounter traffic congestion e your vehicle breaks down or an emergency situation occurs W The turn signal 5 and main beam lever EO The parking lights and headlight flasher are also switched on and off using the turn signal and main beam lever Fig 39 Turn signal and main beam le
331. seconds after unlocking the door in order to deactivate the anti theft alarm system The alarm will be trig gered if you do not switch on the ignition within 15 seconds m Locking the vehicle with the key Turn the key in the locking cylinder of the driver s door in the opposite direction of travel lock position 8 gt fig 25 e All the doors and the boot lid are locked The switched on interior lights will switch off over the door contact The windows and the electric sliding tilting roof close provided the key is held in the lock position e The safe securing system is activated immediately The indicator light in the driver door begins flashing a Note If the driver s door has been opened the vehicle cannot be locked m Button for the central locking system g 2 k e a Fig 26 Centre console Central locking button If the vehicle was not locked from the outside you can also unlock and lock it with the rocker switch without the ignition switched on Locking all doors and the boot lid Press button Q gt page 36 fig 26 The symbol 4 in the button comes on Unlocking all doors and the boot lid Press button 2 gt page 36 fig 26 The symbol goes out in the button The following applies if you have locked your vehicle using the button Q itis not possible to open the doors or the boot lid from the outside safety feature e g when stopping at traffic lights etc e You can unlo
332. sed if the tyre filling pressure is too low This will not only increase fuel consumption but also tyre wear and the driving behaviour will worsen Always check the inflation pressure of the tyres when cold Do not drive with winter tyres all year round for this costs about 10 more fuel Winter tyres are also louder m aa Driving and the Environment Design measures No unnecessary ballast Transporting ballast costs fuel The fact that every kilogram of extra weight increases your fuel consumption means that it is worth taking a look in the luggage compartment to avoid trans porting any unnecessary ballast It is particularly in town traffic when one is accelerating quite often that the vehicle weight will have a significant effect upon the fuel consumption A rule of thumb here is that an increase in weight of 100 kilograms will cause an increase in fuel consumption of about 1 litre 100 kilometres You may frequently also leave a roof rack fitted on just out of convenience although you no longer need it The increased aerodynamic drag of your vehicle causes it to use about 10 more fuel than normal at a speed of 100 120 km h even when you are not carrying a load on the roof m Saving electricity Generating electricity costs fuel Switch off electrical components as soon as you no longer need them When the engine is running the alternator generates and supplies electrical power If more electrical components of the
333. sistance Convenience operation of windows One can open and close the electrically powered windows when unlocking and locking the vehicle page 42 Opening a single door This function makes it possible to only unlock the driver s door The other doors remain locked and are only unlocked when the command is repeated This function can be activated by a specialist garage Automatic locking and unlocking All the doors and the boot lid are locked automatically once the car reaches a speed of about 15 km h If the ignition key is withdrawn the car is then automatically unlocked again The driver can also unlock the vehicle by pressing the button amp of the central locking system This function can be activated by a specialist garage Using the system Unlocking and locking a Z WARNING Locking the doors prevents involuntary opening in an exceptional situation an accident Locked doors prevent unwanted entry into the vehicle from outside for example at road crossings Locked doors do however make it more difficult for rescuers to get into the vehicle in an emergency danger to life Note inthe event of an accident in which the airbags are deployed the locked doors are automatically unlocked in order to enable rescuers to gain access to the vehicle Only the front door which is fitted with a locking cylinder can be unlocked and locked using the key if the central locking system fails You can lock o
334. sition O fig 35 left 46 Lights and Visibility Switch on the switch for daylight driving lights fig 35 right Deactivating daylight driving lights Switch off the switch for daylight driving lights page 45 fig 35 right Turn the light switch to the position side lights 2 or low beam ZO page 45 fig 35 left Activating daylight driving lights on vehicles with START STOP Switch off the ignition Pull the turn signal light lever towards the steering wheel at the same time slide it to the top and hold it in this position Switch on the ignition wait until the right turn signal light flashes 4x Switch off the ignition an audible signal sounds which confirms the activation of the daylight driving lights Release the turn signal light lever Deactivating daylight driving lights on vehicles with START STOP Switch off the ignition Pull the turn signal light lever towards the steering wheel at the same time slide it to the bottom and hold it in this position Switch on the ignition wait until the left turn signal light flashes 4x Switch off the ignition an audible signal sounds which confirms the deactiva tion of the daylight driving lights Release the turn signal light lever On vehicles with separate lights for daylight driving lights in the fog lights or in the front bumper the parking lights and the licence plate light do not come on when activating
335. slacken it by pulling in the direction of the arrow You can take out the removable storage compart ments in order to facilitate the removal page 76 Removeable storage compartments in the luggage compartment Grasp the carrier rail at the position slacken it by pulling in the direction of the arrow and take it out The carrier rail on the other side of the luggage compartment can be removed in the same way Install carrier rails Position the carrier rails on the sides of the luggage compartment Using the system Luggage net partition Combi Use the luggage net partition behind the rear seats ALLLLLLLTI e TILLI VAA i am g Fig 66 Pull out the rear bulkhead roll up Pulling out Open the right rear door Fold down the rear seat backrests slightly forwards which makes it possible to clear the access for unrolling the rear bulkhead Pull the rear bulkhead at the bracket out of the housing in direction of the holders fig 66 Insert the cross rod into one of the mounts Insert the other end of the cross rod by pressing into the second mount Press both ends of the cross rod forward into the function position Then push the seat backrest back into the upright position until the locking button clicks into place check by pulling on the seat backrest gt A Folding Pull the cross rod back slightly first on the one side then on the other side and
336. st You should take account of this fact for the first 500 kilometres and drive particularly carefully m New brake pads Allow for the fact that new brake pads do not achieve their full braking efficiency until approximately 200 kilometres New brake pads must be first run in before they develop their optimal friction force You can however compensate for this slightly reduced braking force by increasing the pressure on the brake pedal This guideline also applies to any new brake pads installed at a future date During the running in period you should avoid excessive stresses on the brakes This includes for example violent braking particularly from very high speeds and also when crossing mountain passes E Catalytic converter Proper operation of the emission control system catalytic converter is of major significance for driving your vehicle in an environmentally conscious way Please refer to the following guidelines gt For vehicles with petrol engine only refuel with unleaded petrol gt page 155 Unleaded petrol Never run the fuel tank completely empty Do not switch off the ignition while you are driving the vehicle Do not pour too much oil into the engine gt page 161 Replenishing engine oil If you drive your vehicle in a country in which unleaded petrol is not available you must have the catalytic converter replaced later when driving the vehicle into a country in which use of a catalyti
337. stem is only adequate for a single accident If the belt tensioners have been deployed it is then necessary to replace the entire system The dealer must hand over this Owner s manual to the new owner at the time of purchasing the vehicle Note Smoke is generated when the belt tensioners are deployed This is not an indi cation of a fire in the vehicle itis essential to pay attention to relevant safety regulations if the vehicle or individual parts of the system are scrapped Specialist garages are familiar with these regulations and will be able to provide you with detailed information in this respect When disposing of vehicle or parts of the system it is important to comply with the national legal requirements m Airbag system Description of the airbag system General information on the airbag system The front airbag system is complementary to the three point seat belts and offers additional protection for the head and chest area of the driver and passenger in the event of a frontal collision In the event of a side collision the side airbags reduce the risk of injury to the occu pants to the part of their body facing the side of the accident The airbag system is only functional after the ignition has been switched on The operational readiness of the airbag system is monitored electronically The airbag warning light comes on for a few seconds each time the ignition is switched on The airbag syst
338. stowed in the vehicle tool kit Caution Damage can occur to the adapter and safety wheel bolt if the safety wheel bolt is tightened up too much e Onsteel wheels the theft deterrent wheel bolt must always be installed in the hole which is close to the valve Otherwise the full wheel trim cannot be mounted and the full wheel trim can be damaged during the assembly a Note The set of safety wheel bolts can be obtained from a specialist garage m Tyre repair kit General information The tyre repair kit is located in a box under the carpet in the luggage compartment Use the tyre repair kit to reliably repair tyre damage caused by foreign bodies or a puncture with diameters up to 4 mm Do not remove foreign bodies e g screws or nails from the tyre The repair can be undertaken on the vehicle immediately The repair with the tyre repair kit is not at all intended to replace a permanent repair on the tyre this repair only serves to reach the next specialist garage Do not use the tyre repair kit torepair wheel damage in outside temperatures of less than 20 C 4 F 180 Breakdown assistance with tears or punctures greater than 4 mm in size to repair damage to the tyre wall when driving with very low tyre pressure or with a completely flat tyre if the use by date see inflation bottle has passed Z WARNING e If you find yourself in flowing traffic switch on the hazard warning lights s
339. switch a and the rocker button 8 in the left lever of the multi functional switch Press the switch fig 99 into the position ON After the desired speed has been reached press the rocker button B into the SET position the current speed is stored After you have released the rocker button B out of the position SET the speed you have just stored is maintained at a constant speed without having to depress the accelerator You can increase the speed by depressing the accelerator Releasing the acceler ator will cause the speed to drop again to the set speed This does not apply however if you drive at a speed which is more than 10 km h higher than the saved speed for a period of more than 5 minutes The stored speed will be cancelled in the memory You then have to re store the desired speed One can reduce the speed in the usual manner The system is switched off tempo rarily by actuating the brake or clutch pedal gt page 92 Z WARNING First ensure that it is not too high for the traffic conditions which exist at that moment before resuming the stored speed m m Starting off and Driving Changing a stored speed You can also change the speed of the vehicle without depressing the accelerator Faster You can increase the stored speed without depressing the accelerator by pressing the rocker button 8 page 91 fig 99 into the RES position The speed of the car will increase conti
340. system diesel engine page 27 Q4 Rear fog light gt page 26 2 E Coolant temperature coolant level gt page 28 D Failure of the light bulbs gt page 27 ia Fuel reserve page 28 ze Dynamo gt page 27 Using the system l Instruments and warning lights viga O Sry mn iS AT XID GE te A A Engine oil Open door Fluid level in windshield washer system Control system for exhaust Switch off traction control system TCS Tyre pressure monitoring system Selector lever lock Traction control system TCS Electronic stability programme ESP Antilock brake system ABS Brake system Handbrake Speed regulating system Airbag system Diesel particle filter diesel engine Seat belt warning light gt page 28 gt page 29 gt page 29 gt page 29 gt page 29 gt page 29 gt page 29 page 30 page 30 gt page 30 gt page 30 gt page 31 gt page 31 gt page 31 gt page 31 gt page 32 Z WARNING e If you do not pay attention to the warning lights coming on and the corre sponding descriptions and warning notes this may result in severe body injuries or major vehicle damage The engine compartment of your car is a hazardous area There is a risk of injuries scalding accidents and fire when working in the engine compartment e g inspecting and replenishing oil and other fluids It is also essential to observe all warnings page 158 Work
341. system is not operating properly If the warning light 52 comes on immediately after starting the engine the ESP system can be switched off for technical reasons In this case the ESP system can be switched on again by switching the ignition on and off If the warning light goes out the ESP system is fully functional again Z WARNING It is also not possible for the ESP to overcome the physical limits of the vehicle Even if a vehicle fitted with ESP you should still always adapt your style of driving to the condition of the road surface and the traffic situation This partic ularly applies when driving on slippery and wet roads The increased safety offered must not tempt you to take greater risks than otherwise risk of an acci dent a Note e All four wheels must be fitted with the same tyres in order to achieve problem free operation of the ESP Differing rolling circumferences of the tyres can lead to an undesirable reduction in the engine output e Changes to vehicle e g on engine on the brakes on chassis or another combi nation of tyres and wheels can influence the function of the ESP page 174 Accessories changes and replacement of parts m Electronic Differential Lock EDL and XDL The electronic differential lock prevents an individual wheel from slipping Models fitted with ESP are equipped with electronic differential lock EDL Intelligent Technology 33 gt General The EDL makes it
342. t gt page 113 fig 111 right m Important safety information regarding the use of seat belts The correct use of the seat belts considerably reduces the risk of injury Z WARNING The belt webbing must not be jammed in between at any point or twisted or chafe against any sharp edges Itis important that the belt webbing is properly routed if the seat belts are to offer their maximum protection gt page 115 How are seat belts correctly fastened e No two persons also not children should ever use a single seat belt together e The maximum protection which seat belts can offer is only achieved if you are correctly seated page 110 Correct seated position e The belt webbing must not run across solid or fragile objects e g spectacles ball point pens keys etc as this may be a cause of injuries e Wearing a lot of layers or loose clothing e g a winter coat over a jacket do not allow you to be correctly seated and impairs proper operation of the seat belts onal Seat belts ZN WARNING continued tis prohibited to use clamps or other objects to adjust seat belts e g for shortening the seat belts for smaller persons The lock tongue should only be inserted into the lock which is the correct one for your seat Wrong use of the safety belt will reduce its capacity to protect and the risk of injury increases The seat backrests of the front seats must not be tilted too
343. t after starting the engine again and a short drive it is not necessary to visit a specialist garage e ifthe battery has been disconnected and reconnected the yellow warning light comes on after switching on the ignition The warning light must go out after driving a short distance There is no power assisted steering support when the vehicle is being towed without the engine running or when the power assisted steering is defect The vehicle is fully steerable however There is however increased force required to turn the steering wheel m EPC fault light EPC petrol engine The EPC Electronic Power Control warning light comes on for a few seconds when the ignition is switched on If the warning light EPC flashes after starting the engine or flashes while driving a fault exists in the engine control system The engine management system selects an emergency programme which enables you to drive to the nearest specialist garage by adopting a gentle style of driving m Glow plug system 00 diesel engine The warning light 00 lights up for a cold engine when switching on the ignition pre heat position 2 gt page 86 Start the engine after the indicator light goes out The glow plug indicator light will come on for about 1 second if the engine is at a normal operating temperature or if the outside temperature is above 5 C This means that you can start the engine right away There is a fault in the glow plug system if the
344. tached parts fitted to your car such as spoiler roof rack system two way radio aerial it is best to first of all consult the operator of the car wash plant It is important to degrease the lips of the windscreen wiper rubbers after passing through the automatic vehicle wash system m Washing vehicle by hand It is important to first soften the dirt with plenty of water and rinse it off as thor oughly as possible before washing your vehicle by hand One should then clean the vehicle using a soft washing sponge washing glove or a washing brush and only slight pressure Work from the top to the bottom begin ning with the roof Only place slight pressure on the vehicle paintwork during cleaning Only use a car shampoo for stubborn dirt Wash out the sponge or washing glove thoroughly at short intervals Clean wheels door sills and similar parts last Use a second sponge for such areas Rinse off the vehicle well after giving it a wash and dry it off using a chamois leather Z WARNING e Theignition should always be switched off when you wash your vehicle risk of accident e Protect your hands and arms from sharp edged metal parts when you are cleaning the underfloor the inside of the wheel housings or the wheel trims risk of cuts Caution Do not wash your vehicle in bright sunlight risk of paint damage Ensure that the jet of water is not aimed directly at the locking cylinders or at the door and
345. tallation of the battery cover on the positive terminal side takes place in the reverse order i Battery control Fig 146 The battery Electrolyte level indicator The battery is practically maintenance free under normal operating conditions We recommend you have the electrolyte level regularly checked by a specialist garage especially in the following cases High outdoor temperatures When making longer daily drives e After reach charge page 166 In vehicles with a battery fitted with a colour indicator or so called magic eye gt fig 146 the electrolyte level can be determined from the discolouration Air bubbles can influence the colour of the indicator For this reason carefully knock on the indicator before carrying out the check Black colour electrolyte level is correct Colourless or light yellow colour electrolyte level too low the battery must be replaced a Note The electrolyte level in the battery is also regularly checked by an authorised Skoda service partner as part of the Inspection Service For technical reasons the electrolyte level cannot be checked in vehicle batteries with the AGM designation Vehicles with a START STOP system are fitted with a battery control unit for controlling the energy level during the recurring engine start m Operation in winter The battery has to provide greater amounts of electricity during the winter It also has only part
346. ted switching conditions some of them cannot be correctly determined without servicing The general conditions for the proper functioning of the START STOP system are listed in the following overview Conditions for the automatic engine shut down stop phase Gearshift lever in the neutral position Clutch pedal not depressed The driver has fastened the seat belt The driver s door is closed The bonnet is closed The vehicle is stationary The factory fitted towing device is not electrically connected to a trailer The engine operating temperature is reached The charge state of the vehicle battery is sufficient Slope angle gradient of the vehicle must not be too great Engine speed is lower than 1200 rpm The temperature inside the vehicle battery is not too low or too high The pressure in the brake system is sufficient The difference between set and actual temperature in the interior is not too great The vehicle has exceeded the speed of 3 km h since the last automatic start No cleaning cycle is active in the diesel particle filter page 31 The front wheels are not turned excessively the steering angle is less than 3 4 of a steering wheel revolution Using the system Starting off and Driving ha Conditions that enable an automatic engine start start phase The clutch pedal is pressed The temperature setting is changed to min max Defrosting windscreen is switched on High blower speed is set Button for the START STOP syste
347. tem parking aid control unit for cornering lights coolant fan The air conditioning system Mirror adjustment Control unit for trailer detection Control unit for automatic gearbox No 14 15 16 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 Power consumer Motor for halogen projector headlights with cornering light function Radio navigation system PDA Electrohydraulic power steering START STOP radio Daylight driving lights Mirror heater S contact Engine control unit Engine control unit Fuel pump relay Fuel pump control unit Reversing light fog lights with the function CORNER Operating controls for the heating control unit for air conditioning sys tem parking aid mobile phone instrument cluster steering angle sender ESP vehicle voltage control unit multifunction steering wheel Interior lighting storage compartment and luggage compartment side lights Central control unit of the vehicle Seat heaters Rear window wiper Not assigned Petrol engine AKF valve petrol engine Control flap Injection water pump Fuel pump Ignition Cruise control system operation of PTC relay Lambda probe Breakdown assistance IEEJ Fuses and light bulbs No 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 4 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 5 52 53 Power consumer High pressure pump pressure valve Engine control unit Engine control unit Vacuum pump Power supply of
348. ter screwing out the towing eye insert it in the mounts and then press on the right side of the cover The cover must engage firmly Caution The towing eye must always be screwed in fully and firmly tightened otherwise the towing eye can tear when towing E Breakdown assistance 186 Fuses and light bulbs Fuses and light bulbs Electric fuses Replacing fuses in the dash panel Defect fuses must be replaced Fig 163 Bottom side of the dash panel fuse cover Individual electrical circuits are protected by fuses The fuses are located on the left side of the dash panel behind the safety cover Switch the ignition off and also the electrical component affected Carefully swivel the cover in the direction of arrow and pull it out gt fig 163 Find out which fuse belongs to the component which is not operating gt page 187 Fuse assignment in the dash panel Take the plastic clip out of its fixture in the fuse cover insert it onto the respec tive fuse and pull out this fuse Defect fuses can be detected by their melted metal strips Replace the defect fuse by a new fuse of the same ampere number Insert the fuse cover into the dash panel in such a way that the guide lugs are guided into the openings of the dash panel and then lock them by pressing We recommend that you always have the small box of replacement fuses in your vehicle You can obtain a box of replacement fuses from the range of S
349. ter this is it possible to again use the remote control Unlocking and locking a Note The remote control is automatically deactivated when the ignition is switched on e The operation of the remote control may temporarily be affected by interfer ence from transmitters close to the car and which operate in the same frequency range e g mobile phone TV transmitter The battery must be replaced if the central locking or anti theft alarm system only responds to the remote control at less than 3 metres away gt page 33 e ifthe driver door is opened the vehicle cannot be locked using the remote control m Unlocking and locking the vehicle Fig 30 Remote control key Unlocking the vehicle Press the button Q fig 30 for about 1 second Locking the vehicle Press button 3 for about 1 second Deactivating safe securing system Press button G twice in 2 seconds Further information gt page 35 Boot lid remote release lt Press button 2 for about 1 second Further information gt page 37 Using the system Folding out of the key Press button 4 Folding up of the key Press button 4 and collapse the key bit in the housing The turn signal lights flash twice as confirmation that the vehicle has been unlocked The vehicle will lock again automatically if you unlock the vehicle using button Q but do not open a door or the boot lid within the next 30 seconds The safe securing syst
350. the equipment installed in the vehicle the text can differ on the display Service Interval Display Before the next service interval a key symbol and the remaining kilometres are indicated after switching on the ignition fig 16 At the same time a display appears regarding the remaining days until the next service interval Using the system Instruments and warning lights i The following is displayed in the information display Service in km or days The kilometre indicator or the days indicator reduces in steps of 100 km or days until the service due date is reached A flashing key symbol appears in the display for 20 seconds as soon as the due date for the service is reached as well as the following text Service The following is displayed in the information display Service now Display regarding the distance and days until the following service interval You can use the button G to display the remaining distance driven and the days until the next service interval gt page 15 A key symbol and a display regarding the remaining kilometers appear for 10 second in the display At the same time a display appears regarding the remaining days until the next service interval In vehicles with an information display call this display in the Settings page 24 menu The following will be displayed in the information display for 10 seconds Service in km or days Resetting Service Interval Display It is
351. the greatest of care Always wear protective gloves eye and skin protection when handling batteries Corrosive fumes in the air irritate the air passages and lead to conjunctivitis and inflammation of the air passages in the lungs The battery acid corrodes dental enamel and creates deep wounds after contact with the skin which take a long time to heal Repeated contact with diluted acids causes skin diseases inflammations ulcers slin cracks Acids coming into contact with water are diluted accompanied by significant development of heat e Do not tilt the battery otherwise battery electrolyte may flow out of the battery vent openings Protect the eyes with safety glasses or a shield There is the danger of suffering blindness If any battery electrolyte gets into your eye rinse out your eye immediately with clear water for several minutes Contact a doctor without delay Splashes of acid on your skin or clothes should be neutralised as soon as possible using soap suds and then rinsed with plenty of water Contact a doctor immediately if you swallow battery electrolyte Keep batteries out of the reach of children Hydrogen is released when you charge a battery and a highly explosive gas mixture is produced An explosion can be caused through sparkling over during unclamping or loosening of the cable plug while the ignition is on Bridging of the poles will create a short circuit e g through metal objects cables Possible conse
352. the possible maximum speed of your vehicle is higher The corresponding tyre cate gory can damage the tyres when exceeding the permissible maximum speed Please pay attention to the notes if you decide to fit winter tyres gt page 169 You can also fit so called all year tyres instead of winter tyres Please contact your specialist garage if there are any points which are not clear who will be able to provide you with information regarding the maximum speed for your tyres Z WARNING You must on no account drive your car at more than the permissible maximum speed for your winter tyres risk of an accident resulting from tyre damage and loss of control over your car Se For the sake of the environment Fit your summer tyres on again in good time since summer tyres offer you better grip and handling on roads which are free of snow and ice as well as ar temperatures below 7 C the braking distance is shorter there is less tyre noise tyre wear is reduced and fuel consumption is reduced a Note Please observe the various differing legal requirements regarding tyres m Unidirectional tyres The direction of rotation of the tyres is marked by arrows on the wall of the tyre This indicates the direction of rotation of the tyre and it is essential that the tyres are fitted on to run in this direction Only then are the tyres able to provide the optimal properties in terms of grip low noise wear and tear and aquaplaning
353. the range page 160 Oil will other wise be drawn in through the crankcase ventilation and may pass through the exhaust system to atmosphere The oil may combust in the catalytic converter and damage it m Changing engine oil The engine oil must be changed at the intervals stated in the Service schedule or according to the service interval indicator page 17 Z WARNING e Only carry out the engine oil change if you have the required professional knowledge Read and observe the warning notes gt page 158 Working in the engine compartment before working in the engine compartment e First of all let the engine cool down wear an eye protection and gloves risk of caustic burns due to hot oil Inspecting and Replenishing ter Caution You must not pour any additives into the engine oil risk of engine damage Damage which results from such product are excluded from the warranty D i gt For the sake of the environment e You must on no account pour oil into the ground or into the sewage system In view of the problems involved in properly disposing of old oil the necessary special tools and the knowledge required for such work we recommend that you have the oil and oil filter change carried out by an authorised Skoda Service Partner Note After your skin has come in contact with the oil you must thoroughly wash your skin m Cooling system Coolant The job of the coolant is to coo
354. the spare wheel well in the luggage compartment below the floor covering Fig 152 Luggage compartment Spare wheel The spare wheel lies in a well under the floor covering of the luggage compartment and is fixed in place along with a vehicle tool kit box using a special screw gt fig 152 One should check the inflation pressure in the spare wheel at best when generally checking the tyre air pressures see sign on the fuel filler flap page 156 to ensure that the spare wheel is always ready to use Unidirectional tyres If you have such tyres on your vehicle please refer to the notes below The spare wheel provided with a car fitted with unidirectional tyres has different dimensions The wheel is provided with a warning sticker The warning label must not be covered after installing the wheel e Do not drive faster than 80 km h with this spare wheel and pay particular atten tion while driving Avoid accelerating at full throttle sharp braking and fast cornering The inflation pressure for this spare wheel is identical to the inflation pressure of the standard tyres e Use this spare wheel only to reach the nearest specialist garage as it is not intended for continuous use E Changing a wheel Preliminary work The following steps should be carried out before actually changing the wheel Ifitis necessary to change a wheel park the vehicle as far away as possible from the traffic flow The place you choos
355. the vehicle key to the right and withdraw the key Press the fuel tank flap closed The correct grade of fuel for your vehicle as well as the tyre size and inflation pres sures are stated on a sticker affixed to the inside of the fuel filler flap Further infor mation on fuel gt page 155 Z WARNING Pay attention to any legal requirements if you do carry a spare canister in the vehicle We do not recommend carrying any fuel canisters in your vehicle for safety reasons The canister can be damaged in the event of an accident and fuel may leak out Caution Remove any fuel which has spilled onto the paintwork of your vehicle immedi ately risk of paint damage e On vehicles fitted with a catalytic converter never let the fuel tank run completely empty An irregular supply of fuel to the engine can result in misfiring and unburnt fuel may get into the exhaust system which may result in overheating and damage to the catalytic converter Make sure that the valve is not pressed into the filler tube when inserting the pump nozzle into the filler tube Otherwise you are unintentionally filling up the volume which in case of heat can cause an expansion of the fuel This can lead to an overflow of fuel or damage to parts of the fuel reservoir e The fuel tank is full just as soon as the pump nozzle switches off for the first time provided the nozzle has been operated properly Do not continue refuelling otherwise the
356. this work carried out by authorised Skoda Service Partners The authorised Skoda Service Partners have a range of matching touch up pens or spray cans available in the colour of your vehicle The paint number of the original paintwork of your vehicle is indicated on the vehicle data sticker page 198 If an corrosion arises this will need to be removed thoroughly Apply a corrosion protection primer and then the paint to the affected point You can of course have this work carried out by authorised Skoda Service Partners W Taking care of your vehicle and cleaning the vehicle as Plastic parts External plastic parts are cleaned by normal washing Plastic parts and synthetic leather can also be treated with special solvent free plastic cleaning agents if a damp cloth is not sufficient Paint care products are not suitable for plastic parts Caution Solvent free cleaners attack the material and can damage it m Windows Only use a plastic ice scraper for removing snow and ice from the windows and mirrors You should not move the ice scraper forward and backward but in one direc tion on the window which you are cleaning in order to avoid any damage to the surface of the glass You can best remove residues of rubber oil grease wax or silicone by using a special window cleaner or a special silicone remover You should also clean the windows regularly from the inside Do not use window leathers which you have used to polish t
357. ticularly near accident black spots You must always reduce your speed immediately as soon as you detect even just the slightest swaying of the trailer On no account attempt to stop the trailer from swaying by accelerating Apply the brakes in good time If the trailer is fitted with a trailer brake apply the brakes gently at first and then brake firmly This will avoid brake jolts resulting from the trailer wheels locking Shift down gears in good time before negotiating a downhill section to allow the engine to also act as a brake Engine overheating Please keep a check on the coolant temperature gauge if you have to negotiate a lengthy slope in a low gear at a high engine speed when the outside temperature is very high gt page 16 If the needle of the coolant temperature gauge moves into the right hand area or even the red area of the scale reduce your speed immediately Stop and switch off the engine if the warning light in the instrument cluster begins flashing Wait a few minutes and check the level of coolant in the coolant expansion bottle page 162 Inspecting the coolant level Please refer to the following guidelines gt page 28 Coolant temperature coolant quantity General Maintenance Taking care of your vehicle and cleaning the vehicle General Proper care helps retain the value of your vehicle Regular and proper care retains the value of your vehicle It may also be one of the requ
358. ting on the surface of the windows during the winter may result in a greater resistance when closing the windows and the window may stop and move back several centimetres It is necessary to put the force limiter out of operation in order to close the window gt page 42 Force limiter of the power windows Z WARNING The system is fitted with a force limiter gt page 42 If there is an obstacle the closing process is stopped and the window goes down by several centimetres You should then take particular care when closing the windows You may other wise suffer severe injuries as a result of getting an arm for example jammed in the window Caution Keep the window glass clean to ensure that electric power windows work prop erly Inthe event of a freezing up of the windscreen first of all eliminate the ice gt page 151 and then operate the power windows otherwise the power window mechanism could be damaged m Using the system Unlocking and locking ee Electric sliding tilting roof Description Fig 33 Detail of the headliner Control dial for the power sliding tilting roof B5J 4006H The sliding tilting roof is operated by means of the control dial fig 33 and only functions when the ignition is switched on The control dial has several positions After switching the ignition off it is still possible to open close and tilt the sliding tilting roof for approx 10 minutes It is no longe
359. to the lashing eyes with unsuitable or damaged lashing straps injuries can occur in the event of braking manoeuvres or accidents In order to prevent the items of luggage being thrown forward always use suitable lashing straps which are firmly attached to the lashing eyes m Fig 58 Fixing net double horizontal pocket floor fixing net double vertical pockets Fixing examples of the fixing net as double horizontal pocket floor fixing net fig 58 left and double vertical pockets fig 58 right The fixing nets and the installation instruction are located in the luggage compart ment Z WARNING e The whole strength of the net makes it possible to load the pocket with objects of up to 1 5 kg in weight Heavy objects are not secured sufficiently risk of injury and net damage e The load to be transported must be fixed in place in such a way that it cannot move during the journey and when braking Caution Do not place any objects with sharp edges in the nets risk of net damage m 62 Seats and Stowage Fixing nets Net programme Folding hooks Fig 59 Luggage compartment folding hook Fabia B5J 4011H Folding hooks for attaching small items of luggage such as bags etc are provided on both sides of the luggage compartment fig 59 Z WARNING Please refer to the following guidelines gt page 60 Caution An item of luggage weighing up to 7 5 kg can be attached to the hook
360. traint system otherwise this may result in injuries to the stomach and neck areas Comply with the national legal requirements One should never carry children and also not babies on one s lap You can transport a child safely in a suitable child safety seat gt page 127 Child seat e Only one child may be fastened with a seat belt into a child safety seat Never leave the child sitting unattended in the seat e Certain outside climatic conditions can cause life threatening temperatures in the vehicle Never allow your child to be transported in a vehicle without the use of a suitable restraint system Children should also never stand up in a vehicle or kneel on the seats when the vehicle is moving In the event of an accident the child will be thrown through the vehicle and may as a result suffer fatal injuries and also injure other occupants e Children are exposed to an increased risk of injury in the event of an accident if they lean forward or adopt an incorrect seated position when the vehicle is moving This particularly applies to children who are transported on the front passenger seat if the airbag system deploys in the event of an accident This can result in severe or even fatal injuries ZN WARNING continued e Itis important that the belt webbing is properly routed if the seat belts are to offer their maximum protection gt page 115 How are seat belts correctly fastened Pay p
361. ttempt at starting an engine after 10 seconds if it does not start right away and wait for about 30 seconds before repeating the attempt Disconnect the cables on the engine in exactly the reverse order they were connected up Z WARNING e The non insulated parts of the terminal clamps must never make contact with each other Furthermore the cable connected to the positive terminal of the battery must not come into contact with electrically conducting parts of the vehicle risk of a short circuit e Do not affix the jump starting cables to the negative terminal of the discharged battery There is the risk of detonating gas seeping out the battery being ignited by the strong spark which results from the engine being started Do not affix the cable end 4 to parts of the fuel and brake system Run the jump start cables so that they cannot be caught by any rotating parts in the engine compartment Do not bend over the batteries risk of caustic burns The vent screws of the battery cells must be tightened firmly e Keep any sources of ignition naked flame smouldering cigarettes etc away from the battery risk of an explosion e Never jump start the batteries which have a too low electrolyte level risk of explosion and caustic burns m Breakdown assistance EA Breakdown assistance Jump starting on vehicles with the START STOP system Fig 160 Jump starting on vehicles with the START STOP system O
362. tyre inflation pressure is 1 3 bar or less Donotdrive the vehicle You cannot properly seal with tyre with the breakdown kit Contact a Skoda dealer to obtain professional assistance If the tyre inflation pressure is 1 3 bar or more Adjust the tyre inflation pressure to the correct value see inside of fuel filler cap Drive carefully to the nearest specialist garage at a maximum speed of 80 km h 50 mph m Jump starting Initial steps You can use the battery of another vehicle for jump starting yours if the engine does not start because the battery on your vehicle is flat You will require jump start cables for this purpose Both batteries must have a rated voltage of 12 V The capacity Ah of the battery supplying the power must not be significantly less than the capacity of the discharged battery in your vehicle Jump start cables Only use jump start cables which have an adequately large cross section and insu lated terminal clamps Please pay attention to the manufacturer s instructions Positive cable colour coding in the majority of cases red Negative cable colour coding in the majority of cases black Z WARNING A discharged battery may already freeze at temperatures just below 0 C In case of frozen battery carry out no jump starting risk of explosion Also after thawing of the battery there is a risk of caustic burns due to leaking acid Replace the frozen battery Z WARNING
363. u can use a suitable adapter from Skoda original accessories This work must be carried out in accordance with the manufacturer s specifications if a towing device is retrofitted Authorised Skoda Service Partners can provide you with details relating to retrofit ting a towing device and for any necessary modifications to the cooling system Z WARNING We recommend that you have the towing device from Skoda original accessories installed by an authorised Skoda Service Partner He is familiar with all the rele vant details relating to retrofitting such equipment There is a risk of an accident if the towing device is not properly fitted m General Maintenance Trailer load The permissible trailer load must on no account be exceeded You can negotiate appropriately steeper inclines and descents if you do not make full use of the permissible trailer load The trailer loads specified only apply for altitudes up to 1000 metres above mean sea level The fact that the engine power output drops with increasing height due to a lowering of air pressure and thus the ability to climb means that the towed weight must be reduced by 10 for every further increase of 1000 metres in height above sea level The towed weight is the weight of the laden vehicle and the Driving Tips Towing a trailer w7 laden trailer together One should take this into account before driving up to higher altitudes The trailer and drawbar load infor
364. u should be familiar with for example regarding seat belts airbags child seats and safety of children It is therefore important in particular to comply with the notes and warn ings in this section for your own interest and in the interest of those travelling with you Z WARNING e This chapter contains important information on how to use the vehicle for the driver and his occupants You will find further information on safety which concerns you and those travelling with you in the following chapters of this Owner s Manual The complete on board literature should always be in the vehicle This applies in particular if you rent out or sell the vehicle m Safety equipment The safety equipment is part of the occupant protection and it can reduce the risk of injuries in accident situations Do not put at risk your safety and the safety of those travelling with you In the event of an accident the safety equipment can reduce the risk of injuries The following list contains part of the safety equipment in your vehicle three point seat belts for all the seats belt force limiters for front seats belt tensioners for front seats seat belt height adjusters for front seats Passive Safety 09 Front airbag for the driver and front passenger Side airbags Head airbags anchoring points for child seat using the ISOFIX system anchoring points for child seat using the Top Tether system
365. uctions from the charger manufacturer A charging current of 0 1 of the total battery capacity or lower is that which should be used until full charging is achieved It is however necessary to disconnect both cables before charging the battery with high amperages so called quick charging Quick charging a battery is dangerous gt A in General information on page 164 It requires a special charger and expertise We recommend having this quick battery change undertaken by a specialist garage A discharged battery may already freeze at temperatures just below 0 C gt A We recommend that you no longer use a battery which has thawed out because the casing of the battery may be cracked through the formation of ice and this would allow battery electrolyte to flow out The vent plugs of the battery should not be opened for charging Z WARNING Never charge a frozen or thawed battery risk of explosion and caustic burns Replace a frozen battery Never charge a battery which has a too low electrolyte level risk of explo sion and caustic burns Inspecting and Replenishing a67 Caution On vehicles with the START STOP system the pole terminal of the charger must not be connected directly to the negative terminal of the vehicle battery but only to the engine earth gt page 184 fig 160 m Disconnecting and reconnecting the battery On disconnecting and reconnecting the battery the fol
366. uitable for children and which comply with the standard ECE R 44 which classifies child safety seats into 5 groups gt page 127 Classification of child seats into groups Child restraint systems which have been tested for conformity to ECE R 44 standard have a non detachable test seal a large E within a circle and below this the test number attached to the seat We recommend that you use child safety seats from the Skoda genuine accessories These child seats were developed and also tested for use in Skoda vehicles They fulfil the ECE R 44 standard Z WARNING Always comply with national legal provisions and instructions from the relevant child safety seat manufacturer when installing and using a child seat gt in Important safety information regarding the use of child safety seats Transporting children safely a25 a Note National legal provisions which deviate from the information contained in these operating instructions take precedence over the information contained in the oper ating instructions m Important safety information regarding the use of child safety seats Correct use of child safety seats considerably reduces the risk of injury Z WARNING All the occupants of the car in particular children must wear a seat belt when the car is moving e Children who are less than 1 50 m in height and who weigh less than 36 kg must not use a normal seat belt without a child res
367. use petrol with the octane rating 91 RON in an emergency You must continue driving at medium engine speeds and minimum engine load High engine revs or a greater engine load can cause major damage to the engine Refuel as soon as possible with petrol of the prescribed octane number Even in case of necessity you must not use petrol of a lower octane rating than 91 RON otherwise the engine can be severely damaged Caution e All Skoda vehicles with petrol engines are equipped with a catalytic converter and must be only driven with unleaded petrol Filling the tank even only once with leaded petrol will result in the catalytic converter being destroyed e Only use unleaded petrol that satisfies the standard EN 228 in Germany also DIN 51626 1 or E10 for unleaded petrol with the octane rating 95 RON and 91 RON or DIN 51626 2 or E5 for unleaded petrol with the octane rating 98 If you use petrol with a lower octane number than the one prescribed the engine can be severely damaged m Diesel Diesel fuel Your vehicle can only be operated with diesel fuel which complies with the standard EN 590 standard DIN 51628 in Germany standard ONORM C 1590 in Austria GOST R 52368 2005 EN 590 2004 in Russia Fuel additives You must not use fuel additives so called flow improvers petrol and similar prod ucts in diesel fuel General Maintenance Fuel You can find information on refuelling page 156 Refuelling
368. utes or until the warning light goes out with the 4th or 5th gear engaged the warning light A flashes eutomatc gearbox postions when the afi Sustlon permits t Thie lneTeases if the set bet isnot fastened by the driver or front passenger during the next 90 P P P seconds the warning signal is deactivated and the warning light A lights up perma Always pay attention to the valid speed limits gt nently The warning light goes out after the successful cleaning of the diesel particle In case of aload on the front passenger seat e g a bag this is not recommended for filter safety reasons the warning light A indicates that the seat belt is not fastened If the filter is not properly cleaned the warning light does not go out and the Further information on the seat belts gt page 113 Why seat belts m warning light 00 begins to flash In the information displayDiesel particle filter owner s manual Car documentation appears Afterwards the engine control unit shifts the engine into the emergency mode which only has a reduced power output After switching the ignition off and on again the warning light comes on Have the vehicle inspected without delay by your specialist garage Z WARNING e If you do not pay attention to the warning light coming on and the corre sponding descriptions and warning notes this may result in injuries or major vehicle damage e Always adjust your speed to suit weather road region and traff
369. ver B5J 6129F The turn signal and main beam lever perform the following functions Right gt and left turn signal light Push the lever upwards a or downwards 8 fig 39 Ifyou only wish to flash three times the so called convenience turn signal push the lever briefly up to the upper or lower pressure point and release it Turn signal for changing lanes in order to only flash briefly move the lever up or down to the pressure point and hold it in this position Main beam EO Switch on the low beam Push the lever forwards in direction of arrow Ifyou push the lever into the initial position in the direction of arrow the main beam is switched off Headlight flasher 2D Pull the lever towards the steering wheel spring tensioned position the main beam and warning light EO in the instrument cluster come on Parking light PS Switch off the ignition Using the system Push the lever up or down the right hand or left hand parking light is switched on Information concerning the function of the lights e The turn signal system only operates when the ignition is switched on The corresponding warning light or gt in the instrument cluster also flashes The turn signal is automatically cancelled after negotiating a curve e The side light and rear light on the appropriate side of the vehicle are switched on when the parking light is selected The parking light function only operates if
370. very rapidly when braking In certain circum stances this can result in the rear end of the car breaking away risk of skidding Drive carefully to the nearest specialist garage and have the fault rectified m Brake system The warning light lights when the level of brake fluid is too low or there is a fault with the ABS If the warning light flashes and an audible signal sounds three times stop and check the brake fluid level gt A The following text will be displayed in the information display Brake fluid Owner s manual If there is a fault in the ABS which also influences the function of the brake system e g distribution of brake pressure the ABS warning light comes on and at the same time the brake system warning light starts flashing Be aware that not only the ABS but also another part of th brake system is defective gt A An audible signal sounds three times as an additional warning signal One should get used to high pedal forces an extended free play of the brake pedal and long braking distances when carefully driving to the specialist garage For further information on the brake system page 135 Brakes Z WARNING e Pay attention to the following instructions before checking the brake fluid level and opening the bonnet gt page 158 Working in the engine compart ment e Ifthe brake system warning light does not go out a few seconds after switching on the ignition
371. way that a folding back of the seat is prevented in case of a rear collision Never drive with the boot lid fully opened or slightly ajar otherwise exhaust gases may get into the interior of the vehicle risk of poisoning Onno account exceed the permissible axle loads and the permissible gross weight of the vehicle risk of accident e Never transport occupants in the luggage compartment Caution Please ensure that the heating elements of the rear window heater are not damaged as a result of objects sliding in this area a Note Tyre pressure must be adjusted to the load page 169 fig 148 m Vehicles of category N1 On vehicles of the category N1 which are not fitted with a protective grille a lashing set which complies with the standard EN 12195 1 4 must be used for fastening the load m Using the system Seats and Stowage A Fastening elements yA SSH SA Z Ss Za A Fig 57 Luggage compartment Lashing eyes and fastening elements Fabia Combi Fastening eyelets and fastening elements are located on the sides of the luggage compartment for securing the items of luggage gt fig 57 You can also attach fixing nets to these fastening eyelets and fastening elements for holding small objects Z WARNING e The load to be transported must be fixed in place in such a way that it cannot move during the journey and when braking e ifthe items of luggage or objects are attached
372. when a door is opened or after withdrawing the ignition key if the relevant switch is in the door contact position The inner light goes out out immediately after the ignition is switched on A time delay switch causes the inner lighting on vehicles without a central locking system stays on for a few seconds after the doors have been closed The inner light goes out out immediately after the ignition is switched on The interior lighting is switched off after about 10 minutes when a door has been left open in order to avoid discharging the battery of the vehicle Note We recommend having the bulb replaced by a specialist garage m interior vehicle lighting version 2 Fig 41 Interior lighting version 2 The rear interior lighting fig 41 is actuated by moving the switch to the symbol 75 O or to the middle position amp The same principles apply for interior lighting version 2 as for Interior lighting version 1 gt page 49 m Rear interior lighting Fig 42 Rear interior lighting The rear interior lighting is operated by pressing the button fig 42 The button has two positions for the interior lighting at the rear In the first position the interior lighting is switched on permanently in the second position after pressing it is switched via the door contacts a Note We recommend having the bulb replaced by a specialist garage m Lights and Visibility Be Lighting of the storage box on
373. win windaws stop 3 W Do not switch on ae Free windscreen and side windows Bo 4 Open and align with the side win FORGE Desired temperature 2or3 W Do not switch on Ta 7 To the right up to the o r The fastest heating stop 3 briefly switched on Opening Wo fy r Comfortable heating Desired temperature 2or3 4 i A Do not switch on Opening yo Fresh air mode ventilation Vain pa He NE Desired position a Do not switch on Opening a Note e Controls and button Q page 78 fig 91 Air outlet vents 4 gt page 78 fig 90 We recommend that you leave the air outlet vents 3 gt page 78 fig 90 in the opened position m Using the system Heating and air conditioning system Recirculated air mode In recirculated air mode air is sucked out of the interior of the vehicle and then fed back into the interior Recirculated air mode prevents polluted air outside the vehicle from getting into the vehicle for example when driving through a tunnel or when standing in a traffic jam Switching recirculated air mode on Press the button gt page 78 fig 91 the warning light lights up in the button Switching recirculated air mode off Press again the button Q the warning light in the button goes out The recirculated air mode is switched off automatically if the air distribution control is in position W gt page 78 fig 91 You can also switch recirculated air mode on again from t
374. wise a fault can occur in the system for the airbag deactivation e If the warning light OFF airbag switched off flashes Front passenger airbag is not deployed in the event of an accident It is also important to have the system inspected without delay by a specialist garage m Transporting children safely What you should know about transporting children An introduction to the subject Accident statistics have revealed that children are generally more safely transported on the rear seats than on the front passenger seat Children who are less than 1 50 m in height and who weigh less than 36 kg should under normal circumstances sit on the rear seat take note of any national legal provisions which differ from this They should be secured there by means of a child restraint system or by using the existing seat belts depending on their body size and weight The child seat should be mounted behind the front passenger seat for safety reasons The physical principle of an accident does of course also apply to children gt page 113 The physical principle of a frontal collision They differ from adults in that their muscles and bone structure of children are not yet fully developed Thus children are exposed to increased risk of injury Children should be transported by using special child safety seats in order to reduce this risk of injury Only use child safety seats which are officially approved s
375. with the other hand the head restraint downwards Removing and installing a head restraint Pull the head restraint out of the seat backrest as far as the stop Press the locking button in the direction of arrow gt page 57 fig 52 right and pull the head restraint out Tore insert the head restraint push it down into the seat backrest far enough until you hear the locking button engage The position of the front rear outer head restraints and the rear middle head restraint is adjustable for height The head restraints must be adjusted to match the size of the seat occupant Correctly adjusted head restraints together with the seat belts offer effective protection for the occupants gt page 110 Z WARNING The head restraints must be correctly adjusted in order to offer effective protection for the occupants in the event of an accident Do not drive under any circumstance with removed head restraints risk of injury e Ifthe rear seats are occupied the rear head restraint must not be in the lower position m Heating the front seats Fig 53 Rocker switch Front seat heating You can electrically heat the seat cushions and the seat backrests of the front seats By pressing the rocker switch in the position C or switch on the front seat heating to 25 or 100 of its power output fig 53 To switch off the heating shift the rocker switch into the horizontal position Z WARNING e I
376. y m Correct seated position for the occupants on the rear seats Occupants on the rear seats must sit upright keep the feet in the footwell and must have their seat belts correctly fastened To reduce the risk of injury in the event of a sudden braking manoeuvre or an acci dent the occupants on the rear seats must observe the following e Adjust the head restraints so that the top edge of the head restraints is at the same level as the upper part of your head page 110 fig 109 on the right Fasten the seat belt correctly page 115 How are seat belts correctly fastened e fyou are transporting page 125 Transporting children safely children in the vehicle please use a suitable child restraint system Z WARNING e The head restraints must always be adjusted to match the body size in order to offer an optimal protection for you and your occupants e Always keep your feet in the footwell when the car is being driven never put your feet out of the window or on the surfaces of the seats You will be exposed to increased risk of injury if it becomes necessary to apply the brake or in the event of an accident If the head airbag is deployed and when adopting an incorrect seated position you are exposing yourself to an increased risk of injury and in the event of an accident you may suffer fatal injuries ZN WARNING continued e If the occupants on the rear seats are not sitting upright the
377. y be disposed of in regular domestic waste m Windshield washer system Fig 147 Engine compartment Wind shield washer fluid reservoir The windshield washer reservoir contains the cleaning fluid for the windscreen or rear window and for the headlamp cleaning system The reservoir is located in the front of the engine compartment on the right side of the vehicle fig 147 On some vehicles the reservoir is located on the left side of the vehicle next to the battery The filling level of the container is about 3 5 litres and about 5 4 litres on vehicles which have a headlight washing system Clear water is not sufficient to intensively clean the windscreen and headlights We therefore recommend using clean washing water together with the screen cleaner from Skoda genuine accessories in winter additionally with antifreeze which is capable of removing stubborn dirt Follow the instructions for use on the packaging when using screen cleaning products You should always add antifreeze to the cleaning water in winter even if your vehicle is fitted with heated windscreen washer nozzles It is also possible in exceptional cases to use methylated spirits when no screen cleaner with antifreeze is available The concentration of methylated spirits must not be more than 15 Please note however that the antifreeze protection at this concentration is only adequate down to 5 C A Inspecting and Replenishing Z WARNING Read and o
378. y by a specialist garage if a fault exists Otherwise there is a risk of the airbag not being activated in the event of an accident e No modifications of any kind may be made to parts of the airbag system tis prohibited to manipulate individual parts of the airbag system as this might result in the airbag being deployed e The protective function of the airbag system is sufficient for only one acci dent The airbag system must then be replaced if the airbag has been deployed e The airbag system needs no maintenance during its working life e Ifyou sell your car please hand over the complete vehicle documentation to the new owener Please note that the documents relating to the possibility of deactivating the front passenger airbag are also part of the vehicle documents e If the vehicle or individual parts of the airbag system are scrapped it is essential to observe the relevant safety precautions The authorised Skoda Service Partners are familiar with these regulations When disposing of vehicle or parts of the airbag system it is important to comply with the national legal requirements m When are the airbags deployed The airbag system is designed in such a way that the driver and front passenger airbag are deployed in the event of a violent frontal collision In the case of a violent side crash the side airbag in the front seat and the head airbag on the side on which the collision occurs are deployed It is also possi
379. ycle and the window of the boot lid If necessary adapt the position of the moveable Position the approved bicycle carrier on the cross member after pulling up the part of the bicycle carrier in such a way that no collision can occur gt page 68 screw gt fig 70 push the frame side rail alu part towards the cross member until the socket latches and screw the screw A into the nut f Fig 70 Install bicycle carrier Itis best to push the removed front wheel between the crank of the left pedal and the bicycle frame attach it with a strap to the front fork fig 71 right Slacken the screw 8 and take it out of the moveable part of the fixture posi and or to a fixing point tion the moveable part of the carrier depending on bicycle size into one of the possible positions so that it does not come in contact with the boot lid We recommend to place the moveable part of the fixture in such a position that the holes are visible between the screw A and the moveable part Perform the installation of the second fixture and the attachment of the bicycle analogously Make sure that it does not lead to damage of the trim panel of the luggage compartment the bicycle and the placed objects Insert the screw B into the desired position and tighten m Put bicycle into the bicycle carrier A WARNING Place the bicycles in the bicycle carrier in such a position that no collision between the steering arm and the side
380. you should first apply the handbrake firmly and then move the selector lever into position P This is to ensure that there is no excessive pres sure acting on the lock mechanism and that it is easier to subsequently move the selector lever out of position P If the selector lever is not in position P when opening the driver s door and when the ignition is switched off or when it is not in position P when switching off the ignition when the door is open the following message appears in the information display Move selector lever to position P or in the instrument cluster display gt P The message disappears after a few seconds by switching on the ignition or by moving the selector lever into the position P If the selector lever position N is selected by accident while driving it is first neces sary to release pressure on the accelerator pedal and wait for idling speed of the engine to be reached before engaging a drive position in the selector lever Z WARNING Do not depress the accelerator when changing the position of the selector lever if the car is stationary and the engine is running risk of accident Never move the selector lever into position R or P when driving risk of an accident e Ifyou are stopping at a hill downhill section never try to hold the car stationary with the gear engaged by means of the accelerator this means by letting the clutch slip This can lead to overheating of the clutch If there we
381. ystem and place the warning triangle on the side of the road at the prescribed distance from your vehicle Comply with the national legal regulations In this Way you are protecting not only yourself but also other road users Park the vehicle as far away as possible from the traffic flow Park on as flat and firm a surface as possible e Atyre filled with sealant has the same driving characteristics as a standard tyre Do not drive faster than 80 km h 50 mph Avoid accelerating at full throttle sharp braking and fast cornering Check the tyre inflation pressure after driving 10 minutes Sealant is hazardous to heath Remove immediately if it comes into contact with the skin Se For the sake of the environment Used sealant or sealant whose expiry date has passed must be disposed of in accordance with environmental protection regulations a Note Observe the manufacturer s usage instructions for the tyre repair kit e You can purchase a new bottle of sealant from the range of the Skoda original accessories Change the wheel that was repaired using the tyre repair kit or consult a specialist garage about possibilities for getting repairs done m Components of the tyre repair kit BSJ 6127F Fig 158 Components of the tyre repair kit The tyre repair kit is made up of the following parts Valve remover Sticker with speed designation max 80 km h max 50 mph Inflation hose with plug Compr

User Manual PDF

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents